High Performance Compact Inverter

User's Manual

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Copyright © 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA
Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Preface
This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters including its operating
procedure, operation modes, and selection of peripheral equipment. Carefully read this manual for proper use.
Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and/or related equipment from operating correctly,
shorten their lives, or cause problems.
The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-Multi. Read them in conjunction with
this manual as necessary.

Name Description

Product scope, features, specifications, external drawings, and options of the

Catalog
product
Acceptance inspection, mounting & wiring of the inverter, operation using the
Instruction Manual keypad, running the motor for a test, troubleshooting, and maintenance and
inspection

The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
i
 Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving
High Voltage or Special High Voltage
Refer to this manual, Appendix B for details on this guideline.

Safety precautions
Read this manual and the FRENIC-Multi Instruction Manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation,
connections (wiring), operation, or maintenance and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the
product and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the
inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries
and/or substantial property damage.

Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences.
These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.

This product is not designed for use in appliances and machinery on which lives depend. Consult your Fuji
Electric representative before considering the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters for equipment and
machinery related to nuclear power control, aerospace uses, medical uses or transportation. When the
product is to be used with any machinery or equipment on which lives depend or with machinery or
equipment which could cause serious loss or damage should this product malfunction or fail, ensure that
appropriate safety devices and/or equipment are installed.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
ii
 „ Precautions for Use
When driving a 460 V general-purpose motor with an inverter using
Driving a 460 V extremely long wires, damage to the insulation of the motor may occur. Use
general-purpose an output circuit filter (OFL) if necessary after checking with the motor
motor manufacturer. Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters
because of their reinforced insulation.
When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose motor, the temperature
of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial
Torque
power supply. In the low-speed range, the cooling effect will be weakened,
characteristics and
so decrease the output torque of the motor. If constant torque is required in
temperature rise
the low-speed range, use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor equipped with an
In running externally powered ventilating fan.
general-
purpose When an inverter-driven motor is mounted to a machine, resonance may be
motors caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system.
Note that operation of a 2-pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause
Vibration abnormal vibration.
* The use of a rubber coupling or vibration-proof rubber is recommended.
* Use the inverter's jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance
frequency zone(s).
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose motor, the motor noise
level is higher than that with a commercial power supply. To reduce noise,
Noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter. Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also
result in higher level of wind roaring sound.
If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high-speed
High-speed
motor, test-run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to
motors check for safe operation.

Explosion-proof When driving an explosion-proof motor with an inverter, use a combination

motors of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance.

These motors have a higher rated current than general-purpose motors.

Select an inverter whose rated output current is higher than that of the
Submersible motor.
motors and pumps These motors differ from general-purpose motors in thermal characteristics.
Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the
In running electronic thermal overcurrent protection (for motor).
special
motors For motors equipped with parallel-connected brakes, their power supply for
brake must be supplied from the inverter’s primary circuit. If the power
Brake motors supply for brake is connected to the inverter's output circuit by mistake, the
brake will not work.
Do not use inverters for driving motors with series-connected brake coils.
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-lubricated gearbox or
Geared motors speed changer/reducer, then continuous motor operation at low speed may
cause poor lubrication. Avoid such operation.
Synchronous It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type. Contact
motors your Fuji Electric representative for details.
Single-phase Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-driven variable speed
motors operation. Use three-phase motors.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
iii
 Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from -10 to +50qC.
The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under
Environ- certain operating conditions, so install the inverter on nonflammable
Installation material such as metal.
mental
location
conditions Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions
specified in Chapter 8, Section 8.4 "Operating Environment and Storage
Environment."
Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
Installing an residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/ground-fault circuit
MCCB or interrupter (GFCI) (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of
RCD/GFCI each inverter to protect the wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity
is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed in the inverter's output (secondary)
circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other
Installing an MC purpose, ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped
in the secondary before you turn the MC on or off.
circuit
Remove a surge killer integrated with the magnetic contactor in the
inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit on or off
Installing an MC more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result.
in the primary
circuit If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation, use terminal
[FWD]/[REV] signals or the RUN/STOP key.
The electronic thermal feature of the inverter can protect the motor. The
operation level and the motor type (general-purpose motor, inverter motor)
should be set. For high-speed motors or water-cooled motors, set a small
value for the thermal time constant.
Protecting the
Combina- motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire, a
tion with high-frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance. This
peripheral may cause the thermal relay to trip at a current lower than the set value. If
devices this happens, lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter
(OFL).
Discontinuance of Do not connect power-factor correcting capacitors to the inverter’s primary
power-factor circuit. (Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor.) Do not
correcting use power-factor correcting capacitors in the inverter’s output (secondary)
capacitor circuit. An overcurrent trip will occur, disabling motor operation.
Discontinuance of
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
surge killer
Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC
Directive.
Reducing noise
Refer to Appendices, App. A "Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on
electrical noise)" for details.
If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under
Measures against light load, it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open/close of
surge currents the phase-advancing capacitor in the power system.
* Connect a DC reactor to the inverter.
When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter, use a 500 V megger
Megger test and follow the instructions contained in the FRENIC-Multi Instruction
Manual, Chapter 7, Section 7.5 "Insulation Test."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
iv
 Control circuit When using remote control, limit the wiring length between the inverter and
wiring length operator panel to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire.
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the inverter may
Wiring length overheat or trip due to overcurrent because a higher harmonics current
between inverter flows into the stray capacitance between each phase wire. Ensure that the
and motor wiring is shorter than 50 m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
Wiring carrier frequency or install an output circuit filter (OFL).
Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or
Wire size
recommended wire size.
Do not share one multi-core cable in order to connect several inverters with
Wire type
motors.
Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal.
Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor ratings listed in
the standard specifications table for the inverter.
Driving
general-purpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration
Selecting is required, select an inverter with one rank larger capacity than the
inverter motor
standard. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.1 "Selecting Motors and Inverters"
capacity for details.
Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition:
motors Inverter rated current > Motor rated current
Transpor- When transporting or storing inverters, follow the procedures and select locations that meet the
tation and environmental conditions listed in the FRENIC-Multi Instruction Manual, Chapter 1, Section 1.3
storage "Transportation" and Section 1.4 "Storage Environment."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
v
 How this manual is organized

This manual contains Chapters 1 through 9, Appendices and Glossary.

Part 1 General Information

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi

This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC-Multi series, and the recommended
configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.

Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC-Multi series and an overview of terminal blocks, including a
description of the LED display and keys on the keypad.

Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation modes (Running,
Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor, monitor running status, set function
code data, display running information required for maintenance, and display alarm data.

Part 2 Driving the Motor

Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.

Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION

This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS-485 communications facility. Refer to
the RS-485 Communication User's Manual or RS-485 Communications Card "OPC-E1-RS" Installation Manual
for details.

Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options

Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Multi's configuration
with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.

Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model

Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection procedure,
and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It also helps you
select braking resistors.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
vi
 Part 5 Specifications

Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, and terminal functions for the
FRENIC-Multi series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment,
external dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.

Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES

This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC-Multi series of
inverters and details of each function code.

Appendices

Glossary

Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to
full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can
result in accidents.

This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.

This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
vii
 CONTENTS

Part 1 General Information

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi

1.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Control System ....................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.3 Recommended Configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-13

Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks.................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad .......................................................................... 2-2

Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

3.1 Overview of Operation Modes ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Running Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Monitoring the running status ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Setting up frequency and PID commands ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3 Running/stopping the motor................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.2.4 Jogging Operation ............................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3 Programming Mode ................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.3.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly -- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --.............................................. 3-12
3.3.2 Setting up function codes -- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --................................................................... 3-16
3.3.3 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" -- .................................................. 3-17
3.3.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" -- ................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" -- ............................................................... 3-21
3.3.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" -- ................................ 3-26
3.3.7 Reading alarm information -- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --...................................................... 3-29
3.4 Alarm Mode............................................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode ....................................................................... 3-32
3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................................. 3-32
3.4.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm ....................................................................... 3-32
3.4.4 Switching to Programming mode...................................................................................................... 3-32

Part 2 Driving the Motor

Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

4.1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings ............................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Drive Frequency Command Block ........................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Drive Command Block ............................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4 Control Block............................................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.5 PID Process Control Block ..................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6 PID Dancer Control Block...................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.7 FM Output Selector ................................................................................................................................ 4-19

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
viii
 Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION
5.1 Overview on RS-485 Communication...................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications (standard and optional)..................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 RJ-45 connector pin assignment for standard RS-485 communications port...................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Pin assignment for optional RS-485 Communications Card............................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Cable for RS-485 communications port.............................................................................................. 5-4
5.1.5 Communications support devices........................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3 Function overview............................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3.1 Setting of function code .............................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.3.2 Multi-monitor.............................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.3.3 Running status monitor ............................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.3.4 Test-running .............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.3.5 Real-time trace—Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms ................................ 5-11

Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options

Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Multi................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Recommended wires ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.4 Selecting Options.................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options............................................................................................................ 6-14
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications ...................................................................................... 6-23
6.4.3 Meter options .................................................................................................................................... 6-26

Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model

Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 7-7
7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 7-8
7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor............................................................................... 7-11
7.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor .................................................................................. 7-12
7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.1 Selection procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................. 7-13

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
ix
 Part 5 Specifications

Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Standard Models ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Three-phase 230 V .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 460 V .............................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Single-phase 230 V ............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2 Common Specifications............................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.3 Terminal Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.3.1 Terminal functions .............................................................................................................................. 8-8
8.3.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications.................................................................. 8-19
8.3.2.1 Main circuit terminals ............................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.2.2 Control circuit terminals............................................................................................................ 8-20
8.4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment ................................................................................. 8-21
8.4.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2.1 Temporary storage..................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2.2 Long-term storage ..................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5 External Dimensions............................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.1 Standard models ................................................................................................................................ 8-23
8.5.2 Standard keypad ................................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.6 Connection Diagrams ............................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.6.1 Running the inverter with keypad ..................................................................................................... 8-27
8.6.2 Running the inverter by terminal commands .................................................................................... 8-28
8.7 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................... 8-30

Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES

9.1 Function Code Tables ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Overview of Function Codes .................................................................................................................. 9-14
9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ...................................................................................................... 9-14
9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)............................................................................................. 9-43
9.2.3 C codes (Control functions) .............................................................................................................. 9-70
9.2.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) ........................................................................................................... 9-77
9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions) ............................................................................................. 9-80
9.2.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters)......................................................................................................... 9-102
9.2.7 J codes (Application functions)....................................................................................................... 9-104
9.2.8 y codes (Link functions).................................................................................................................. 9-119

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
x
 Appendices

App.A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)................................................................... A-1

A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices ....................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Noise...................................................................................................................................................... A-2
A.3 Noise prevention.................................................................................................................................... A-4
App.B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters.......................... A-12
B.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ............................................................................................ A-12
B.2 Effect of surge voltages ....................................................................................................................... A-13
B.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages ............................................................................................. A-13
B.4 Regarding existing equipment ............................................................................................................. A-14
App.C Inverter Generating Loss ..................................................................................................................... A-15
App.D Conversion from SI Units.................................................................................................................... A-16
App.E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ................................................................................................. A-18
App.F Replacement Information .................................................................................................................... A-20
F.1 External dimensions comparison tables............................................................................................... A-20
F.2 Terminal arrangements and symbols ................................................................................................... A-23
F.3 Function codes..................................................................................................................................... A-26

Glossary

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
xi
 Part 1 General Information

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi

Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC-Multi series and the recommended
configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.

Contents

1.1 Features....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Control System.......................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.3 Recommended Configuration ................................................................................................................... 1-13

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 1.1 Features

Chap. 1
1.1 Features
Environment-friendly

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
„ Complies with European regulations that limit the use of specific hazardous
substances (RoHS)
These inverters are gentle on the environment.
Use of 6 hazardous substances is limited. (Products manufactured beginning in the autumn of 2005 will
comply with European regulations (except for interior soldering in the power module.))

<Six Hazardous Substances>

Lead, Mercury, Cadmium, Hexavalent Chromium, Polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), Polybrominated
diphenyl ether (PBDE)

<About RoHS>
The Directive 2002/95/EC, promulgated by the European Parliament and European Council, limits the
use of specific hazardous substances included in electrical and electronic devices.

„ Long-life design
The design life of each internal component with limited life has been extended to 10 years. This helps to
extend the maintenance cycle for your equipment.

Limited Life Component Service Life

Main circuit capacitors 10 years
Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years
Cooling fan 10 years
Conditions: Ambient temperature is 40°C (104°F) and load factor is 80% of the inverter's rated current.

„ Noise is reduced by the built-in EMC filter

Use of a built-in EMC filter that reduces noise generated by the inverter makes it possible to reduce the
effect on peripheral equipment.

Expanded capacity range and abundant model variation

„ Standard Series

Figure 1.1

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-1
 „ Semi-standard Series
- Models with built-in EMC filter
- Models with built-in PG interface card
- Models with built-in RS-485 communications card
- Models for synchronous motors

Figure 1.2

The highest standards of control and performance in its class

„ Shortened setting time in slip compensation control
Through "slip compensation control" + "voltage tuning," speed control accuracy at low speeds is
improved. This minimizes variations in speed control accuracy at times when the load varies, and since
the time at creep speeds is shortened, single cycle tact times can be shortened.

Figure 1.3

„ Equipped with the highest level CPU for its class

The highest level CPU of any inverter is used. Computation and processing capacity is doubled over the
previous inverter, improving speed control accuracy.
CPU speed comparison

Figure 1.4
„ Compatible with PG feedback control

Figure 1.5
1-2
 1.1 Features

Chap. 1
„ Tripless deceleration by automatic deceleration control
The inverter controls the energy level generated and the deceleration time, and so deceleration stop can
be accomplished without tripping due to overvoltage.

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
Figure 1.6

Optimum for the operations specific to vertical and horizontal conveyance

„ Hit-and-stop control is realized more easily

Impacts are detected mechanically and not only can the inverter's operation pattern be set on
coast-to-stop or deceleration stop, but switching from torque limitation to current limitation and
generating a holding torque (hit-and-stop control) can be selected, making it easy to adjust brake
application and release timing.

Figure 1.7

„ Inclusion of a brake signal makes it even more convenient

At brake release time
After the motor operates, torque generation is detected and signals are output.

At brake application time

Brake application that matches the timing can be done, and so mechanical brake wear is reduced.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-3
 „ Limit operations can be selected to match your equipment
Inverters are equipped with two limit operations, "torque limitation" and "current limitation," so either
can be selected to match the equipment you are using the inverter with.
Torque limitation
In order to protect mechanical systems, this function accurately limits the torque generated by the motor.
(Instantaneous torque cannot be limited.)
Current limitation
This function limits the current flowing to the motor to protect the motor thermally or to provide rough
load limitation. (Instantaneous current cannot be limited. Auto tuning is not required.)

Simple and thorough maintenance

„ The life information on each of the inverter's limited life components is displayed

Figure 1.8

„ Simple cooling fan replacement

Construction is simple, enabling quick removal of the top cover and making it easy to replace the
cooling fan. (7.5 HP or higher models)
Cooling fan replacement procedure

The cover on top of the Simply disconnect the

inverter can be quickly power connector and
removed. replace the cooling fan.
Figure 1.9

„ Information that contributes to equipment maintenance is displayed

In addition to inverter maintenance information, data that also take equipment maintenance into
consideration are displayed.

Item Purpose
Motor cumulative The actual cumulative running time of the equipment (motor) the inverter is being
running time (hr) used with is calculated.
<Example of use>
If the inverter is used to control a fan, this information is an indication of the timing
for replacing the belt that is used on the pulleys.
Number of starts The number of times the inverter starts and stops can be counted.
(times) <Example of use>
The number of equipment starts and stops is recorded, and so this information can
be used as a guideline for parts replacement timing in equipment in which starting
and stopping puts a heavy load on the machinery.
1-4
 1.1 Features

Chap. 1
„ The alarm history records the latest four incidents
Detailed information can be checked for the four most recent alarms.

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
Simple operation, simple wiring

„ A removable keypad is standard equipment

The keypad can be easily removed and reset, making remote operation possible. If the back cover
packed with the inverter is installed and a LAN cable is used, the keypad can be easily mounted on the
equipment's control panel.

Figure 1.10

„ A removable interface board is used

The interface board is used as a terminal block for control signals. Since it is removable, wiring
operations are simple.

Figure 1.11

All types and variations of interface board are available as options (available soon). Optional interface
boards have the same dimensions as the standard interface board supplied with the inverter, so it is
possible to meet optional specifications using the same installation space as with standard specification
models.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-5
 „ A multi-function keypad which enables a wide variety of operations is available
A multi-function keypad is available as an option. This keypad features a large 7-segment LED with five
digits and large backlit liquid crystal panel. Its view-ability is high, and guidance is displayed on the
liquid crystal panel, therefore operations can be conducted simply. (A copy function is included.)

Figure 1.12

„ Inverter support loader software is available (On sale soon)

Windows compatible loader software is available to simplify the setting and management of function
codes.

RS-485 communication
(RJ-45 connector)

Personal computer

USB/RS-485
converter
(made by System
Sacom Sales
Corp.)

USB cable
(that comes with
the converter)

Figure 1.13

„ Simulated failure enables peripheral device operation checks

The inverter has the function for outputting dummy alarm signals, enabling simple checking of sequence
operations of peripheral devices from the control panel where the inverter is used.

Consideration of peripheral equipment, and a full range of protective functions

„ Side-by-side mounting saves space

If your control panel is designed to use multiple inverters, these inverters make it possible to save space
through their horizontal side-by-side installation. (5 HP or smaller models)

(The 3-phase 230 V, 1 HP

model is shown here.)

Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 1.14

1-6
 1.1 Features

Chap. 1
„ Resistors for suppressing inrush current are built in, making it possible to reduce the
capacity of peripheral equipment
When FRENIC-Multi Series (including FRENIC-Mini Series, FRENIC-Eco Series and 11 Series) is

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
used, the built-in resistor suppresses the inrush current generated when the motor starts. Therefore, it is
possible to select peripheral equipment with lower capacity when designing your system than the
equipment needed for direct connection to the motor.

„ Outside panel cooling is also made possible using

the mounting adapter for external cooling (option). The mounting adapter for external cooling (option)
can be installed easily as an outside panel cooling system. This function is standard on 7.5 HP or higher
models.

You can use an inverter equipped with functions like these

„ New system for more energy-efficient operation
Previous energy saving operation functions worked only to control the motor's loss to keep it at a
minimum in accordance with the load condition. In the newly developed FRENIC-Multi Series, the
focus has been switched away from the motor alone to both the motor and the inverter as electrical
products. As a result, we incorporated a new control system (optimum and minimum power control) that
minimizes the power consumed by the inverter itself (inverter loss) and the loss of the motor.

Figure 1.15

„ Smooth starts through the auto search

In the case where a fan is not being run by the inverter but is turning free, the fan's speed is checked,
regardless of its rotational direction, and operation of the fan is picked up to start the fan smoothly. This
function is convenient in such cases as when switching instantaneously from commercial power supply
to the inverter.

Figure 1.16
1-7
 „ Equipped with a full range of PID control functions
Differential alarm and absolute value alarm outputs have been added for PID regulator which carry out
process controls such as temperature, pressure and flowrate control. In addition, an anti-reset windup
function to prevent PID control overshoot and other PID control functions which can be adjusted easily
through PID output limiter, integral hold/reset signals are provided. The PID output limiter and integral
hold/reset signals can also be used in cases where the inverter is used for dancer control.

„ Operating signal trouble is avoided by the command loss detection function

If frequency signals connected to the inverter (0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, Multi-speed signals,
communications, etc.) are interrupted, the missing frequency commands are detected as a "command
loss." Further, the frequency that is output when command loss occurs can be set in advance, so
operation can be continued even in cases where the frequency signal lines are cut due to mechanical
vibrations of the equipment, etc.

Figure 1.17

„ An overload stop function protects equipment from over-operation

If the load on equipment suddenly becomes great while controlled by the inverter, the inverter can be
switched to deceleration stop or to coast-to-stop operation to prevent damage to the equipment.

Figure 1.18

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-8
 1.1 Features

Chap. 1
„ Continuous equipment operation with overload avoidance control
If the fans or pulleys are entangled with foreign material so as to increase the load and cause a sudden
temperature rise in the inverter or if the ambient temperature abnormally rises, then the inverter becomes

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
overloaded so that it reduces the motor speed to lessen the load for continuing operation.

Figure 1.19

Fully compatible with network operation

„ RS-485 communications (connector) is standard

A connector (RJ-45) compatible with RS-485 communication is provided as standard (1 port, also used
for keypad communication), so the inverter can be connected easily using an off-the-shelf LAN cable
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).
RJ-45 connector

Figure 1.20

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-9
 „ Complies with optional networks using option cards (Available soon)
Installation of special interface cards (option) makes it possible to connect to the following networks.
- DeviceNet
- PROFIBUS-DP
- CC-Link

„ Wiring is easy with the RS-485 communications card (optional)

The RS-485 communications card is available as an option. It has a pair of RJ-45 connectors that acts as
a transfer port for a multidrop network configuration, independently of the communications port (RJ-45)
provided as standard on the inverter.
Important points
(1) A pair of RJ-45 connectors, eliminating the provision of a separate multidrop adaptor.
(2) Built-in terminating resistor, eliminating the provision of a separate terminating resistor.

Figure 1.21 RS-485 Communications Card (option)

Example of configuration with peripheral equipment

Figure 1.22 Inverters Totally Controlled by POD

Global standard compliance

z Complies with standards
z Sink/Source switchable
z Wide voltage range
z The multi-function keypad displays multiple languages
(Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, and Korean).
* There are two types of multi-function keypad.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-10
 1.2 Control System

Chap. 1
1.2 Control System
This section gives you a general overview of inverter control systems and features specific to the

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.
As shown in Figure 1.24, the converter section converts the input commercial power to DC power by
means of a full-wave rectifier, which charges the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir capacitor). The
inverter portion modulates the electric energy charged in the DC link bus capacitor by Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) according to the control circuit signals and feeds the output to the motor. (The
PWMed frequency is called the "Carrier Frequency.")
The voltage applied to the motor has a waveform modulated by the carrier frequency from the dynamic
torque vector flux controller that estimates the optimal PWM signal monitoring the inverter output
current feedback, as shown on the left-hand side ("PWM voltage waveform") of Figure 1.23. The
voltage consists of alternating cycles of positive and negative pulse trains synchronizing with the
inverter’s output frequency.
The current running through the motor, on the other hand, has a fairly smooth alternating current (AC)
waveform shown on the right-hand side ("Current waveform") of Figure 1.23, thanks to the inductance
of the motor coil. The control block section controls the PWM so as to bring this current waveform as
close to a sinusoidal waveform as possible.

PWM voltage waveform Current waveform

Figure 1.23 Output Voltage and Current Waveform of the Inverter

For the reference frequency given in the control block, the accelerator/decelerator processor calculates
the acceleration/deceleration rate required by run/stop control of the motor and transfers the calculated
results to the voltage calculator directly or via the dynamic torque vector flux controller, whose output
drives the PWM block to switch the power gates.
The FRENIC-Multi series features the dynamic torque vector controller with the flux estimator, which is
always correcting the magnetic flux phase while monitoring the inverter output current as the feedback.
This feature allows the inverter to always apply the drive power with an optimal voltage and current and
consequently respond to quick load variation or speed change.
The feature also estimates the generated torque of the motor from the estimated flux data and output
current to the motor to improve the motor efficiency for matching the current operation situation

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-11
 The control block section, which is the very brain of the inverter, allows you to customize the inverter's
driving patterns throughout the function code data settings.

<Main circuit >

Converter Inverter

Current
Power DC link bus
detection
capacitor Motor
supply

+
M

<Control block>

Accelerator/
decelerator
processor Dynamic torque PWM
vector controller
Frequency with flux estimator
command or voltage calculator

Figure 1.24 Schematic Overview Block Diagram of FRENIC-Multi

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-12
 1.3 Recommended Configuration

Chap. 1
1.3 Recommended Configuration
To control a motor with an inverter correctly, you should consider the rated capacity of both the motor

INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Multi
and the inverter and ensure that the combination matches the specifications of the machine or system to
be used.
After selecting the rated capacities, select appropriate peripheral equipment for the inverter, then
connect them to the inverter.
Figure 1.25 shows the recommended configuration for an inverter and peripheral equipment.

Figure 1.25 Recommended Configuration Diagram

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
1-13
 Chapter 2
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC-Multi series and an overview of terminal blocks, including
a description of the LED monitor, keys and LED indicators on the keypad.

Contents

2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks...................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad ............................................................................ 2-2

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks

2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks

Figure 2.1 shows the external views of the FRENIC-Multi.

Chap. 2
(1) External views

PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Figure 2.1 FRN020E1S-2U

(2) Terminal block location

(a) FRN001E1S-2U (b) FRN020E1S-2U

Figure 2.2 Terminal Blocks

Refer to Chapter 8 "SPECIFICATIONS" for details on terminal functions, arrangement and

connection and to Chapter 6, Section 6.2.1 "Recommended wires" when selecting wires.
For details on the keys and their functions, refer to Section 2.2 "LED Monitor, Keys and LED
Indicators on the Keypad." For details on keying operation and function code setting, refer to
Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
2-1
2.2 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad
7-segment LED
As shown at the right, the keypad consists LED monitor indicators
of a four-digit LED monitor, six keys, and
five LED indicators.
The keypad allows you to run and stop
the motor, monitor running status, and
switch to the menu mode. In the menu Program/ RUN key
mode, you can set the function code data, Reset key
monitor I/O signal states, maintenance RUN LED
information, and alarm information. Function/
Data key STOP
key

UP key DOWN key

Figure 2.3 Keypad

Table 2.1 Overview of Keypad Functions

LED Monitor,
Item Keys, and Functions
LED Indicators
Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the
operation modes.
„ In Running mode: Running status information (e.g., output frequency, current,
LED
and voltage)
Monitor
„ In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
„ In Alarm mode: Alarm code, which identifies the alarm factor if the
protective function is activated.
Program/Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter.
„ In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming
mode.
„ In Programming mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode.
„ In Alarm mode: Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will
switch the inverter to Running mode.
Function/Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as
follows:
„ In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed
concerning the status of the inverter (output frequency
Operation (Hz), output current (A), output voltage (V), etc.).
„ In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the
Keys
data entered with and keys.
„ In Alarm mode: Pressing this key displays the details of the problem
indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED
monitor.
RUN key. Press this key to run the motor.

STOP key. Press this key to stop the motor.

UP and DOWN keys. Press these keys to select the setting items and change the
and
function code data displayed on the LED monitor.
RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active.
Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the key.
KEYPAD
(F02 = 0, 2, or 3) In Programming and Alarm modes, you cannot run the inverter even
CONTROL LED
if the indicator lights.
LED The three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in
Indicators Unit and mode Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them.
Unit: kW, A, Hz, r/min and m/min
expression by the Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1 "Monitoring the running status" for details.
three LED
While the inverter is in Programming mode, the LEDs of Hz and „ Hz
indicators
kW light. † A
„ kW
2-2
 2.2 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad

„ LED monitor
In Running mode, the LED monitor displays running status information (output frequency, current or
voltage); in Programming mode, it displays menus, function codes and their data; and in Alarm mode, it

Chap. 2
displays an alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated.
If one of LED4 through LED1 is blinking, it means that the cursor is at this digit, allowing you to change
it.

PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

If the decimal point of LED1 is blinking, it means that the currently displayed data is a value of the PID
process command, not the frequency data usually displayed.


Figure 2.4 7-Segment LED Monitor

Table 2.2 Alphanumeric Characters on the LED Monitor

Character 7-segment Character 7-segment Character 7-segment Character 7-segment

0  9  i K r T
1  A C J L S 5U
2  b $D K M T 6
3  C %E L N u 7
4  d F M O V W
5  E G n P W Y
6  F H o Q X Z
7  G I P R y [
8  H J q S Z <
Special characters and symbols (numbers with decimal point, minus and underscore)
0. - 9. –  -  _ A

„ Simultaneous keying
Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time. The FRENIC-Multi supports
simultaneous keying as listed below. The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a "+" letter
between the keys throughout this manual.
(For example, the expression " + keys" stands for pressing the key while holding down the
key.)
Table 2.3 Simultaneous Keying

Operation mode Simultaneous keying Used to:

+ keys Change certain function code data. (Refer to codes F00,

H03, H45, and H97 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES.")
Programming mode
+ keys

Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms

Alarm mode + keys
currently occurred.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
2-3
 Chapter 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation modes
(Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor, monitor running status,
configure function code data, display running information required for maintenance, and display alarm data.
The keypad is available in two types: standard keypad and optional multi-function keypad. For the instructions
on how to operate the multi-function keypad, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction Manual."

Contents

3.1 Overview of Operation Modes.................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Running Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.1 Monitoring the running status ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Setting up frequency and PID commands ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3 Running/stopping the motor................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.2.4 Jogging Operation ............................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3 Programming Mode .................................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly -- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --.............................................. 3-12
3.3.2 Setting up function codes -- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --................................................................... 3-16
3.3.3 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" -- .................................................. 3-17
3.3.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" -- ................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" -- ............................................................... 3-21
3.3.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" -- ................................ 3-26
3.3.7 Reading alarm information -- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --...................................................... 3-29
3.4 Alarm Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode ....................................................................... 3-32
3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................................. 3-32
3.4.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm ....................................................................... 3-32
3.4.4 Switching to Programming mode...................................................................................................... 3-32

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 3.1 Overview of Operation Modes

3.1 Overview of Operation Modes

FRENIC-Multi features the following three operation modes:
■ Running mode : This mode allows you to enter run/stop commands in regular operation. You
can also monitor the running status in real time.

Chap. 3
■ Programming mode : This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of
information relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
■ Alarm mode : If an alarm condition arises, the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode. In
this mode, you can view the corresponding alarm code* and its related

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

information on the LED monitor.
* Alarm code: Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective
function. For details, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.7 "Protective Functions."

Figure 3.1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes. If the inverter
is turned ON, it automatically enters Running mode, making it possible to start or stop the motor.

Figure 3.1 Status Transition between Operation Modes

Figure 3.2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during Running mode, the transition
between menu items in Programming mode, and the transition between alarm codes at different
occurrences in Alarm mode.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-1
 (*1) The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using function
code E48.
(*2) Applicable only when PID control is active (J01 = 1, 2 or 3).
(*3) The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21.
(*4) Applicable only when the full-menu mode is selected (E52 = 2).

Figure 3.2 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-2
 3.2 Running Mode

3.2 Running Mode

When the inverter is turned on, it automatically enters Running mode in which you can:
(1) Monitor the running status (e.g., output frequency and output current),
(2) Configure the reference frequency and other settings,

Chap. 3
(3) Run/stop the motor, and
(4) Jog (inch) the motor.

3.2.1 Monitoring the running status

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

In Running mode, the eleven items listed below can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is
turned on, the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the key to switch
between monitor items. For details of switching the monitor item by using the key, refer to "Monitor
of running status" in the Running mode in Figure 3.2.

Table 3.1 Monitoring Items

Display Function
sample on LED indicator
Monitor items Unit Meaning of displayed value code data
the LED „: on, †: off for E43
monitor *1
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED
Speed monitor 0
indicators.
Output
frequency
 „Hz †A †kW Hz Frequency actually being output (E48 = 0)
(before slip
compensation)
Output
frequency
 „Hz †A †kW Hz Frequency actually being output (E48 = 1)
(after slip
compensation)
Reference
frequency
 „Hz †A †kW Hz Reference frequency being set (E48 = 2)
120
Output frequency (Hz) ×
Motor speed  „Hz „A †kW r/min P01 (E48 = 3)
For motor 2, read P01 as A15.
Load shaft speed  „Hz „A †kW r/min Output frequency (Hz) u E50 (E48 = 4)
Line speed  †Hz „A „kW m/min Output frequency (Hz) u E50 (E48 = 5)
Constant feeding E50
rate time
 †Hz †A †kW min (E48 = 6)
Output frequency (Hz) × E39
Output current  †Hz „A †kW A Current output from the inverter in RMS 3
Output voltage *2 W †Hz †A †kW V Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 4
Motor output torque in % (Calculated
Calculated torque  †Hz †A †kW %
value)
8
Input power  †Hz †A „kW kW Input power to the inverter 9
PID command PID command/feedback amount
 †Hz †A †kW 㧙 transformed to that of virtual physical 10
*3, *4
value of the object to be controlled
PID feedback (e.g. temperature)
amount  †Hz †A †kW 㧙 Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for 12
*3, *5 details.
Timer (Timer
operation) *3
 †Hz †A †kW min Remaining time of timer operation 13
PID output in % as the maximum
PID output *3, *4   †Hz †A †kW % frequency (F03) being at 100% 14
For motor 2, read F03 as A01.
Load factor of the motor in % as the
Load factor *6  †Hz †A †kW %
rated output being at 100%
15
Motor output *7  †Hz †A „kW kW Motor output in kW 16
3-3
 *1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4-digit LED monitor screen, so " " appear instead.
*2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage, the 7-segment letter Win the lowest digit stands for the unit of the
voltage "V."
*3 These PID-related items appear only when the inverter PID-controls the motor according to a PID command
specified by function code J01 (=1, 2 or 3).
The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.2.3 "C codes (Control Functions)".)





When the PID control or timer operation is disabled, " " appear.
*4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to the lowest
digit of the 7-segment letter blinks.
*5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to the lowest digit of the
7-segment letter lights.
*6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor, the 7-segment letter in the lowest digit stands for "%."
*7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output, the unit LED indicator "kW" blinks.

3.2.2 Setting up frequency and PID commands

You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using and keys on the keypad. It is
also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed, motor speed or speed (%) by setting
function code E48.
■ Setting up a frequency command
Using and keys (Factory default)
(1) Set function code F01 to "0: / keys on keypad." This can be done only when the inverter is in
Running mode.
(2) Press the / key to display the current reference frequency. The lowest digit will blink.
(3) If you need to change the frequency command, press the / key again. The new setting will be
automatically saved into the inverter's internal memory and retained even when the power is off.
When the power is turned on next time, the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency.
• If you have set function code F01 to "0: / keys on keypad" but have selected a
frequency command source other than frequency command 1 (i.e., frequency command
2, frequency command via communication, or multi-frequency command), then the
and keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running
mode. Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency.
• When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the /
key, the least significant digit on the display blinks; that is, the cursor lies in the least
significant digit. Holding down the / key changes data in the least significant digit
and generates a carry, while the cursor remains in the least significant digit.
• After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the / key, holding down the
key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most
significant digit. Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit. This
cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the
data in higher digits.
• By setting function code C30 to "0: / keys on keypad" and selecting frequency
command 2, you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner
using the / key.

You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency (Hz) but also with other menu items
(motor speed, load shaft speed, line speed and constant feeding rate time) depending on the setting of
function code E48 (= 3, 4, 5 or 6) as listed in Table 3.1.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-4
 3.2 Running Mode

■ Settings under PID process control

To enable the PID process control, you need to set function code J01 to "1" or "2."
Under the PID control, the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different from
those under regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the LED
monitor is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), you can access manual speed commands (frequency
command) with and keys; if it is set to any other, you can access the PID process command with

Chap. 3
those keys.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.5, "PID Process Control Block."

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Setting the PID process command with and keys
(1) Set function code J02 to "0: / keys on keypad."
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the inverter is in
Running mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID
process command with the / key. To enable the PID process command to be modified with
the / key, first switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the / key to display the PID process command. The lowest digit and its decimal point
blinks on the LED monitor.
(4) To change the PID process command, press the / key again. The PID process command you
have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter’s internal memory. It is retained even if
you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and then go back to the
via-keypad PID process command. Also, it is retained in the memory even while the inverter is
powered off, and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered
on.
• Even if multi-frequency is selected as a PID process command (SS4 or SS8 = ON), you
still can set the process command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than "0," pressing the / key
displays, on the 7-segment LED monitor, the PID process command currently selected,
while you cannot change the setting.
• On the 7-segment LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to
characterize what is displayed. The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID
process command is displayed; the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is
displayed.

Table 3.2 PID Process Command Manually Set with / Key and Requirements

PID control PID control

Multi-
(Mode (Remote command LED Monitor
frequency With / key
selection) SV) E43
SS4, SS8
J01 J02
0 PID process command by keypad
1 or 2 Other than 0 ON or OFF PID process command currently
Other than 0
selected

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-5
 Setting up the frequency command with and keys under PID process control
When function code F01 is set to "0" ( / keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is selected as
a manual speed command (when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link or
multi-frequency command), switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables
you to modify the frequency command with the / keys.
In Programming or Alarm mode, the / keys are disabled to modify the frequency command. You
need to switch to Running mode.
Table 3.3 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed
command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command.

Table 3.3 Manual Speed (Frequency) Command Specified with / Keys and Requirements

PID Communi-
Cancel
control LED Frequency Multi- Multi- cations
PID Pressing /
(Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency link
control keys controls:
selection) E43 F01 SS2 SS1 operation
Hz/PID
J01 LE
OFF PID output
(PID (as final frequency
enabled) command)
0 OFF OFF OFF Manual speed
ON
(frequency)
(PID
command set by
disabled)
keypad
1 or 2 0
OFF PID output
(PID (as final frequency
enabled) command)
Other than the above Manual speed
ON
(frequency)
(PID
command currently
disabled)
selected

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-6
 3.2 Running Mode

■ Settings under PID dancer control

To enable the PID dancer control, you need to set function code J01 to "3."
Under the PID control, the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different from
those under the regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the LED
monitor is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), the item accessible is the primary frequency command; if
it is set to any other data, it is the PID dancer position command.

Chap. 3
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.6, "PID Dancer Control Block."

Setting the PID dancer position command with the and keys

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

(1) Set function code J02 to "0: / keys on keypad."
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the inverter is in
Running mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID
command with the / key. To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with
the / key, first switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the / key to display the PID dancer position command. The lowest digit blinks on the
LED monitor.
(4) To change the command, press the / key again. The command you have specified will be
automatically saved into the inverter’s internal memory as function code J57 data. It is retained
even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the via-keypad
PID command. Furthermore, you can directly configure the command with function code J57.
• Even if multi-frequency is selected as a PID command (SS4 or SS8 = ON), you still can
set the PID dancer position command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than "0," pressing the / key
displays, on the 7-segment LED monitor, the PID command currently selected, while you
cannot change the setting.
• On the 7-segment LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to
characterize what is displayed. The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID
command is displayed; the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is
displayed.

Table 3.4 PID Command Manually Set with / Key and Requirements

PID control PID control

Multi-
(Mode (Remote command LED monitor
frequency With / key
selection) SV) E43
SS4, SS8
J01 J02
0 PID command by keypad
3 Other than 0 ON or OFF
Other than 0 PID command currently selected

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-7
 Setting up the primary frequency command with and keys under PID dancer control
When function code F01 is set to "0" ( / keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is selected as
a primary frequency command (when disabling the frequency setting command via communications
link and multi-frequency command), switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode
enables you to modify the frequency command with the / keys.
In Programming or Alarm mode, the / keys are disabled to modify the frequency command. You
need to switch to Running mode.
Table 3.5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the primary frequency
command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command.

Table 3.5 Primary Frequency Command Specified with / Keys and Requirements

PID Communi-
Cancel
control LED Frequency Multi- Multi- cations
PID Pressing /
(Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency link
control keys controls:
selection) E43 F01 SS2 SS1 operation
Hz/PID
J01 LE
OFF Final frequency
(PID command modified
enabled) by PID output
0 OFF OFF OFF
ON Keypad primary
(PID command
disabled) (Frequency)
3 0
OFF Final frequency
(PID command modified
enabled) by PID output
Other than the above
ON Current primary
(PID command
disabled) (Frequency)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-8
 3.2 Running Mode

3.2.3 Running/stopping the motor

By factory default, pressing the key starts
running the motor in the forward direction and
pressing the key decelerates the motor to stop.
The key is enabled only in Running mode.

Chap. 3
The motor rotational direction can be selected by
changing the setting of function code F02.

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

■ Operational relationship between function code F02 (Operation method) and key
Table 3.6 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the key, which determines the
motor rotational direction.
Table 3.6 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02

Data for F02 Pressing the key runs the motor:

In the direction commanded by terminal
0
[FWD] or [REV]
key disabled
1 (The motor is driven by terminal [FWD] or
[REV] command.)
2 In the forward direction (Note) The rotational direction of
IEC-compliant motors is opposite to
3 In the reverse direction that of the motor shown here.

For the details on operations with function code F02, refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."

3.2.4 Jogging Operation

This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor.
(1) Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below. The LED monitor should display LQI .
Enter Running mode (see page 3-2) and press the + keys simultaneously.
The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to
LQI again.
• Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration/deceleration
time, respectively. Use these function codes exclusively for the jogging operation with
your needs.
• Using the input terminal command "Ready for jogging" JOG switches between the
normal operation state and ready-to-jog state.
• Switching between the normal operation state and read-to-jog state with the +
keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped.
(2) Jogging the motor.
Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging. To decelerate to stop the motor,
release the key.
(3) Exiting the ready-to-jog state and returning to the normal operation state.
• Press the + keys simultaneously.

For details, refer to the descriptions of function codes E01 to E05 in Chapter 9, Section 9.2.2 "E
codes (Terminal functions)."
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-9
 3.3 Programming Mode
The Programming mode provides you with these functions--setting and checking function code data,
monitoring maintenance information and checking input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can be
easily selected with the menu-driven system. Table 3.7 lists menus available in Programming mode. The
leftmost digit (numerals) of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu
number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents.
When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on, the menu selected last in
Programming mode will be displayed.

Table 3.7 Menus Available in Programming Mode

LED
Menu # Menu monitor Main functions Refer to:
shows:
Displays only basic function codes to customize Section
0 "Quick Setup" HP
the inverter operation. 3.3.1
F codes
HAA
(Fundamental functions)
E codes
GAA (Extension terminal
functions)
C codes
EAA
(Control functions)
P codes Selecting each of
RAA these function
(Motor 1 parameters) Section
1 "Data Setting" codes enables its
H codes 3.3.2
data to be
JAA (High performance
displayed/changed.
functions)
A codes
CAA
(Motor 2 parameters)
J codes
LAA
(Application functions)
[AA y codes (Link functions)
QAA o codes (Optional function)
Displays only function codes that have been
"Data Section
2 TGR changed from their factory defaults. You can refer
Checking" 3.3.3
to or change those function code data.
"Drive Displays the running information required for Section
3 QRG
Monitoring" maintenance or test running. 3.3.4
Displays external interface information. Section
4 "I/O Checking" KAQ
3.3.5
"Maintenance Displays maintenance information including Section
5 EJG
Information" cumulative run time. 3.3.6
Displays the latest four alarm codes. You can
"Alarm Section
6 CN refer to the running information at the time when
Information" 3.3.7
the alarm occurred.

(Note 1) Mounting a multi-function keypad adds the data copying function to the menu, enabling reading, writing,
and verifying of function code data.
(Note 2) The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted. For details, refer to the
Instruction Manual for the corresponding option.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-10
 3.3 Programming Mode

Figure 3.3 illustrates the menu-driven function code system in Programming mode.

Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.3 Menu Transition in Programming Mode

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-11
 ■ Selecting menus to display
The menu-driven system allows you to cycle through menus. To cycle through necessary menus only for
simple operation, use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below.
The factory default (E52 = 0) is to display only two menus--Menu #0 "Quick Setup" and Menu #1 "Data
Setting," allowing no switching to any other menu.
Table 3.8 Keypad Display Mode Selection – Function Code E52

Data for E52 Mode Menus selectable

0 Function code data editing mode (factory default) Menu #0 "Quick Setup"
Menu #1 "Data Setting"
1 Function code data check mode Menu #2 "Data Checking"
2 Full-menu mode Menus #0 through #6

Pressing the / key will cycle through the menu. With the key, you can select the
 desired menu item. Once the entire menu has been cycled through, the display will return to
the first menu item.

3.3.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly

-- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --
Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of
function codes specified in Chapter 9, Section 9.1, "Function Code Tables."
To use Menu #0 "Quick Setup," you need to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data editing
mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-12
 3.3 Programming Mode

Listed below are the function codes (including those not subject to quick setup) available on the
FRENIC-Multi. A function code is displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad in the following format:

ID number in each function code group

Function code group

Chap. 3
Table 3.9 Function Codes Available on FRENIC-Multi

Function Code Group Function Codes Function Description

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

F codes F00 to F51 Fundamental Functions concerning basic motor
functions running
E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal Functions concerning the assignment
functions of control circuit terminals
Functions concerning the display of
the LED monitor
C codes C01 to C53 Control functions Functions associated with frequency
settings
P codes P01 to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up
characteristics parameters (such as
capacity) of the motor
H codes H03 to H98 High performance Highly added-value functions
functions Functions for sophisticated control
A codes A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up
characteristics parameters (such as
capacity) of the motor
J codes J01 to J86 Application functions Functions for applications such as
PID control
y codes y01 to y99 Link functions Functions for controlling
communication
o codes o27 to o59 Optional functions Functions for options (Note)

(Note) The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted. For details of the o codes, refer to the
Instruction Manual for the corresponding option.

For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions, refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.1 "Function Code Tables."

„ Function codes requiring simultaneous keying

To modify the data for function code F00 (Data Protection), H03 (Data Initialization), H45 (Mock
Alarm), or H97 (Clear Alarm Data), simultaneous keying is needed, involving the + keys or +
keys.

„ Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the inverter is running
Some function code data can be changed while the inverter is running, whereas others cannot. Further,
depending on the function code, modifications may or may not validate immediately. For details, refer to
the "Change when running" column in Chapter 9, Section 9.1 " Function Code Tables."

For details of function codes, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1 " Function Code Tables."

3-13
 Figure 3.4 shows the menu transition in Menu #0 "Quick Setup."

Figure 3.4 Menu Transition in Menu #0 "Quick Setup"

Through a multi-function keypad, you can add or delete function codes that are subject to
 Quick Setup. For details, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction Manual."
Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi-function
keypad, they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad. To restore the
function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults, initialize the whole
data using function code H03 (data = 1).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-14
 3.3 Programming Mode

Basic key operation

This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the function code
data changing procedure shown in Figure 3.5.
This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default " / keys
on keypad (F01 = 0)" to "Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC)
(F01 = 2)."

Chap. 3
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears. (In this example, HP is
displayed.)
(2) If anything other than HP is displayed, use the keys to display HP.

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

and
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of function codes.
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired function code (H  in this example), then press
the key.
The data of this function code appears. (In this example, data of H  appears.)
(5) Change the function code data using the and keys. (In this example, press the key two
times to change data  to .)
(6) Press the key to establish the function code data.
The UCWG appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter. The display will
return to the function code list, then move to the next function code. (In this example,H .)
Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data. The data reverts to
the previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original function code
reappears.
(7) Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list.

Cursor movement
 You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the key for
1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings. This action is called
"Cursor movement."

Figure 3.5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-15
 3.3.2 Setting up function codes -- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --
Menu #1 "Data Setting" in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the
inverter functions match your needs.
To set function codes in this menu, it is necessary to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data
editing mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).

Basic key operation

For details of the basic key operation, refer to Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Section 3.3.1.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-16
 3.3 Programming Mode

3.3.3 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" --

Menu #2 "Data Checking" in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been
changed. Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed
on the LED monitor. You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary. Figure 3.6
shows the menu transition in Menu #2 "Data Checking."

Figure 3.6 Menu Transition in Menu #2 "Data Checking" (Changing F01, F05 and E52 data only) Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Basic key operation

For details of the basic key operation, refer to Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Section 3.3.1.
To check function codes in Menu #2 "Data Checking," it is necessary to set function code
E52 to "1" (Function code data check mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
For details, refer to "■ Selecting menus to display" on page 3-12.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-17
 3.3.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" --
Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running.
The display items for "Drive Monitoring" are listed in Table 3.10. Figure 3.7 shows the menu transition
in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring."

Figure 3.7 Menu Transition in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring"

Basic key operation

To monitor the running status on the drive monitor, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode)
beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Drive Monitoring" (QRG).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of monitoring items (e.g. A).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired monitoring item, then press the key.
The running status information for the selected item appears.
(5) Press the key to return to a list of monitoring items. Press the key again to return to the
menu.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-18
 3.3 Programming Mode

Table 3.10 Drive Monitor Display Items

LED
monitor Item Unit Description
shows:
Output Hz Output frequency before slip compensation
A
frequency

Chap. 3
Output Hz Output frequency after slip compensation
A
frequency

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

A Output current A Output current
A Output voltage V Output voltage
Calculated % Calculated output torque of the motor in %
A
torque
Reference Hz Frequency specified by a frequency command
A
frequency
Rotational N/A Rotational direction being outputted





A
direction H: forward, T: reverse, : stop
Running status N/A Running status in hexadecimal format
A
Refer to "„ Displaying running status" on the next page.
Motor speed r/min 120
Display value (Output frequency Hz) ×
A (Function code P01)
For motor 2, read P01 as A15.
Load shaft speed r/min Display value = (Output frequency Hz) u (Function code E50)
or m/min
A Line speed The 7-segment letters appear for 10000 (r/min) or more. If
appear, decrease function code E50 data so that the LED
monitor displays 9999 or below, referring to the above equation.
PID command N/A Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the
object to be controlled, which is converted from the PID
command using function code E40 and E41 data (PID display
A coefficients A and B)
Display value = (PID command) u (Coefficient A - B) + B





If PID control is disabled, " " appears.

PID feedback N/A Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the
amount object to be controlled, which is converted from the PID
command using function code E40 and E41 data (PID display
A coefficients A and B)
Display value = (PID feedback amount) u (Coefficient A - B) + B





If PID control is disabled, " " appears.

Torque limit % Driving torque limit value (based on motor rated torque)
A
value (Level 1)
Torque limit % Braking torque limit value (based on motor rated torque)
A
value (Level 2)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-19
 „ Displaying running status
To display the running status in hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed
in Table 3.11. Table 3.12 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED
monitor display. Table 3.13 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 3.11 Running Status Bit Assignment

Bit Notation Content Bit Notation Content

"1" when function code data is being
15 BUSY 7 VL "1" under voltage limiting control.
written.
14 Always "0." 6 TL "1" under torque limiting control.
WR "1" when the DC link bus voltage is
13 Always "0." 5 NUV
higher than the undervoltage level.
"1" when communication is enabled
(when ready for run and frequency
12 RL 4 BRK "1" during braking.
commands via communications
link).
"1" when the inverter output is shut
11 ALM "1" when an alarm has occurred. 3 INT
down.
10 DEC "1" during deceleration. 2 EXT "1" during DC braking.
"1" during running in the reverse
9 ACC "1" during acceleration. 1 REV
direction.
"1" during running in the forward
8 IL "1" under current limiting control. 0 FWD
direction.

Table 3.12 Running Status Display

LED No. LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Notation BUSY WR RL ALM DEC ACC IL VL TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
Binary 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Example

Hexa-
decimal on
the LED
monitor

„ Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format (1 hexadecimal digit). Table 3.13 shows
the correspondence between the two notations. The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED
monitor.
Table 3.13 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion

Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal

0 0 0 0  1 0 0 0 
0 0 0 1  1 0 0 1 
0 0 1 0  1 0 1 0 C
0 0 1 1  1 0 1 1 D
0 1 0 0  1 1 0 0 E
0 1 0 1  1 1 0 1 F
0 1 1 0  1 1 1 0 G
0 1 1 1  1 1 1 1 H

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-20
 3.3 Programming Mode

3.3.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" --

Using Menu #4 "I/O Checking" displays the I/O status of external signals including digital and analog
I/O signals without using a measuring instrument. Table 3.14 lists check items available. The menu
transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking" is shown in Figure 3.8.

Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Figure 3.8 Menu Transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking"

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-21
Basic key operation
To check the status of the I/O signals, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the and keys to display "I/O Checking" (KAQ).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of I/O check items (e.g. A).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired I/O check item, then press the key.
The corresponding I/O check data appears. For the item A or A, using the and
keys switches the display method between the segment display (for external signal information in
Table 3.15) and hexadecimal display (for I/O signal status in Table 3.16).
(5) Press the key to return to a list of I/O check items. Press the key again to return to the menu.

Table 3.14 I/O Check Items

LED monitor
Item Description
shows:
I/O signals on the control Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals.
A circuit terminals Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal
terminals" on the next page for details.
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals
that received a command via RS-485 and optional
I/O signals on the control
communications. Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O
A circuit terminals under
signal terminals" and "„ Displaying control I/O
communications control
signal terminals under communications control"
on the following pages for details.
A Input voltage on terminal [12] Shows the input voltage on terminal [12] in volts (V).
A Input current on terminal [C1] Shows the input current on terminal [C1] in
milliamperes (mA).
A Output voltage to analog Shows the output voltage on terminal [FM] in volts
meters [FM] (V).
A Pulse rate of [FM] Shows the output pulse rate on terminal [FM] in
pulses per second (p/s).
A Input voltage on terminal [C1] Shows the input voltage on terminal [C1] (V2
function assigned) in volts (V).
A Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals
(I/O) on the optional DI/O interface card. Refer to "„
Displaying control I/O signal terminals on optional
DI/O interface card" on page 3-25 for details.
A PG pulse rate 1 Shows the A/B phase pulse rate (p/s) in quad
(A/B phase) frequency when the PG interface is installed.
Displayed value = Pulse rate (p/s) y 1000
A PG pulse rate 1 (Z phase) Shows the pulse rate (p/s) in Z phase when the PG
interface is installed.
A PG pulse rate 2 Shows the A/B phase pulse rate (p/s) of the second PG
(A/B phase) in quad frequency when two PG interfaces are
installed.
Displayed value = Pulse rate (p/s) y 1000
A PG pulse rate 2 (Z phase) Shows the second PG pulse rate (p/s) in Z phase when
two PG interfaces are installed.

3-22
 3.3 Programming Mode

■ Displaying control I/O signal terminals

The status of control I/O signal terminal may be displayed with ON/OFF of the LED segment or in
hexadecimal display.

• Display I/O signal status with ON/OFF of each LED segment

As shown in Table 3.15 and the figure below, each of segments "a" to "g" on LED1 lights when the
corresponding digital input terminal circuit ([FWD], [REV], [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4] or [X5]) is closed; it

Chap. 3
goes off when it is open. Segment "a" and "b" on LED3 light when the circuit between output terminal
[Y1] or [Y2] and terminal [CMY], and do not light when the circuit is open. Segment "a" on LED4 is for
terminals [30A/B/C]. Segment "a" on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals [30C] and [30A]
is short-circuited (ON) and does not light when it is open.

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

If all terminal input signals are OFF (open), segment "g" on all of LED1 to LED4 will blink
 ("– – – –").

Table 3.15 Segment Display for External Signal Information

Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

a 30A/B/C Y1-CMY — FWD

b — Y2-CMY — REV
c — — — X1
d — — — X2
e — — — X3
f — — (XF)* X4
g — — (XR)* X5
dp — — (RST)* —

—: No corresponding control circuit terminal exists

* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
communications control" on the next page.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-23
 • Displaying I/O signal status in hexadecimal format
Each I/O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3.16. An unassigned bit is
interpreted as "0." Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits ( to H
each).
With the FRENIC-Multi, digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV] are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1,
respectively. Terminals [X1] through [X5] are assigned to bits 2 through 6. The bit is set to "1" when the
corresponding input terminal is short-circuited (ON), and is set to "0" when it is open (OFF). For
example, when [FWD] and [X1] are on (short-circuited) and all the others are off (open),  is
displayed on LED4 to LED1.
Digital output terminal [Y1] and [Y2] are assigned to bits 0 and 1. Each bit is set to "1" when the
terminal is short-circuited with [CMY], and "0" when it is open.
The status of the relay contact output terminal [30A/B/C] is assigned to bit 8. It is set to "1" when the
circuit between output terminals [30A] and [30C] is closed, and "0" when the circuit between [30A] and
[30C] is open.
For example, if [Y1] is on, [Y2] is off, and the circuit between [30A] and [30C] is closed, then " "
is displayed on the LED4 to LED1.
Table 3.16 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the
7-segment LED.
Table 3.16 Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format

LED No. LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Input
(RST)* (XR)* (XF)* - - - - - - X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
terminal
Output 30
- - - - - - - - - - - - - Y2 Y1
terminal A/B/C

Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Example

Hexa-
decimal
on the
LED
monitor

– No corresponding control circuit terminal exists.

* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
communications control" below.

■ Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communications control

Under communications control, input commands (function code S06) sent via RS-485 or other optional
communications can be displayed in two ways: "with ON/OFF of each LED segment" and "in
hexadecimal format." The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I/O signal
terminal status display; however, (XF), (XR), and (RST) are added as inputs. Note that under
communications control, the I/O display is in normal logic (using the original signals not inverted).
Refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual for details on input commands sent through
RS-485 communications and the instruction manual of communication-related options as well.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-24
 3.3 Programming Mode

■ Displaying control I/O signal terminals on optional DI/O interface card

The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional DI/O interface card,
just like the control circuit terminals.
Table 3.17 lists the assignment between LED segments and DI/O signals.

Table 3.17 Segment Display for External Signal Information

Chap. 3
Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1
a — DO0 DI8 DI0

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

b — DO1 DI9 DI1
c — DO2 DI10 DI2
d — DO3 DI11 DI3
e — DO4 DI12 DI4
f — DO5 — DI5
g — DO6 — DI6
dp — DO7 — DI7

LED No. LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Input
- - - DI12 DI11 DI10 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0
terminal
Output
- - - - - - - - DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0
terminal

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-25
 3.3.6 Reading maintenance information
-- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" --
Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the
inverter. Table 3.18 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3.9 shows the menu
transition in Menu #5 "Maintenance information."

Figure 3.9 Menu Transition in Menu #5 "Maintenance Information"

Basic key operation

To view the maintenance information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Maintenance Information" (EJG).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes (e.g. A).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired maintenance item, then press the key.
The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears.
(5) Press the key to return to a list of maintenance items. Press the key again to return to the
menu.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-26
 3.3 Programming Mode

Table 3.18 Display Items for Maintenance Information

LED
Monitor Item Description
shows:
Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
time inverter.

Chap. 3
Unit: thousands of hours.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 65.53)
A When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display: 0.001 to
9.999), data is shown in units of one hour (0.001). When the total time is

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

10000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53), it is shown in units of 10
hours (0.01). When the total time exceeds 65535 hours, the counter will
be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
A voltage
Unit: V (volts)
Max. temperature Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour.
A of heat sink
Unit: qC (Temperatures below 20qC (68°F) are displayed as 20qC.)
Max. effective Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour.
A output current
Unit: A (amperes)
Capacitance of Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir
the DC link bus capacitor) in %, based on the capacitance when shipping as 100%. Refer
A capacitor to the FRENIC-Multi Instruction Manual, Chapter 7 "MAINTENANCE
AND INSPECTION" for details.
Unit: %
Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic
time of capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards.
electrolytic Unit: thousands of hours. (Display range: 0.001 to 99.99)
A capacitors on the
printed circuit Shown in units of 10 hours.
boards When the total time exceeds 99990 hours, the count stops and the
display remains at 99.99.
Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan.
time of the This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON/OFF control
cooling fan (function code H06) is enabled but the fan does not run.
A Unit: thousands of hours. (Display range: 0.001 to 99.99)
Shown in units of 10 hours.
When the total time exceeds 99990 hours, the count stops and the
display remains at 99.99.
Number of Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is
startups started up (i.e., the number of run commands issued).
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number from 0.001 to 9.999 is
A displayed, the counter increases by 0.001 per startup, and when any
number from 10.00 to 65.53 is counted, the counter increases by 0.01
every 10 startups. When the counted number exceeds 65535, the counter
will be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
Input watt-hour Shows the input watt-hour of the inverter.
Unit: 100 kWh (Display range: 0.001 to 9999)
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour, the decimal point
A on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor’s
resolution (e.g. the resolution varies between 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 or 1). To
reset the integrated input watt-hour and its data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
When the input watt-hour exceeds 1000000 kWh, it returns to "0."
3-27
 Table 3.18 Display Items for Maintenance Information (continued)

LED
Monitor Item Description
shows:
Input watt-hour Shows the value expressed by "input watt-hour (kWh) ×E51 (whose
data data range is 0.000 to 9999)."
Unit: None.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9999. The data cannot exceed 9999. (It will be
A fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999.))
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour data, the decimal
point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors’
resolution.
To reset the integrated input watt-hour data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
Number of Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS-485
RS-485 errors communication (via the RJ-45 connector as standard) since the power is
A (standard) turned on.
Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Content of Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS-485
RS-485 communication in decimal format.
A
communications For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual.
error (standard)
Number of option Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since
A errors the power is turned on.
Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Inverter's ROM Shows the inverter's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
A
version
Keypad's ROM Shows the keypad's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
A
version
Number of Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS-485
A RS-485 errors communication since the power is turned on.
(option) Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Content of Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS-485
RS-485 communication in decimal format.
A
communications For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual.
error (option)
Option's ROM Shows the option's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
A
version
Cumulative motor Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
run time motor.
A
The display method is the same as for "Cumulative run time" (A )
above.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-28
 3.3 Programming Mode

3.3.7 Reading alarm information -- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --

Menu #6 "Alarm Information" shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code. Further, it is also
possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred.
Figure 3.10 shows the menu transition in Menu #6 "Alarm Information" and Table 3.19 lists the details
of the alarm information.

Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Figure 3.10 "Alarm Information" Menu Transition

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-29
 Basic key operation
To view the alarm information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Alarm Information" (CN).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of alarm codes (e.g. N).
In the list of alarm codes, the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history.
(4) Each time the or key is pressed, the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recent
one as , ,  and  .
(5) While the alarm code is displayed, press the key to have the corresponding alarm item number
(e.g. A) and data (e.g. Output frequency) displayed alternately in intervals of approximately
1 second. You can also have the item number (e.g. A) and data (e.g. Output current) for any
other item displayed using the and keys.
(6) Press the key to return to a list of alarm codes. Press the key again to return to the menu.

Table 3.19 Alarm Information Displayed

LED monitor
shows: Item displayed Description
(item No.)
A Output frequency Output frequency
A Output current Output current
A Output voltage Output voltage
A Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque
A Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command
H






This shows the rotational direction being output.

A Rotational direction
: forward; : reverse; : stop
This shows the running status in hexadecimal. Refer to
A Running status
"„ Displaying running status" in Section 3.3.4.
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time
counter of the inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 65.53)
A Cumulative run time When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display:
0.001 to 9.999), data is shown in units of one hour (0.001).
When the total time is 10000 hours or more (display: 10.00
to 65.53), it is shown in units of 10 hours (0.01). When the
total time exceeds 65535 hours, the counter will be reset to
0 and the count will start again.
Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the
inverter is started up (i.e., the number of run commands
issued).
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number from 0.001
A No. of startups to 9.999 is displayed, the counter increases by 0.001 per
startup, and when any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is
counted, the counter increases by 0.01 every 10 startups.
When the counted number exceeds 65535, the counter will
be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
A DC link bus voltage
Unit: V (volts)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-30
 3.3 Programming Mode

Table 3.19 Alarm Information Displayed (continued)

LED monitor
shows: Item displayed Description
(item No.)
Max. temperature of heat Shows the temperature of the heat sink.
A sink Unit: ºC

Chap. 3
Terminal I/O signal status
(displayed with the
A ON/OFF of LED
segments)

OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals.
Terminal input signal
Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals" in
A status (in hexadecimal
format) Section 3.3.5 "Checking I/O signal status" for details.

Terminal output
A signal status (in
hexadecimal format)
No. of consecutive This is the number of times the same alarm occurs
A occurrences consecutively.
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (1)
A Multiple alarm 1
("" is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (2)
A Multiple alarm 2
("" is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
Terminal I/O signal status
under communications
control
A (displayed with the
ON/OFF of LED
segments) Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals
under RS-485 communications control. Refer to
Terminal input signal
status under "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
A communications control communications control" in Section 3.3.5 "Checking I/O
(in hexadecimal format) signal status" for details.

Terminal output signal

status under
A communications control
(in hexadecimal format)
A Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm.

When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession, the alarm information for the first
occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in-between will be
discarded. The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm
information.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-31
 3.4 Alarm Mode
If an abnormal condition arises, the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm, then the inverter
automatically enters Alarm mode. At the same time, an alarm code appears on the LED monitor.

3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode

Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode.
The alarm can be removed using the key only when the alarm code is displayed.

3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history

It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed. Previous
alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the / key while the current alarm code is displayed.

3.4.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm

When the alarm code is displayed, you may check various running status information (output frequency
and output current, etc.) by pressing the key. The item number and data for each running information
will be displayed alternately.
Further, you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the /
key. The information displayed is the same as for Menu #6 "Alarm Information" in Programming
mode. Refer to Table 3.19 in Section 3.3.7, "Reading alarm information."
Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm
codes.
When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause, pressing
the key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm
state. This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this
time.

3.4.4 Switching to Programming mode

You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing + keys simultaneously with the alarm
displayed, and modify the function code data.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-32
 3.4 Alarm Mode

Figure 3.11 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items.

Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.11 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
3-33
 Part 2 Driving the Motor

Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Chapter 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.

Contents

4.1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings............................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Drive Frequency Command Block.............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Drive Command Block ............................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4 Control Block.............................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.5 PID Process Control Block ....................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6 PID Dancer Control Block ........................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.7 FM Output Selector................................................................................................................................... 4-19

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 4.1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings

FRENIC-Multi series of inverters is equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor
operations required in your system. Refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details of the function codes.
The function codes have functional relationship each other. Several special function codes also work with
execution priority each other depending on their functions or data settings.
This chapter explains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter. You are requested to fully
understand the inverter's control logic together with the function codes in order to set the function code data
correctly.
The block diagrams contained in this chapter show only function codes having mutual relationship. For the
function codes that work independently and for detailed explanation of each function code, refer to Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES."

Chap. 4
4.1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

Table 4.1 lists symbols commonly used in block diagrams and their meanings with some examples.
Table 4.1 Symbols and Meanings

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Digital inputs/outputs Function code.
[FWD], [Y1]
to/from the inverter's control
etc.
circuit terminal block.
Terminal commands
FWD, REV
assigned to digital
etc. Switch controlled by a
inputs/outputs.
function code. Numbers
Low-pass filter: Features assigned to the terminals
appropriate characteristics express the function code
by changing the time data.
constant through the
function code data.
Internal control signal for Switch controlled by a
inverter logic. terminal command. In the
High limiter: Limits the example shown on the left,
upper value by a constant or the enable communications
data set to a function code. link command LE assigned
to one of the digital input
terminals from [X1] to [X5]
controls the switch.
Low limiter: Limits the OR logic: In normal logic, if
lower value by a constant or any input is ON, then C =
data set to a function code. ON. Only if all inputs are
OFF, then C = OFF.
Zero limiter: Prevents data NOR (Not-OR) logic: In
from dropping to a negative normal logic, if any input is
value. OFF, then C = ON. If all
inputs are ON, C = OFF.
Gain multiplier for reference AND logic: In normal logic,
frequencies given by current only if A = ON and B = ON,
and/or voltage input or for then C = ON. Otherwise, C =
analog output signals. OFF.
C=AuB
Adder for 2 signals or NOT logic: In normal logic,
values. C = A + B if A = ON, then B = OFF, and
If B is negative then C = A – vice versa.
B (acting as a subtracter).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-1
 4.2 Drive Frequency Command Block

LED monitor
Key operation on the keypad E48
0,1,2 Selection of normal/inverse
Reference frequency A operation
3 C53 Switch
Motor speed in r/min normal/inverse
Load shaft speed 4 operation
command Reference IVS
5 loss
Line speed command detection
Constant feeding rate 6 E65 ҁ999
time command
+ Normal/inverse
[12] 㬍 1
+ operation
+ +
C33 Polarity
Polarity B Continue-to-run C35=1
[12] Filter Gain Bias
C31 C35=1 frequency at
[12]
C32 C34 F18 C50
[12] Offset PTC E65 0 limiter
thermistor "0" Reference loss
Hardware [C1] (Mode 0 limiter
detection
switch (C1 function) selection)
SW7=C1 E59=0 H26=0
[C1] Normal/inverse
㬍 2
+ + operation
+
C38 +
C Continue-to-run
C36 [C1] Gain Bias
PTC frequency at "0"
(C1 function) 0 limiter
Hard- thermistor [C1] Filter [C1] (C1 function) C37 C39 F18 C50
ware [C1] (Mode (C1 function) E65
switch (C1 function) selection) Offset Reference loss
SW7=V2 E59=1 H26=0 detection
Normal/inverse
㬍 operation 3
+ +
+ C43 +
C41 D Continue-to-run
[C1] Gain Bias "0"
[C1] (V2 function) frequency at
[C1] (V2 function)
C42 C44 F18 C50 0 limiter
(V2 function) Filter E65
Offset Reference loss
detection
Normal/inverse
㬍 4
operation

Gain
PTC
thermistor C32 C34
Hardware (Mode Normal/inverse
selection) 㬍 5
switch operation
SW8=ON H26=1
Gain
C37 C39
Aralm
H27 Compa- J Normal/inverse
rator 㬍 6
operation
PTC
thermistor
(Level) Gain 7
C42 C44 8
UP/DOWN control 9
Initial frequency setting

H61
UP
command
UP UP/
DOWN
DOWN control
command
DOWN

*3
D I/O card D I/O card
input terminal (option)

*3
Pulse train
PG card PG card
input terminal (option)

Standard keypad OFF if y98 = 1, 3

RJ-45 port (RS-485) or H30 = 4, 5, 8

Host equipment Frequency

command via
communications
OFF if y98 = 1, 3 S01
or H30 = 1, 3, 7 ҁ0
RS-485 *3 S01
Host equipment communications E
option card 0
S05
OFF if
H30 = 1, 3 to 5, Last
7, 8 command
*3 to take effect
Host equipment Field bus option card

Figure 4.1.1 Drive Frequency Command Block -- Input Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-2
 4.2 Drive Frequency Command Block

Select frequency Enable Select

command 2/1 communications link
V Ready for jogging
multi-frequency + STOP
JOG
Hz2/Hz1 via RS-485 or field bus SS1,SS2,SS4,SS8
LE

Frequency
A command 1 F01
0
1 1

Chap. 4
+

+ +
Frequency
limiter (High)

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

2 +
2 Communications F15
+
link function Bus link
3 H30 function Drive frequency
Loader link Jump command
y98 +
0,2,6 function frequency
0,2 y99
1,3 to 5,7,8 C01
0,2 F16 H63
C02 Frequency Frequency
1,3
5 1,3 C03 limiter limiter
3 (Low) (Mode
7 C04
C20 selection)
11 Multi-frequency 1 C05 Jogging
12 Multi-frequency 2 C06 frequency
E
Frequency Multi-frequency 3 C07
command 2 C30
0 Multi-frequency 4 C08
1 Multi-frequency 5 C09
4
Multi-frequency 6 C10
+ Auxiliary frequency setting 1 Multi-frequency 7 C11
+ Multi-frequency 8 C12
5 2 Multi-frequency 9 C13
Multi-frequency 10 C14
3
Multi-frequency 11 C15
Multi-frequency 12 C16
5
6 Multi-frequency 13 C17
7 Multi-frequency 14 C18
7
11 Multi-frequency 15 C19
8
12
9

*1 E61
[12]
0
1
㬍
Auxiliary frequency setting 2
2
B 㬍
3
*2 Gain
5 C32 C34

[C1] *1
(C1 function) E62
0
1
㬍
2
C 㬍

3
*2 Gain
5 C37 C39

[C1] *1
(V2 function) E63 *1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61, E62 and E63:
*1 Takes priority when[12]
Terminal the same function
> Terminal [C1]has
(C1been assigned
function) by E61,[C1]
> Terminal E62(V2
andfunction)
E63:
0
*2 Refer to Terminal [12] > Terminal
block diagrams [C1] (C1
of PID control blockfunction) > Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
for details.
1 *2 For
*3 Refer to block
details diagrams
of the options,ofrefer
PID to
control block for details.
the instruction manual for each option.
㬍 *3 For details of the options, refer to the instruction manual for each option.
2 Notes:
D 㬍
-Notes:
When PID control is enabled, the control logic differs from this block diagram.
3 -- S
When
codesPID
arecontrol is enabled, the control
communication-related logiccodes.
function differsRefer
from this block
to the diagram.
RS-485
*2 Gain - Communication User's Manual for details.
S codes are communication-related function codes. Refer to the RS-485
5 C42 C44 Communication User's Manual (MEH448b) for details.

Figure 4.1.2 Drive Frequency Command Block -- Output Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-3
 4.2 Drive Frequency Command Block

Figures 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 show the processes that generate the internal drive frequency command through the
various frequency command and switching steps by means of function codes. When the PID control is active
(J01 = 1 to 3), the logic differs from that of this block diagram. Refer to Section 4.5 "PID Process Control
Block" and Section 4.6 "PID Dancer Control Block."
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
• Frequency command sourcing by the / keys operation on the keypad covers various command
expression formats such as a load rotational speed and a line speed by specifying data of function code E48.
• The input terminal natively covers the –10 to +10 VDC analog frequency command. The function code C35
allows this terminal to be used as a unipolar input 0 to +10 VDC or a bipolar input –10 to +10 VDC. For the

Chap. 4
unipolar input, inserting the "0" limiter in the following process stage of the terminal input [12],
modification of the reference frequency by the bias and gain, assures the reference frequency not to always
be switched to the negative frequency command -- causing the reverse rotation of the motor.

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

• Setting slide switches SW7 and SW8 on the interface printed circuit board (interface PCB) and data of
function codes E59 and H26 characterizes the analog input terminal [C1] for the current input (C1 function
covering +4 to +20 mA DC), the voltage input (V2 function covering 0 to +10 VDC) or the PTC. If no input
such as frequency command is applied to the terminal, the inverter makes of it as "0."
• Although the [C1] terminal can be switched to either the current input (C1 function) or the voltage input (V2
function), suitable adjustment of the analog input such as the offset, filter and gain should be processed by
exclusively provided function codes.
• The command loss detection is only applicable to analog inputs of the terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and
[C1] (V2 function). For the command loss detection, the continue-to-run frequency automatically switched
to the reference frequency determined by what active frequency command is lost, however, the switched
reference command may fluctuate due to the switching timing or the switched situation. For details, refer to
the description of function code E65.
• Case that data setup for both the gain and bias will take effect concurrently is only available for the
frequency command source 1 (F01). For the frequency command source 2 (C30) and auxiliary frequency
command sources 1 and 2 (E61 to E63), only setup of the gain will take effect.
• Switching between normal and inverse operation is only effective for the reference frequency from the
analog frequency command input signal (terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function)). Note that
the frequency command source set up by using the / key is only valid for normal operation.
• Frequency commands by S01 and S05 for the communications link facility take different command formats
as follows.
- S01: the setting range is –32768 to +32767, where the maximum output frequency is obtained at
r20000
- S05: the setting range is 0.00 to 655.35 Hz in increments of 0.01 Hz
- Basically, priority level for the command in S01 is higher than that in S05. If a value other than "0" is
set in S01, the data set in S01 will take effect. If S01 is set at "0", data in S05 will take effect.
- Refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual for details.
• The frequency limiter (Low) (F16) helps user select the inverter operation for either the output frequency is
held at data of the frequency limiter (lower), or the inverter decelerates to stop the motor with reference
frequency data of "0", by specifying the lower limiter (select) (H63.)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-5
 Ready for jogging Enable 3-wire Enable
operation operation communications link
Multi-function (Hold disabled) HLD via RS-485 or field bus
keypad Operation LE
Forced to OFF if
method FWD = ON and Timer Timer operation
FWD FWD REV = ON (timer C21=1
F02 FWD
operation
FWD/REV 0 time)
REV Hold
REV REV FWD

STOP 1 Communications
link function REV
Bus link
H30 function
Loader link Force to stop
Standard FWD only 2 0,1,4 y98 function
keypad STOP
0,1 y99 ON if H96 = 1, 3
2,3,5 to 8 0,1
RUN Hold in REV only 3 STOP
rotating 2,3
direction 2,3
STOP Drive frequency Run Overload
command decision stop

Starting frequency 1 F23 Detection value J63

Stop frequency
4.3 Drive Command Block

F25 Detection level J64

Run forward FWD Low limiter F16 Mode selection J65
Hold
Run reverse REV Run command Low limiter H63 Mode J66
S06 Reference loss detction E65
Timer J67
Bit 0 [FWD] FWD

4-6
Standard keypad OFF if y98 = 2, 3 Bit 1 [REV]
RJ-45 port (RS-485) or H30 = 6 to 8 Bit 2 [X1] REV

Host equipment Bit 3 [X2]

Bit 4 [X3]
Bit 5 [X4]
OFF if y98 = 2, 3 Bit 6 [X5] *1 Truth table for S06 (bit 13, bit 14) processors
or H30 = 2, 3, 5 Bit 7 Fixed at 0 bit 13 bit 14 Output
RS-485 *2

Figure 4.2 Drive Command Block

Host equipment communications Bit 8 Fixed at 0
ON ON ON
option card Bit 9 Fixed at 0
Bit 10 ON OFF OFF
Fixed at 0
Last
command Bit 11 Fixed at 0 OFF ON OFF
OFF if
to take
H30 = 2, 3, 5 to 8 effect Bit 12 Fixed at 0 ON if E98 = 98 OFF OFF OFF
*2 *1
Bit 13 XF FWD
Host equipment Field bus option card FWD FWD ON  ON
Bit 14 XR REV ON if E98 = 99 Processor *2 For details of the options, refer to the instruction manual
OFF  OFF *2 For details of the options, refer to the instruction manual
Bit 15 RST
for each option.
for each option.
 ON ON Notes:
ON if E99 = 98 Notes:
- S codes are communication-related function codes.
 OFF OFF - S codes are communication-related function codes.
Refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual
*1 Refer to the 㪩㪪㪄㪋㪏㪌㩷㪚㫆㫄㫄㫌㫅㫀㪺㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫊㪼㫉㩾㫊㩷㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㩷㩿㪤㪜㪟㪋㪋㪏㪹㪀
REV -㧦Not assigned for details.
ON if E99 = 99 REV for details.
(Outputs the value of the assigned bit.) - For motor 2, read F23 as A12.
Processor - For motor 2, read F23 as A12.
 4.3 Drive Command Block

Figure 4.2 shows the processes that generate the final drive commands (FWD: Drive the motor in the forward direction
and REV: Drive the motor in reverse direction) through the various run commands and switching steps by means of
function codes.

Additional and supplemental information is given below.

• For the inverter operation given by the / key on the standard keypad, the generator holds the run
command ON upon depression of the key, decides the motor rotation direction according to the run
forward command FWD or the run reverse command REV, and releases the hold state upon depression of
the key.

Chap. 4
For the inverter operation given by the / / key on the multi-function keypad, the generator holds
the command ON upon depression of the / key, and releases the hold state upon depression of the
key.
• The 3-wire operation terminal command HLD holds the run forward terminal command FWD and the run

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

reverse terminal command REV. This allows you to run the inverter in "3-Wire Operation." Refer to the
function code E01 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details.
If you do not assign the 3-wire operation command HLD to any digital input terminals, the "2-Wire
Operation" using the commands FWD and REV will take effect.
• S06 (2-byte data of bit 15 through bit 0, programmable bitwise), the operation command via the
communications link, includes:
- Bit 0: assigned to FWD
- Bit 1: assigned to REV
- Bit 13 (XF) and bit 14 (XR): Programmable bits equivalent to the terminal inputs [FWD] and [REV]
In the block diagram, all of these are denoted as operation commands. The data setting for function code
E98 to select the function of terminal [FWD] and E99 of [REV] determine which bit value should be
selected as the run command. If bits 13 and 14 have the same setting to select the function of FWD or REV,
the output of bit 13-14 processor logic will follow the truth table listed in Figure 4.2.
If either one of bits 13 and 14 is ON (= 1 as a logic value), the OR logic output will make the enable
communications link command LE turn on. This is the same as with bit 0 and 1.
• If run commands FWD and REV are concurrently turned on, then logic forcibly makes the internal run
commands FWD and REV turn off.
• If you set data, 1 or 3, up to the function code H96 (STOP key priority/Start Check) to make the key
priority effective, then depressing the key forcibly turns off the internal run commands FWD and REV.
In this case, the generator automatically replaces deceleration characteristics of the inverter for that of the
linear deceleration regardless of the setting of H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern).
• If the reference frequency is lower than the starting frequency (F23) or the stop frequency (F25), then the
internal run commands will be finally turned off according to the output of run decision logic, and the
inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
The inverter is also equipped with the feature that if the frequency command specifies a reference frequency
lower than that of specified by the lower limiter (F16 and H63), the logic turn the run command OFF
automatically.
Further more, When the command loss detection is activated due to entering the abnormal frequency
command, if E65 = 0 the inverter turns the run command OFF.
• For the timer driven operation, once inputting a run command, the timer starts countdown, the inverter
automatically turns OFF the internal run command after the time elapsed, and releases the hold function in
the keypad at same time.
• When the overload stop facility is enabled and an overload is detected, the inverter turns the run command
OFF depending on data of the function code J65. To restart the inverter operation, once turn the run
command OFF, and it ON again.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-7
 4.4 Control Block

F03 Maximum frequency 1

FWD REV F04 Base frequency 1
Rotational F23 Starting frequency 1
direction F24 (Holding time)
limitation
F25 Stop frequency
"0" H08 Forward F39 (Holding time)
rotation
Drive frequency H28=0 prohibited
command
ACC/DEC processor
x H28ҁ0 Reverse
rotation
"-1" Droop control prohibited Acceleration/
H08 H07 deceleration
Calculated pattern
torque H11 Deceleration mode
H28
H56 Deceleration time for
Droop control forced stop
H63 Low limiter (Mode selection)
Select
ACC/DEC time
RT2/RT1
Acceleration Acceleration
time time 1
S08 F07
S09 F08 H70=0,999
Deceleration Deceleration H69=0
time time 1
H70ҁ0.00 F43=0
Acceleration time 2 E10 H70=0.00
Deceleration time 2 E11 Overload prevention control +
1
Deceleration Frequency
Overload rate H69=
prevention H70 processor processor
2,4
+
F43ҁ
control Cancel if 0
H70ҁ0.00 H70 = 999
Operation
analyzer
Select torque limiter level
TL2/TL1 Torque limiter
Torque limiter 1 (Braking)
(Limiting level for driving) F40
+ H76
Torque limiter 2
(Limiting level for driving) E16 - Torque
Calculated limit
torque
Torque limiter 1 F41 - adjuster
(Limiting level for braking) +
Torque limiter 2 E17
(Limiting level for braking) Run
decision
Torque limiter
(Braking)
Automatic deceleration H76
Calculated + Main control
torque block
-
Run
decision
Limit
level Cancel if
Automatic deceleration H69 = 0
(Mode selection) H69
Restart mode after
momentary power failure H14 Current limit control
(Frequency fall rate)
F44
+ Current limiter
Current limiter (Level)
-
Run
Output current decision
Cancel if
Current limiter F43 = 0
(Mode selection) F43

Enable/Disable F42
Slip compensation operation Control mode selection 1
response time P10 analyzer H68 Slip compensation 1

Calculated
torque x
Slip compensation gain P09
for driving
(Driving)
Rated slip frequency P12 x
(Braking)
x

Figure 4.3.1 Control Block -- Input Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-8
 4.4 Control Block

Power Rectifier
supply DC link bus
capacitor M
Cooling fan
Motor

Output current Cooling fan

Gate drive circuit ON-OFF
(Iu, Iv, Iw) control
H06
Cooling fan
PWM signals ON-OFF

Chap. 4
control
Instantaneous overcurrent H12
limiting (Mode selection)
Output Current 0 Alarm E toE
(Iu, Iv, Iw)
Comparator
Current limit level 1 Current limit
processing

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

F03 Maximum frequency 1
F04 Base frequency 1
F05 Rated voltage at base frequency 1
F06 Maximum output voltage 1
F09 Torque boost 1
F37 Load selection/Auto torque boost/Auto saving operation 1
F42 Control mode selection 1
Frequency H50 Non-linear V/f pattern 1 (Frequency)
limiter H51
(High) (Voltage)
Edc
H52 Non-linear V/f pattern 1 (Frequency) (DC link bus
F15 H53 (Voltage) 2-phase/ voltage)
H71 Deceleration 3-phase
characteristics converter
1 Voltage calculator
+
Edc PWM
Compen- PWM
- sation processor signals
Output current
fluctuation x
suppression gain H80
(for motor) 1
Motor 1
P02 (Rated capacity) Current
fluctuation
P03 (Rated current) suppressor
H64ҁ0.0 H64=0.0 P06 (No-load current) Motor sound
H64 F16 P07 (%R1) (Carrier frequency)
P08 (%X) F26
Low limiter Frequency Carrier
(Lower limiting limiter P99 Motor 1 selection F27 frequency
frequency) (Low) (Tone)
DC braking 1
(Braking DC braking
response mode) H95 Cancel if H98 = 0
Hardware
DC braking 1 Voltage current H98 㧔 Bit 0㧕
(Braking level) F21 calculation limiter
(Starting frequency) F20 Operation Carrier frequency
analyzer reduction
(Braking time) F22
processor
DCBRK

STM Auto search for

Auto search for idling motor speed (Auto search mode) H09 idling motor
speed
Auto search for idling motor speed (Auto search delay time) H49

Restart mode after momentary power failure (Mode selection) F14

Restart mode after momentary power failure (Restart time) H13 Restart mode
after momentary
Restart mode after momentary power failure (Frequency fall rate) H14 power failure
Restart mode after momentary power failure H16
(Allowable momentary power failure time)

Note:
Function codes in the above control block are for motor 1. For motor 2, read the function
codes for motor 1 as the function codes for motor 2, referring to the table below.

Function code
F03 F04 F05 F06 F09 F20 F21 F22 F37 F42
for motor 1
Function code
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A09 A10 A11 A13 A14
for motor 2

Function code
H68 H80 P02 P03 P06 P07 P09 P10 P12 P99
for motor 1
Function code
A40 A41 A16 A17 A20 A21 A23 A24 A26 A39
for motor 2

Figure 4.3.2 Control Block -- Output Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-9
 4.4 Control Block

Figures 4.3.1 and 4.3.2 show schematic block diagrams -- input and output stages respectively that explain the
processes in which the inverter drives the motor according to the final run command FWD or REV and the
drive frequency command sent from the drive frequency command block or the PID control block.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
• The logic shown in the upper left part of the block diagram processes the final reference frequency so that it
is inverted (u(-1)) for reverse rotation of the motor or is replaced with 0 (zero) for stopping the motor.
• If the droop control (H28) is enabled, the droop characteristics owing a load torque will take effect.
• The rotation direction limiter (H08) limits polarity (forward or reverse) of the final frequency command

Chap. 4
(reference) and helps the inverter take effect of anti-forward rotation or anti-reverse rotation function.
• The acceleration/deceleration processor determines the output frequency of the inverter by referring to data
of related function codes. If the output frequency exceeds the upper limit given by the frequency limiter

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

(High) (F15), the controller automatically limits the output frequency at the upper limit.
• If the overload prevention control is enabled, the logic automatically switches the output frequency to the
enabled side of overload suppression control and controls the output frequency accordingly.
• Upon activating of the torque limiter the inverter automatically switch its output frequency to ones of the
torque limiter and continues to run. The terminal command TL2/TL1 switches the level of torque limiting.
For the braking torque, it limits the frequency control amount according to data of the function code H76.
• Upon activating of regeneration power suppression, the inverter automatically switches its output frequency
to ones of the regeneration power suppression mode and continues to run, while lengthening the deceleration
time consequently more than specified one. For the braking torque, it limits the frequency control amount
according to data of the function code H76 as well as the torque limiting.
• Upon activating of the current limiter, the inverter switches automatically its output frequency to ones of the
current limiter, and continues to run.
• Define the slip compensation involving the rated slip of the motor (P12), the slip compensation gain for
driving (P09) and braking (P11), separately for driving and braking, and also the response to the slip
compensation as a response time to the slip compensation (P10).
• The voltage calculator determines the output voltage of the inverter. The calculator adjusts the output
voltage to control the motor output torque.
• If the DC braking control is enabled, the logic switches the voltage and frequency control components to the
ones determined by the DC braking block to feed the proper DC current to the motor for the DC braking.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-11
 4.5 PID Process Control Block

LED monitor (speed monitor tem)

Keypad operation E48
0,1,2
Reference frequency
3
Motor speed in r/min
Load shaft speed 4
command
Line speed command 5 Frequency command 1

Constant feeding 6 F01

rate time command 0
1
[12] 㬍
+ +
+ C33 + +
Hardware [C1] PTC thermistor C31 A Gain Bias
switch (C1 function) (Mode selection) [12] Filter "0" 1
[12] Offset C32 C34 F18 C50 +
SW7=C1 E59=0 H26=0 0 limiter
2
[C1] 㬍
+ + 3
+ +
Hardware [C1] C38
PTC thermistor C36 B Gain Bias
switch (C1 function) (Mode selection) [C1] (C1 function) "0" 5
[C1] (C1 function) Filter C37 C39 F18 C50
SW7=V2 E59=1 H26=0 0 limiter
Offset
㬍 7
+ +
+ +
C43 11
C41 C Gain Bias
[C1] (V2 function) "0" 12
[C1] (V2 function) Filter C42 C44 F18 C50
Offset 0 limiter
Hardware PTC thermistor
switch (Mode selection)
SW8=ON DIO
H26=1

Aralm
PG
J
H27 Compa-
PTC thermistor rator
UP/DOWN control
Initial frequency setting (Level)

H61

UP
command J02
UP/ 0
UP DOWN PID process command from keypad
DOWN control
command PID process command 1 1
DOWN 2
UP/ 3
DOWN
control
*1 ˜ 4
[12] +
+ S13
E61 PID
*2 Gain Bias command via
3
D I/O card D I/O card communications
DIO C32 C34 C51 C52
input terminal (option) A
5
˜

*1 ˜
[C1] (C1 function) +
Pulse train + Gain
*2 E62
PG card PG card C32 C34 PID
PG Gain Bias
input terminal (option) 3 feedback
C37 C39 C51 C52 amount
B 5
˜ 3

*1 ˜
[C1] (V2 function) +
+ Gain
E63 C37 C39
3 Gain Bias
C42 C44 C51 C52
C 5
OFF if y98 = 1, 3
Standard keypad or H30 = 4, 5, 8 ˜
RJ-45 port (RS-485)
Host equipment Frequency
Gain
command via
communications C42 C44
OFF if y98 = 1, 3 S01
or H30 = 1, 3, 7 ҁ0
RS-485 S01
*2
Host equipment communications D
option card 0
S05
OFF if Last
H30 = 1, 3 to 5,
7, 8 command
*2 to take effect
Host equipment Field bus option card

Figure 4.4.1 PID Process Control Block -- Input Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-12
 4.5 PID Process Control Block

Enable
communications link Select multi-frequency Cancel PID control
via RS-485 or field bus SS1,SS2 Hz/PID
LE

Chap. 4
Under PID control
Inverter running PID-CTL
RUN
Frequency
limiter (High)
Manual speed command
F15
1
Communications
link function Bus link
Jump Drive frequency
H30 function Multi-frequency 1 C05 command

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

Loader link frequency
0,2,6 y98 function Multi-frequency 2 C06
0,2 y99 Multi-frequency 3 C07 C01 F16
1,3 to 5,7,8 0,2 C02 Frequency
1,3
C03 limiter (Low)
1,3
D C04

PID control
Select multi-frequency (Anti reset windup)
SS4,SS8 J10
Hold PID integral component
PID-HLD PID control
(Upper limit of PID
Reset PID integral and differential process output)
components
PID-RST J18
2
+ PID
- processor
C08 Invert
Multi-frequency 4
J03 PID control P (Gain) J19
PID control PID control
C12 J04 I (Integral time)
Normal/inverse (Lower limit of PID
Multi-frequency 8 operation J05 PID control process output)
D (Differential time)

C16
Multi-frequency 12 Switch J01
normal/Inverse PID control
operation (Mode selection)
IVS

3
PID alarm
PID alarm processor
PID-ALM
J06
PID control
(Feedback filter) J11 PID control (Select alarm output)

J12 PID control (Upper level alarm (AH))

J13 PID control (Lower level alarm (AL))

*1
*1 Takes
Takes priority
priority when
when the
the same function has
same function has been
been assigned
assignedbybyE61,
E61,E62
E62and
andE63:
E63:
Terminal
Terminal [12]
[12] >> Terminal
Terminal [C1]
[C1] (C1
(C1 function)
function) >
> Terminal [C1] (V2
Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
function)
*2 For details of the options, refer to the instruction manual for each option.
*2 For details of the options, refer to the instruction manual for each option.
Note:
SNote:
codes are communication-related function codes. Refer to the RS-485
6FRGHVDUHFRPPXQLFDWLRQUHODWHGIXQFWLRQFRGHV5HIHUWRWKH56
Communication User's Manual for details.
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ8VHU
V0DQXDO0(+EIRUGHWDLOV

Figure 4.4.2 PID Process Control Block -- Output Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-13
 4.5 PID Process Control Block

Figures 4.4.1 and 4.4.2 show block diagrams of the PID control block -- input and output stages respectively,
when the PID process control is enabled (J01= 1 or 2). The logic shown generates the <drive frequency
command> according to the PID process command source and PID feedback source, PID conditioner, and the
selected frequency command source for a manual speed command.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
• This logic disables settings of the frequency command 2 (C30) and auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2
(E60 to E62) as manual frequency commands, and the command loss detection, switching between the
normal or inverse operation.
• The multi-frequency commands 1, 2, and 3 are only applicable to the manual speed command.

Chap. 4
• Refer to Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Block" for explanations of common items.
• For selecting analog input (terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function), or [C1] (V2 function)) as the PID process
command source, you need to set data up for function codes E61 to E62 and J02.

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

• The multi-frequency command 4 (C08), 8 (C12) and 12 (C16) are only applicable to PID process command.
• To switch the operation between normal and inverse, the logic inverses the polarity of difference between
the PID command and its feedback (turning the INV command on/off, or setting data J01 at 1 or 2).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-15
 4.6 PID Dancer Control Block
LED monitor (speed monitor tem)
Keypad operation E48
0,1,2
Reference frequency
3
Motor speed in r/min
Load shaft speed 4
command Frequency
Line speed command 5 F01
command 1
Constant feeding 6 0
rate time command
+ 1
[12] 㬍
+
+ +
Polarity C33 Polarity
A
Gain Bias C35=1
C31 C35=1 [12] Filter
C32 C34 F18 C50 +
[12] Offset "0" 0 limiter
0 limiter
Hardware [C1] PTC thermistor + 1
switch (C1 function) (Mode selection)
SW7=C1 E59=0 H26=0
2
[C1] 㬍
+ +
+ C38 +
3
B
PTC C36 [C1] Gain Bias "0"
[C1] (C1 function) C37 C39 F18 C50 0 limiter
thermistor
Filter
Hardware [C1] (Mode (C1 function)
switch (C1 function) Offset
selection)
SW7=V2 E59=1 H26=0
5
㬍
+ + 7
+ +
C43 C 11
C41 [C1] Gain Bias "0" 12
[C1] (V2 function) C42 C44 F18 C50 0 limiter
(V2 function) Filter Frequency
Offset command 2 C30
0
Hardware PTC thermistor
switch (Mode selection) 1
SW8=ON H26=1 㬍
+ 2
UP/DOWN control Aralm Gain
H27 Compa-
Initial frequency setting J
rator C32 C34 +
H61 PTC thermistor
(Level) 2
UP 㬍
command UP/
UP 3
DOWN Gain
DOWN control
command C37 C39
DOWN
5
㬍

*2 7
Gain
D I/O card D I/O card C42 C44 11
input terminal (option)
12

Pulse train *2
PG card PG card
input terminal (option)

Standard keypad OFF if y98 = 1, 3

RJ-45 port (RS-485) or H30 = 4, 5, 8

Host equipment Frequency

command via
communications
OFF if y98 = 1, 3 S01
or H30 = 1, 3, 7 ҁ0
RS-485 *2 S01
Host equipment communications D
option card 0
S05
OFF if Last
H30 = 1, 3 to 5, command
7, 8
*2 to take effect
Host equipment Field bus option card

PID control (Remote command SV)

(Dancer reference
J02
position) 0
UP/DOWN control PID command from keypad J57
Initial frequency setting
H61 PID command 1 1
UP
command
UP UP/ 3
DOWN Select
DOWN
control
command ˜ 4 multi-frequency
*1
DOWN [12] +
S13 SS4,SS8 Dancer
+ reference
E61 PID +
Gain command via position
Bias 3
3 communications
C32 C34 C51 C52 -
A
5 C08
˜
Multi-frequency 4
*1 ˜ C12
[C1] (C1 function) +
+ Gain Multi-frequency 8
E62 C32 C34
3 Gain Bias C16
C37 C39 C51 C52 Multi-frequency 12
B 5
˜

*1 ˜
[C1] (V2 function) + PID feedback
+ Gain amount
E63 4
C37 C39
3 Gain Bias
C42 C44 C51 C52 J06 5
C 5 PID control
˜ (Feedback filter)

Gain
C42 C44

Figure 4.5.1 PID Dancer Control Block -- Input Stage

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-16
 4.6 PID Dancer Control Block

Select frequency Enable

command 2/1 communications link Select multi-frequency
Hz2/Hz1 via RS-485 or field bus SS1,SS2
LE

Frequency
+
1 limiter (High)
F15
+
Communications +
Primary command
+ Drive frequency
link function Bus link Jump command
H30 function + frequency
Loader link +
0,2,6 y98 function

Chap. 4
C01 F16
0,2 y99
1,3 to 5,7,8 C02
0,2 Frequency
C03 limiter (Low)
1,3
1,3 C04

Multi-frequency 1 C05

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

Multi-frequency 2 C06
D
Multi-frequency 3 C07
Cancel PID
control
Hz/PID

2
Auxiliary frequency setting 1

*1 E61
[12]
0
1
㬍
2 Auxiliary frequency setting 2
A 㬍

[C1] (C1 function)*1 E62 Gain

0 C32 C34
1
㬍
2
B 㬍

[C1] (V2 function) *1 E63

Gain
0 C37 C39
1
㬍
2
C 㬍

Gain
C42 C44

PID control
(Anti reset windup)
Hold PID integral
J10 PID control
component J62 Bit 0: PID control
PID-HLD (Upper limit of PID
process output) (PID output pole)
Reset PID integral and
J18 0 1
differential components
PID-RST PID MV (Ratio) 1 㬍 "-1"
3 processor 㬍

PID control P (Gain) J03 0

PID control J19 MV (Speed)
I (Integral time) J04
PID control
PID control J05 J62 Bit 1: PID control
D (Differential time) (Lower limit of PID
process output) (Select compensation of output ratio)
PID control P (Gain) 2 J59
PID control
I (Integral time) 2 J60 J59 to J61
PID control J61 within detection width
D (Differential time) 2

PID control
J58
(Detection width of dancer position deviation)

4
PID alarm processor PID alarm
PID-ALM *1 Takespriority
*1 Takes prioritywhen
whenthe
the same
same function
function hashas
beenbeen assigned
assigned by E61,
by E61, E62E63:
E62 and and E63:
5 Terminal[12]
Terminal [12]> >Terminal
Terminal [C1]
[C1] (C1(C1 function)
function) > Terminal
> Terminal [C1]function)
[C1] (V2 (V2 function)
*2 For
*2 For details
detailsofofthe
theoptions,
options, refer to to
refer thethe
instruction manual
instruction for each
manual option.
for each option.
J11 PID control (Select alarm output)
Note:
Note:
J12 PID control (Upper level alarm (AH)) S codes are communication-related function codes. Refer to the RS-485
6FRGHVDUHFRPPXQLFDWLRQUHODWHGIXQFWLRQFRGHV5HIHUWRWKH56
Communication User's Manual for details.
J13 PID control (Lower level alarm (AL)) &RPPXQLFDWLRQ8VHU
V0DQXDO0(+EIRUGHWDLOV

Figure 4.5.2 PID Dancer Control Block -- Output Stage

4-17
 Figures 4.5.1 and 4.5.2 show block diagrams of the PID control block -- input and output stages respectively
when the PID dancer control is enabled (J01 = 3). The logic shown generates the <Drive frequency command>
according to the various PID command (such as the dancer reference position) and its PID feedback, the
primary frequency command and their switching means.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
• For the primary frequency command, the inverter disables the command loss detection, and switching
between the normal and inverse operation.
• Multi-frequency commands 1, 2 and 3 are exclusively applicable to the primary frequency.
• For logics common to the drive frequency command block, refer to 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Block."
• To use any of analog input terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function) for a PID command
(dancer reference position) input, be sure properly configure data of function codes E60, E61, E62 and J02.
• Multi-frequency commands 4, 8 and 12 are exclusively applicable to the PID command (dancer reference
position).
• The output of dancer reference position bandwidth detector switches PID constant set of the PID control
between (J03, J04 and J05) and (J59, J60 and J61).
• This logic allows the inverter to select either controlling the output of PID processor in a ratio (%) or
add/subtract of the frequency (Hz) to the primary frequency command.
• The terminal command of PID cancel Hz/PID cancels the compensation of PID dancer control and makes
the inverter also possible to run with the primary frequency command.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-18
 4.7 FM Output Selector

4.7 FM Output Selector

Analog output [FM]
(Function) Mode selection Gain
F31 F29 F30
Hardware switch
SW6 = FMA
0 0
Output frequency 1 㬍 Voltage output [FM]
1 SW6 = FMP
Output frequency 2 2
㬍 Pulse output
2
Output current
3
Output voltage

Chap. 4
F33
4
Output torque Pulse rate
5
Load factor
6
Input power
7
PID feedback amount (PV)

BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

8
PG feedback value
9
DC link bus voltage
10
Universal AO
13
Motor output
14
Test analog output
15
PID command (SV)
16
PID output (MV)

Figure 4.6 Terminal [FM] Output Selector

The block diagram in Figure 4.6 shows the process for selecting and processing the internal signals to be output
to analog/pulse output terminals [FM].
Combination of function code F29 data and selection of the hardware switch SW6 on the interface PCB
specifies a property of the analog/pulse output [FM] terminal for an analog voltage or a pulse train.
To select information to be transferred to the analog/pulse output terminal [FM], use the function code F31. For
its analog output (voltage output), the function code F30 can define the full scale of the output that just matches
with the full scale of the connected voltmeter in the external equipment. For the pulse train output, the function
code F33 defines rate of the output (pulse count/s for the 100% output) matching resolution of the counter
connected in the external equipment.
Setting function code F31 to "10: Universal AO" enables data output from the host equipment via the
communications link on [FM].
The calibration analog output (F31 = 14) refers to an output of the [FM]’s full-scale voltage or pulse that adjusts
the scale of the connected meter.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
4-19
 Chapter 5

RUNNING THROUGH RS-485

COMMUNICATION
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS-485 communications facility. Refer to
the RS-485 Communication User's Manual for details.

Contents

5.1 Overview on RS-485 Communication ........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications (standard and optional)..................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 RJ-45 connector pin assignment for standard RS-485 communications port...................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Pin assignment for optional RS-485 Communications Card............................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Cable for RS-485 communications port.............................................................................................. 5-4
5.1.5 Communications support devices........................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader ..................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3 Function overview............................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3.1 Setting of function code .............................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.3.2 Multi-monitor.............................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.3.3 Running status monitor ............................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.3.4 Test-running .............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.3.5 Real-time trace—Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms ................................ 5-11

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 5.1 Overview on RS-485 Communication

5.1 Overview on RS-485 Communication

Detaching the standard keypad from the FRENIC-Multi inverter and using the standard RJ-45 connector
(modular jack) as an RS-485 communications port brings about the following enhancements in
functionality and operation:
„ Remote operation from a keypad at the remote location
Using an extension cable to connect the standard keypad or an optional multi-function keypad to the
RJ-45 port allows you to mount the keypad on a panel located far from the inverter, enabling remote
operation. The maximum length of the extension cable is 20 m.
„ Operation by FRENIC Loader
The Windows-based PC can be connected to the standard RS-485 communications port via a suitable

Chap. 5
converter. Through the RS-485 communications facility, you may run FRENIC Loader on the PC to edit
the function code data and monitor the running status information of the inverter.
„ Control via host equipment

RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION

You can use a personal computer (PC) or a PLC as host (higher-level) equipment and through it control
the inverter as its subordinate device.
Protocols for managing a network including inverters include the Modbus RTU protocol (compliant to
the protocol established by Modicon Inc.) that is widely used in FA markets and the Fuji
general-purpose inverter protocol that supports the FRENIC-Multi and conventional series of inverters.
Connecting the keypad automatically switches to the keypad protocol; there is no need to
modify the function code setting.
When using FRENIC Loader, which requires a special protocol for handling Loader
commands, you need to set up some communication function codes accordingly.
For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.

Further, another RS-485 communications port can be added by mounting an optional RS-485
Communications Card onto the FRENIC-Multi inverter. This additional communications link can be
used only as a port for host equipment, not used for a keypad or FRENIC Loader.

For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-1
 5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications (standard and optional)
Items Specifications
Protocol FGI-BUS Modbus RTU Loader commands
(supported only on the
standard version)
Compliance Fuji general-purpose Modicon Modbus Dedicated protocol
inverter protocol RTU-compliant (Not disclosed)
(only in RTU mode)
No. of supporting Host device: 1
stations Inverters: Up to 31
Electrical EIA RS-485
specifications
Connection to RS-485 RJ-45 connector (standard) or terminal block (optional)
Synchronization Asynchronous start-stop system
Transmission mode Half-duplex
Transmission speed 2400, 4800, 9600 19200 or 38400 bps
Max. transmission 1600 ft (500 m)
cable length
No. of logical station 1 to 31 1 to 247 1 to 255
addresses available
Message frame format FGI-BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC loader
Frame SOH (Start Of Header) Detection of no-data Start code 96H
synchronization character detection transmission time for detection
3-byte period
Frame length Normal transmission: Variable length Variable length
16 bytes (fixed)
High-speed transmission:
8 or 12 bytes
Max. transfer data Write: 1 word Write: 50 words Write: 41 words
Read: 1 word Read: 50 words Read: 41 words
Messaging system Polling/Selecting/Broadcast Command message
Transmission ASCII Binary Binary
character format

Character length 8 or 7 bits 8 bits (fixed) 8 bits (fixed)

(selectable by the
function code)
Parity Even, Odd, or None Even (fixed)
(selectable by the function code)
Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits No parity: 2 bits/1 bit 1 bit (fixed)
(selectable by the Even or Odd parity:
function code) 1 bit
Select by parity setting.
Error checking Sum-check CRC-16 Sum-check

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-2
 5.1 Overview on RS-485 Communication

5.1.2 RJ-45 connector pin assignment for standard RS-485

communications port
The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ-45 connector having the following pin assignment:

Pin Signal name Function Remarks

1 and 8 Vcc Power source for the keypad 5 V power lines
2 and 7 GND Reference potential Grounding pins
3 and 6 NC Not used. No connection
4 DX- RS-485 data (-) Built-in terminating resistor: 112:
5 DX+ RS-485 data (+) Open/close by SW3*

Chap. 5
* For details about SW3, refer to "Setting up the slide switches" in Section 8.3.1 "Terminal functions."

RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION

Pins 1, 2, 7, and 8 on the RJ-45 connector are exclusively assigned to power supply and
grounding for keypads. When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take care not
to use those pins. Failure to do so may cause a short-circuit hazard.
Do not connect the FVR-E11S series of inverters since the pin assignment of the keypad is
different from that of the FRENIC-Multi series. Doing so could result in an inverter damage.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-3
 5.1.3 Pin assignment for optional RS-485 Communications Card
The RS-485 Communications Card has two RJ-45 connectors for multi-drop connection. Each RJ-45
connector has the pin assignment as listed below.

Pin Signal name Function Remarks

1, 3, 6, 7 NC No connection —
and 8 (Reserved for keypad power source.)
2 SD Shield terminal Internally connecting SDs
4 DX- RS-485 data (-) Built-in terminating resistor: 112:
5 DX+ RS-485 data (+) Open/close by SW9*

* For details about SW9, refer to RS-485 Communication User's Manual.

5.1.4 Cable for RS-485 communications port

For connection with the RS-485 communications port, be sure to use an appropriate cable and a
converter that meet the applicable specifications.

For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-4
 5.1 Overview on RS-485 Communication

5.1.5 Communications support devices

This section provides information necessary for connection of the inverter to host equipment having no
RS-485 communications port such as a PC or for configuring a multi-drop connection.

[ 1 ] Communications level converter

Most personal computers (PC) are not equipped with an RS-485 communications port but RS-232C and
USB ports. To connect a FRENIC-Multi inverter to a PC, therefore, you need to use an
RS-232C—RS-485 communications level converter or a USB—RS-485 interface converter. For correct
running of the communications facility to support FRENIC-Multi series of inverters, be sure to use one
of the recommended converters listed below.
Recommended converters

Chap. 5
KS-485PTI (RS-232C—RS-485 communications level converter)
USB-485I RJ45-T4P (USB—RS-485 interface converter)
Supplied by SYSTEM SACOM Corporation.

RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION

[ 2 ] Requirements for the cable
Use an off-the-shelf 10BASE-T LAN cable (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A category 5 compliant, straight type).
The RJ-45 connector has power source pins (pins 1, 2, 7 and 8) exclusively assigned for
keypads. When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take care not to use those
pins. Failure to do so may cause a short-circuit hazard.

[ 3 ] Multi-drop adapter
To connect a FRENIC-Multi inverter to a network in a multi-drop configuration with a LAN cable that
has RJ-45 as the communications connector, use a multi-drop adapter for the RJ-45 connector.
Recommended multi-drop adapter
Model MS8-BA-JJJ made by SK KOHKI Co., Ltd.

[ 4 ] RS-485 Communications Card

To equip your inverter with another RS-485 communications port in addition to the standard RS-485
communications port, you need to install this optional card. Note that you cannot use FRENIC Loader
through the optional RS-485 communications port.
RS-485 Communications Card (option)
For details, refer to the RS-485 Communications Card "OPC-E1-RS" Installation Manual.

For more details through Section 5.1.5, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-5
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader
FRENIC Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via an RS-485
communications link. It allows you to remotely run or stop the inverter, edit, set, or manage the function
codes, monitor key parameters and values during operation, as well as monitor the running status
(including alarm information) of the inverters on the RS-485 communications network.

For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.

5.2.1 Specifications
Specifications
Item Remarks
(White on black indicates factory default)
Name of software FRENIC Loader Ver. 4.0.0.0 or later
Supported inverter FRENIC-Multi series (Note 1)
FRENIC-Eco series
FRENIC-Mini series
No. of supported inverters Up to 31
Recommended cable 10BASE-T cable with RJ-45 connectors
compliant with EIA568
CPU Intel Pentium III 600 MHz or later (Note 2)
OS Microsoft Windows 2000
Operating environment

Microsoft Windows XP
Memory 32 MB or more RAM 64 MB or more is
recommended
Hard disk 5 MB or more free space
COM port RS-232C or USB Conversion to RS-485
communication required to
connect inverters
Monitor resolution XVGA (800 x 600) or higher 1024 x 768, 16-bit color or
higher is recommended
COM port COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, PC COM ports assigned to
COM6, COM7, COM8 Loader
Transmission rate 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 and 2400 bps 19200 bps or more is
recommended.
Transmission requirements

(Note 3)
Character length 8 bits Prefixed
Stop bit length 1 bit Prefixed
Parity Even Prefixed
No. of retries None or 1 to 10 No. of retry times before
detecting communications
error
Timeout setting (100 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms), (1.0 to 9.0 s) or This setting should be longer
(10.0 to 60.0 s) than the response interval
time set by function code y09
of the inverter.
(Note 1) FRENIC Loader cannot be used with inverters that do not support SX protocol (protocol for
handling Loader commands).
With special order-made inverters, FRENIC Loader may not be able to display some function
codes normally.
To use FRENIC Loader on FRENIC-Mini series of inverters, an RS-485 Communications Card
(Option: OPC-C1-RS) is required.

5-6
 5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader

(Note 2) Use a PC with as high a performance as possible, since some slow PCs may not properly refresh
the operation status monitor and Test-run windows.
(Note 3) To use FRENIC Loader on a network where a FRENIC-Mini inverter is also configured, choose
19200 bps or below.

5.2.2 Connection
By connecting a number of inverters to one PC, you can control one inverter at a time or a number of
inverters simultaneously. You can also simultaneously monitor a number of inverters on the multi
monitor.

For how to connect a PC to one or more inverters, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's
Manual.

Chap. 5
5.2.3 Function overview

RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION

5.2.3.1 Setting of function code
You can set, edit, and check the setting of the inverter’s function code data.
List and Edit
In List and edit, you can list and edit function codes with function code No., name, set value, set range,
and factory default.
You can also list function codes by any of the following groups according to your needs:
• Function code group
• Function codes that have been modified from their factory defaults
• Result of comparison with the settings of the inverter
• Result of search by function code name
• User-specified function code set

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-7
 Comparison
You can compare the function code data currently being edited with that saved in a file or stored in the
inverter.
To perform a comparison and review the result displayed, click the Comparison tab and then click the
Compared with inverter tab or click the Compared with file tab, and specify the file name.
The result of the comparison will be displayed also in the Comparison Result column of the list.

File information
Clicking the File information tab displays the property and comments for identifying the function code
editing file.
(1) Property
Shows file name, inverter model, inverter’s capacity, date of readout, etc.
(2) Comments
Displays the comments you have entered. You can write any comments necessary for identifying the
file.

5.2.3.2 Multi-monitor
This feature lists the status of all the inverters that are marked "connected" in the configuration table.
Multi-monitor
Allows you to monitor the status of more than one inverter in a list format.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-8
 5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader

5.2.3.3 Running status monitor

The running status monitor offers four monitor functions: I/O monitor, System monitor, Alarm monitor,
and Meter display. You can choose an appropriate monitoring format according to the purpose and
situation.
I/O monitor
Allows you to monitor the ON/OFF states of the
digital input signals to the inverter and the
transistor output signals.

Chap. 5
RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION
System monitor
Allows you to check the inverter’s system
information (version, model, maintenance
information, etc.).

Alarm monitor
The alarm monitor shows the alarm status of the
selected inverter. In this window you can check
the details of the alarm currently occurs and
related information.

Meter display
Displays analog readouts of the selected inverter
(such as output frequency) on analog meters.
The example on the right displays the reference
frequency and the output frequency.

5-9
 5.2.3.4 Test-running
The Test-running feature allows you to test-run the motor in "Run forward" or "Run reverse" while
monitoring the running status of the selected inverter.

Select monitor item Setting frequency command

Select what is to be displayed here from Enter or select the set frequency command to write it into the inverter.
output frequency, current, etc. Click Apply to make it effective.
I/O terminal status
Shows status of the programmable I/O
terminals of the inverter.
Indicating
Operation
status
Shows
FWD,
REV,
STOP and
Alarm
codes.

Operation
buttons*

Selecting monitor item Update the inverter info Switching frequency and run
Select the operation status information to for the latest ones command sources
be monitored real-time. Click the Refresh button to Select the frequency and run
update running status of the command sources and apply them
inverter shown on the Loader by clicking Apply.
screen. Loader will become to
show the latest inverter status.

* Refer to the table shown below for details of the operation buttons. The indented appearance of the FWD
button as shown in the figure above indicates that it is active for running the motor forward, while that of
the REV button is same for running reverse.

Button Description
STOP Stops the motor.
FWD Run the motor forward.
REV Run the motor reverse.
RESET Resets all alarm information saved in the selected inverter.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-10
 5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader

5.2.3.5 Real-time trace—Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms

This function allows you to monitor up to 4 analog readouts and up to 8 digital ON/OFF signals
(maximum number of monitor item to be displayed is 8 channels), measured at fixed sampling intervals
of 200 ms, which represent the running status of a selected inverter. These quantities are displayed in
real-time waveforms on a time trace.
Waveform capturing capability: Max. 15,360 samples/channel

Sub-panes
Set up the monitor items Status of Cursor Save Data Hardcopy Cursor scroll Blinks during the
Position graph monitoring position the monitor slide real-time trace
running

Chap. 5
RUNNING THROUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION
START/STOP Monitoring items Advanced setting Scope scroll Cursor Monitor window
the real-time trace. of the channels of the channels slide

During the real-time trace in progress you cannot:

• Change the RS-485 station address,
• Change the advanced waveform settings, or
• Scroll the real-time trace screen or move the cursor.
Resizing the real-time trace window automatically changes the monitor window size.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
5-11
 Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and
Options

Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Chapter 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Multi's configuration
with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.

Contents

6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Multi.................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Recommended wires ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Peripheral Equipment.................................................................................................................................. 6-8
[ 1 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) and
magnetic contactor (MC)............................................................................................................... 6-8
[ 2 ] Surge killers................................................................................................................................. 6-12
[ 3 ] Arresters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-12
[ 4 ] Surge absorbers ........................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.4 Selecting Options ...................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options............................................................................................................ 6-14
[ 1 ] Braking resistors.......................................................................................................................... 6-14
[ 2 ] DC reactors (DCRs) .................................................................................................................... 6-17
[ 3 ] AC reactors (ACRs) .................................................................................................................... 6-19
[ 4 ] Output circuit filters (OFLs)........................................................................................................ 6-20
[ 5 ] Zero-phase reactor for reducing radio noise (ACL) .................................................................... 6-22
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications ...................................................................................... 6-23
[ 1 ] External potentiometer for frequency setting .............................................................................. 6-23
[ 2 ] Multi-function keypad ................................................................................................................. 6-24
[ 3 ] Extension cable for remote operation .......................................................................................... 6-24
[ 4 ] RS-485 communications card...................................................................................................... 6-25
[ 5 ] Inverter support loader software.................................................................................................. 6-25
6.4.3 Meter options .................................................................................................................................... 6-26
[ 1 ] Frequency meters......................................................................................................................... 6-26

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Multi

6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Multi

This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC-Multi
series of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference. Refer to Figure 6.1 for a quick
overview of available options.

Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Figure 6.1 Quick Overview of Options

6-1
 6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial
power lines, motor or any of the optional/peripheral equipment. The level of electric noise issued from
the inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and
routing. To solve such noise-related problems, refer to Appendix A "Advantageous Use of Inverters
(Notes on electrical noise)."
Select wires that satisfy the following requirements:
- Sufficient capacity to flow the rated average current (allowable current capacity).
- Protective coordination with an MCCB or GFCI with overcurrent protection in the overcurrent
zone.
- Voltage loss due to the wire length is within the allowable range.
- Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the optional equipment to be used.
Recommended wires are listed below. Use these wires unless otherwise specified.
■ 600 V class of vinyl-insulated wires (IV wires)
Use this class of wire for the power circuits. This class of wire is hard to twist, so using it for the control
signal circuits is not recommended. Maximum ambient temperature for this wire is 60qC (140qF).
■ 600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wires or 600 V polyethylene insulated wires (HIV
wires)
As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a higher
ambient temperature (75qC (167qF)), they can be used for both of the main power and control signal
circuits. To use this class of wire for the control circuits, you need to correctly twist the wires and keep
the wiring length for equipment being connected as short as possible.
■ 600 V cross-linked polyethylene-insulated wires
Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits. These wires are smaller in diameter and
more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires, meaning that these wires can be used to save
on space and increase operation efficiency of your power system, even in high temperature
environments. The maximum allowable ambient temperature for this class of wires is 90qC (194qF). The
(Boardlex) wire range available from Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. satisfies these requirements.
■ Shielded-Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic/electric equipment
Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from
being affected by noise from external sources, including the power input/output lines of the inverter
themselves. Even if the signal lines are inside the power control panel, always use this category of cables
when the length of wiring is longer than normal. Cables satisfying these requirements are the Furukawa's
BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and XEWV ranges.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-2
 6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals

Currents Flowing across the Inverter Terminals

Table 6.1 summarizes average (effective) electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter
model for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment, options and electric wires for each
inverter--including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating.

Table 6.1 Currents Flowing through Inverter

Nominal 230 V/460 V, 50 Hz 220 V (230 V)/440 V (460 V), 60 Hz

Power
applied Input RMS current (A) DC link Braking resistor Input RMS current (A) DC link Braking resistor
supply
motor DC reactor (DCR) bus current circuit current DC reactor (DCR) bus current circuit current
voltage
(HP) w/ DCR w/o DCR (A) (A) w/ DCR w/o DCR (A) (A)
1/8 0.57 1.1 0.7 0.82 0.51 (0.55) 1.1 (1.1) 0.62 (0.7) 0.82
1/4 0.93 1.8 1.1 1.2 0.85 (0.92) 1.7 (1.8) 1.0 (1.1) 1.2
1/2 1.6 3.1 2.0 1.2 1.5 (1.6) 3.0 (3.1) 1.8 (2.0) 1.2
1 3.0 5.3 3.7 1.6 2.8 (3.0) 5.0 (5.3) 3.4 (3.7) 1.6
Three- 2 5.7 9.5 7.0 3.6 5.2 (5.6) 9.0 (9.5) 6.3 (6.9) 3.6
phase 3 8.3 13.2 10.2 3.5 7.6 (8.3) 12.3 (13.2) 9.3 (10.1) 3.5
230V 5 14.0 22.2 17.2 4.1 12.7 (13.9) 20.6 (22.2) 15.6 (17.0) 4.1
7.5 21.1 31.5 25.9 6.4 19.0 (20.9) 28.4 (31.2) 23.3 (25.6) 6.4
10 28.8 42.7 35.3 6.1 26.0 (28.6) 38.5 (42.3) 31.9 (35.1) 6.1

Chap. 6
15 42.2 60.7 51.7 9.1 38.0 (41.8) 54.7 (60.1) 46.6 (51.2) 9.1
20 57.6 80.1 70.6 11.0 52.0 (57.1) 72.2 (79.4) 63.7 (70.0) 11.0
1/2 0.85 1.7 1.0 0.8 0.74 (0.85) 1.7 (1.7) 0.99 (1.0) 0.8
1 1.6 3.1 1.8 1.1 1.4 (1.6) 3.0 (3.0) 1.7 (2.0) 1.1
2 3.0 5.9 3.5 1.8 2.6 (3.0) 5.1 (5.9) 3.2 (3.6) 1.8

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Three- 3 4.4 8.2 5.1 1.8 3.8 (4.3) 7.1 (8.2) 4.6 (5.3) 1.8
phase 5 7.3 13.0 8.6 2.1 6.4 (7.3) 11.1 (12.9) 7.8 (8.9) 2.1
460V 7.5 10.6 17.3 13.0 3.2 9.6 (10.5) 15.7 (17.2) 12.9 (11.8) 3.2
10 14.4 23.2 17.7 3.1 13.0 (14.3) 21.0 (23.0) 17.6 (16.0) 3.1
15 21.1 33.0 25.9 4.5 19.0 (20.9) 29.8 (32.7) 25.6 (23.3) 4.5
20 28.8 43.8 35.3 5.7 26.0 (28.6) 39.5 (43.4) 35.1 (31.9) 5.7
1/8 1.1 1.8 1.1 0.61 1.0 (1.1) 1.8 (1.8) 1.0 (1.1) 0.61
1/4 2.0 3.3 2.0 0.66 1.8 (1.9) 3.1 (3.3) 1.8 (1.9) 0.66
Single-
1/2 3.5 5.4 3.5 0.82 3.1 (3.4) 5.0 (5.4) 3.1 (3.4) 0.82
phase
230V 1 6.4 9.7 6.4 1.4 5.8 (6.3) 9.1 (9.7) 5.8 (6.3) 1.4
2 11.6 16.4 12 1.4 10.5 (11.3) 15.5 (16.4) 10.5 (11.3) 1.4
3 17.5 24.8 18 1.7 15.8 (17.0) 23.4 (24.8) 15.8 (17.0) 1.7

- Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model. The input route mean
square (RMS) current is calculated according to the following conditions:
Power supply capacity: 500 kVA; power supply impedance: 5%
- The current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage, such
as 230 VAC and 380 VAC.
- The braking current is always constant, independent of braking resistor specifications, including
built-in, standard and 10%ED models.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-3
 6.2.1 Recommended wires
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power control
panel.
■ If the internal temperature of your power control panel is 50qC (122qF) or below

Table 6.2 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)

2
Recommended wire size (mm )
Nominal Main circuit power input [L1/R , L2/S , L3/T] or [L1/L, L2/N]
Power Inverter output [U , V , W]
applied w/ DC reactor (DCR) w/o DC reactor (DCR)
supply Inverter type
motor
voltage Allowable temp.*1 Current Allowable temp.*1 Current Allowable temp.*1 Current
(HP) 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄
(A) (A) (A)
(140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F)
1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.57 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.93 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
1 FRN001E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.0
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.0
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 11
230V 5 FRN005E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.0 5.5 2.0 2.0 22.2 3.5 2.0 2.0 17
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U 5.5 2.0 2.0 21.1 8.0 3.5 3.5 31.5 5.5 3.5 2.0 25
10 FRN010E1S-2U 8.0 3.5 2.0 28.8 14.0 5.5 5.5 42.7 8.0 3.5 3.5 33
15 FRN015E1S-2U 14.0 5.5 5.5 42.2 22.0 14.0 8.0 60.7 14.0 8.0 5.5 47
20 FRN020E1S-2U 22.0 14.0 8.0 57.6 38.0 22.0 14.0 80.1 22.0 14.0 8.0 60
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.85 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
1 FRN001E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5
2 FRN002E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.7
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.5
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.0
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.6 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13
10 FRN010E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 5.5 2.0 2.0 23.2 3.5 2.0 2.0 18
15 FRN015E1S-4U 5.5 2.0 2.0 21.1 8.0 3.5 3.5 33.0 5.5 2.0 2.0 24
20 FRN020E1S-4U 8.0 3.5 2.0 28.8 14.0 5.5 5.5 43.8 8.0 3.5 2.0 30
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
Single-
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
phase
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.0
2 FRN002E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.6 3.5 2.0 2.0 16.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.0
3 FRN003E1S-7U 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.5 5.5 3.5 2.0 24.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 11

*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60qC (140qF),
600 V class of polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75qC (167qF), and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated
wires for 90qC (194qF).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-4
 6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals

Table 6.2 Cont. (for DC reactor, braking resistor, control circuits, and inverter grounding)
Recommended wire size (mm2)
Nominal DC reactor Braking resistor Inverter grounding
Power Control circuit
applied [P1, P(+)] [P(+), DB] [G]
supply Inverter type
motor
voltage Allowable temp.*1 Current Allowable temp.*1 Current Allowable temp.*1 Allowable temp.*1
(HP)
60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄
(A) (A)
(140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F)

1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.82
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.2
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.2
1 FRN001E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 0.75 0.75 0.75

Chap. 6
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 to to to
230V 5 FRN005E1S-2U 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.1 1.25 1.25 1.25
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U 5.5 3.5 2.0 25.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 3.5
10 FRN010E1S-2U 14.0 5.5 3.5 35.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.1
5.5
15 FRN015E1S-2U 22.0 8.0 5.5 51.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.1

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

20 FRN020E1S-2U 38.0 14.0 14.0 70.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.0 8.0
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8
1 FRN001E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1
2 FRN002E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8
2.0
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8 0.75 0.75 0.75
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.1 to to to
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.2 1.25 1.25 1.25
10 FRN010E1S-4U 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.1
15 FRN015E1S-4U 5.5 3.5 2.0 25.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.5 3.5
20 FRN020E1S-4U 14.0 5.5 3.5 35.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.7
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.61
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.66
Single- 0.75 0.75 0.75
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.82 2.0
phase to to to
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.4 1.25 1.25 1.25
2 FRN002E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 12 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.4
3 FRN003E1S-7U 3.5 2.0 2.0 18 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7 3.5

*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60qC (140qF),
600 V class of polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75qC (167qF), and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated
wires for 90qC (194qF).

If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from
those listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6.1 and Appendices,
App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-5
 ■ If the internal temperature of your power control panel is 40qC (104qF) or below

Table 6.3 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)
2
Recommended wire size (mm )
Nominal Main circuit power input [L1/R , L2/S , L3/T] or [L1/L, L2/N]
Power Inverter output [U , V , W ]
applied w/ DC reactor (DCR) w/o DC reactor (DCR)
supply Inverter type
motor Allowable temp.*1 Allowable temp.*1 Allowable temp.*1
voltage Current Current Current
(HP) 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄
(A) (A) (A)
(140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F)
1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.57 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.93 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
1 FRN001E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.0
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.0
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 11
230V 5 FRN005E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.0 3.5 2.0 2.0 22.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 17
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 21.1 5.5 3.5 2.0 31.5 3.5 2.0 2.0 25
10 FRN010E1S-2U 3.5 2.0 2.0 28.8 8.0 5.5 3.5 42.7 5.5 3.5 2.0 33
15 FRN015E1S-2U 8.0 5.5 3.5 42.2 14.0 8.0 5.5 60.7 8.0 5.5 3.5 47
20 FRN020E1S-2U 14.0 8.0 5.5 57.6 22.0 14.0 14.0 80.1 14.0 8.0 5.5 60
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.85 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
1 FRN001E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5
2 FRN002E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.7
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.5
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.0
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13
10 FRN010E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 3.5 2.0 2.0 23.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 18
15 FRN015E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 21.1 5.5 3.5 2.0 33.0 3.5 2.0 2.0 24
20 FRN020E1S-4U 3.5 2.0 2.0 28.8 8.0 5.5 3.5 43.8 3.5 3.5 2.0 30
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
Single-
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
phase
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.0
2 FRN002E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 16.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.0
3 FRN003E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.5 3.5 2.0 2.0 24.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 11

*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60qC (140qF),
600 V class of polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75qC (167qF), and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated
wires for 90qC (194qF).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-6
 6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals

■ If the internal temperature of your power control panel is 40qC (104qF) or below

Table 6.3 Cont. (for DC reactor, braking resistor, control circuit, and inverter grounding)
2
Recommended wire size (mm )
Nominal DC reactor Braking resistor Inverter grounding
Power Control circuit
applied [P1, P(+)] [P(+), DB] [G]
supply Inverter type
motor Allowable temp.*1 Current Allowable temp.*1 Current Allowable temp.*1 Allowable temp.*1
voltage
(HP) 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄 60㷄 75㷄 90㷄
(A) (A)
(140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F) (140°F) (167°F) (194°F)

1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.82
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.2
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.2
1 FRN001E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 0.75 0.75 0.75
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 to to to

Chap. 6
230V 5 FRN005E1S-2U 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.1 1.25 1.25 1.25
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U 3.5 2.0 2.0 25.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 3.5
10 FRN010E1S-2U 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.1
5.5
15 FRN015E1S-2U 14.0 5.5 5.5 51.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.1

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

20 FRN020E1S-2U 14.0 14.0 8.0 70.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 11 8.0
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8
1 FRN001E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1
2 FRN002E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8
2.0
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.8 0.75 0.75 0.75
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.1 to to to
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.2 1.25 1.25 1.25
10 FRN010E1S-4U 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.1
15 FRN015E1S-4U 3.5 2.0 2.0 25.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.5 3.5
20 FRN020E1S-4U 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.7
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.61
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.66
Single- 0.75 0.75 0.75
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.82
phase to to to 2.0
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.4 1.25 1.25 1.25
2 FRN002E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 12 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.4
3 FRN003E1S-7U 2.0 2.0 2.0 18 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7

*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60qC (140qF),
600 V class of polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75qC (167qF), and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated
wires for 90qC (194qF).

If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from
those listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6.1 and Appendices,
App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-7
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
[ 1 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), ground-fault circuit interrupter
(GFCI) and magnetic contactor (MC)
[ 1.1 ] Functional overview
■ MCCBs and GFCIs*
*With overcurrent protection

Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) are designed to protect the power circuits between the power
supply and inverter's main circuit terminals ([L1/R], [L2/S] and [L3/T] for three phase, or [L1/L] and
[L2/N] for single-phase power supply) from overload or short-circuit, which in turn prevents secondary
accidents caused by the broken inverter.
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) function in the same way as MCCBs.
Built-in overcurrent/overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its
input/output lines.

■ MCs
An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter. At each side, the MC works
as described below. When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter, the MC can also switch the motor
drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines.
At the power supply side
Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply (generally, commercial/factory power lines)
with the protective function built into the inverter, or with the external signal input.
(2) Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command
due to internal/external circuit failures.
(3) Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side
cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose. For the purpose only, it is recommended
that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON/OFF manually.
When your system requires starting/stopping the motor(s) driven by the inverter with the
MC, the frequency of the starting/stopping operation should be once or less per hour. The
more frequent the operation, the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor/s used in the
DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow. It is
recommended that terminal commands FWD, REV and HLD for 3-wire operation or the
keypad be used for starting/stopping the motor.
At the output side
Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals
([U], [V], and [W]) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for example, when a circuit that
switches the motor driving power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines
is connected to the inverter.
As application of the external current to the inverter's secondary (output) circuits may break
the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs), MCs should be used in the power control
system circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial power lines after
the motor has come to a complete stop. Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied
to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation, or similar.
(2) Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter.
(3) Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been
activated.
6-8
 6.3 Peripheral Equipment

Driving the motor using commercial power lines

MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial
power supply.
Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 6.1, which are the most critical RMS
currents for using the inverter. (Refer to Table 6.4) For switching the motor drive source between the
inverter output and commercial power lines, use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the
commercial line side.

[ 1.2 ] Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers

Figure 6.2 shows a connection example for MCCB or GFCI (with overcurrent protection) in the inverter
input circuit. Table 6.4 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter models. Table
6.5 lists the applicable grades of GFCI sensitivity.

Insert an MCCB or GFCI (with overcurrent protection) recommended for each inverter for its input

Chap. 6
circuits. Do not use an MCCB or GFCI of a higher rating than that recommended.
Doing so could result in a fire.

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Molded case circuit breaker/
ground-fault circuit interrupter Magnetic contactor

Figure 6.2 External Views of Molded Case Circuit Breaker/Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter, Magnetic
Contactor and Connection Example

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-9
 Table 6.4 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker/ Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter
and Magnetic Contactor

Nominal MCCB, GFCI Magnetic contactor type

Power Rated current (A) MC1 (for input circuit)
applied Magnetic contactor type
supply Inverter type
motor DC reactor (DCR) DC reactor (DCR) MC2 (for output circuit)
voltage
(HP)
w/ DCR w/o DCR w/ DCR w/o DCR
1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 5
5
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U
SC-05
1 FRN001E1S-2U 10 SC-05 SC-05
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U 15
10
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U 20
230V FRN005E1S-2U 20 30 SC-4-0
5
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U 30 50 SC-4-0 SC-5-1 SC-4-0
10 FRN010E1S-2U 40 75 SC-5-1 SC-N1 SC-5-1
15 FRN015E1S-2U 50 100 SC-N1 SC-N2S SC-N1
20 FRN020E1S-2U 75 125 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U
5
1 FRN001E1S-4U
5
2 FRN002E1S-4U 10
SC-05
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U 15 SC-05 SC-05
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 10 20
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 15 30
10 FRN010E1S-4U 20 40 SC-4-0
15 FRN015E1S-4U 30 50 SC-4-0 SC-4-0
SC-N1
20 FRN020E1S-4U 40 60 SC-5-1 SC-5-1
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U
5
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 5
Single- SC-05
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U 10
phase SC-05 SC-05
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U 10 15
2 FRN002E1S-7U 15 20
3 FRN003E1S-7U 20 30 SC-5-1

- The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and GFCIs to be used in the power control panel with an
internal temperature of lower than 50qC (122qF). The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient
of 0.85 as the MCCBs' and GFCIs' original rated current is specified when using them in an ambient
temperature of 40qC (104qF) or lower. Select an MCCB and/or GFCI suitable for the actual short-circuit
breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
- For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that the 600 V HIV (allowable ambient
temperature: 75qC (167qF)) wires for the power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type
for another class of wires is selected, the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter
and the MC type should be taken into account.
- Use GFCIs with overcurrent protection.
- To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB
and/or GFCI with the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or GFCI with a rating
higher than that listed.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-10
 6.3 Peripheral Equipment

Table 6.5 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of GFCIs (with overcurrent
protection) and wiring length of the inverter output circuits. Note that the sensitivity levels listed in the
table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory where
each inverter drives a single motor.

Table 6.5 Rated Current Sensitivity of Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)

Nominal
Power Wiring length and current sensitivity
applied
supply
motor 33 ft 98 ft 164 ft 328 ft 656 ft 984 ft
voltage
(HP) (10 m) (30 m) (50 m) (100 m) (200 m) (300 m)
1/8
1/4
1/2
1
Three- 2 30 mA 100 mA 200 mA
phase 3
230 V 5
7.5
10

Chap. 6
15
20
1/2
1
2

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Three- 3 30 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA
phase 5
460 V 7.5
10
15
20
1/8
1/4
Single-
1/2 30 mA 100 mA 200 mA
phase
230 V 1
2
3

- Values listed above were obtained using Fuji GFCI EG or SG series applied to the test setup.
- The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor (4 poles, 50 Hz and
230 V three-phase).
- The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 230 V class '-connection and
the neutral-point grounding for 460 V class Y-connection power lines.
- Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600 V class of
vinyl-insulated IV wires are used in a wiring through metal conduit pipes.
- Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor. If more than one motor is to be
connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the inverter
and motors.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-11
 [ 2 ] Surge killers
A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightning and noise from the power supply lines. Use
of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or
malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
The applicable model of surge killer is the FSL-323. Figure 6.3 shows its external dimensions and a
connection example. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)" for
details. These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.

Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 6.3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example

[ 3 ] Arresters
An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines. Use of an arrester
is effective in preventing electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or malfunctioning
caused by such surges and/or noise.
Applicable arrester models are the CN23232 and CN2324E. Figure 6.4 shows their external dimensions
and connection examples. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)"
for details. These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.

Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 6.4 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-12
 6.3 Peripheral Equipment

[ 4 ] Surge absorbers
A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection
of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors, miniature control relays and
timers.
Applicable surge absorber models are the S2-A-O and S1-B-O. Figure 6.5 shows their external
dimensions. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)" for details.
The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.

Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 6.5 Surge Absorber Dimensions

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-13
 6.4 Selecting Options
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options
[ 1 ] Braking resistors
A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor to heat for
consumption. Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter.
Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2 "Selecting a Braking Resistor."

[ 1.1 ] Standard model

The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat sink
of the resistor and outputs a digital ON/OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level (as an
overheating warning signal). To ensure that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input terminals
of the FRENIC-Multi, assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and
[REV]. Connect the assigned terminals to terminals [1] and [2] of the braking resistor. Upon detection of
the warning signal (preset detection level: 150qC), the inverter simultaneously transfers to Alarm mode,
displays alarm J on the LED monitor and shuts down its power output.

Figure 6.6 Braking Resistor (Standard Model) and Connection Example

Table 6.6 Braking Resistor (Standard Model)

Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Power
Resistance (100% braking torque) (each cycle is less than 100 (s))
supply Inverter type Type Q'ty
(:) Discharging Average allowable Duty cycle
voltage Braking time (s)
capability (kWs) loss (kW) (%ED)
FRNF12E1S-2U
90 0.037 37
FRNF25E1S-2U 9
DB0.75-2 100
FRNF50E1S-2U 0.044 22
FRN001E1S-2U 17 45 0.068 18
Three- FRN002E1S-2U 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-2 40
phase FRN003E1S-2U 33 30 0.077 7
230 V FRN005E1S-2U DB3.7-2 33 37 0.093
20
FRN007E1S-2U DB5.5-2 20 55 0.138
FRN010E1S-2U DB7.5-2 15 37 0.188 5
FRN015E1S-2U DB11-2 10 55 10 0.275
FRN020E1S-2U DB15-2 8.6 75 0.375
FRNF50E1S-4U 9 0.044 22
DB0.75-4 200
FRN001E1S-4U 17 45 0.068 18
1
FRN002E1S-4U 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-4 160
Three- FRN003E1S-4U 33 30 0.077 7
phase FRN005E1S-4U DB3.7-4 130 37 0.093
20
460 V FRN007E1S-4U DB5.5-4 80 55 0.138
FRN010E1S-4U DB7.5-4 60 38 0.188 5
FRN015E1S-4U DB11-4 40 55 10 0.275
FRN020E1S-4U DB15-4 34.4 75 0.375
FRNF12E1S-7U
90 0.037 37
FRNF25E1S-7U 9
Single- DB0.75-2 100
FRNF50E1S-7U 0.044 22
phase
FRN001E1S-7U 17 45 0.068 18
230 V
FRN002E1S-7U 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-2 40
FRN003E1S-7U 33 30 0.077 7

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-14
 6.4 Selecting Options

[ 1.2 ] 10%ED model




Figure 6.7 Braking Resistor (10%ED Model) and Connection Example

Table 6.7 Braking Resistor (10%ED Model)

Chap. 6
Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Power
Resistance (100% braking torque) (each cycle is less than 100 (s))
supply Inverter type Type Q'ty
(:) Discharging Braking time Average allowable Duty cycle
voltage
capability (kWs) (s) loss (kW) (%ED)
FRNF12E1S-2U 1000 100

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

FRNF25E1S-2U 500 75
DB0.75-2C 100 50 0.075
FRNF50E1S-2U 250 37
FRN001E1S-2U 133 20
Three- FRN002E1S-2U 73 14
DB2.2-2C 40 55 0.110
phase FRN003E1S-2U 50
230 V FRN005E1S-2U DB3.7-2C 33 140 75 0.185
FRN007E1S-2U DB5.5-2C 20 55 20 0.275
10
FRN010E1S-2U DB7.5-2C 15 37 0.375
FRN015E1S-2U DB11-2C 10 55 10 0.55
FRN020E1S-2U DB15-2C 8.6 75 0.75
FRNF50E1S-4U 250 37
DB0.75-4C 200 50 0.075
FRN001E1S-4U 133 20
1
FRN002E1S-4U 73 14
DB2.2-4C 160 55 0.110
Three- FRN003E1S-4U 50
phase FRN005E1S-4U DB3.7-4C 130 140 75 0.185
460 V FRN007E1S-4U DB5.5-4C 80 55 20 0.275
10
FRN010E1S-4U DB7.5-4C 60 38 0.375
FRN015E1S-4U DB11-4C 40 55 10 0.55
FRN020E1S-4U DB15-4C 34.4 75 0.75
FRNF12E1S-7U 1000 100
FRNF25E1S-7U 500 75
Single- FRNF50E1S-7U DB0.75-2C 100 50 0.075
250 37
phase
FRN001E1S-7U 133 20
230 V
FRN002E1S-7U 73 14
DB2.2-2C 40 55 0.110
FRN003E1S-7U 50 10

The 10%ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output, so an electronic
thermal overload relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the braking
resistor from overheating.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-15
 [ 1.3 ] Compact model

Figure 6.8 Braking Resistor (Compact Model) and Connection Example

Table 6.8 Braking Resistor (Compact Model)

Power
supply Item TK80W120:
voltage

Capacity (kW) 0.08

Resistor
Resistance (:) 120

FRNF50 FRN001 FRN002 FRN003 FRN005

Applicable inverter model
E1S-2U E1S-2U E1S-2U E1S-2U E1S-2U

Nominal applied motor (HP) 1/2 1 2 3 5

Three-
phase Average braking torque (%) 150 150 150 65 45
230 V
Allowable duty 15 5 5 5 5
Allowable cycle (%)
braking
Allowable 15 sec 15 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
properties continuous
braking time

Brake unit Not required

This braking resistor is not applicable to three-phase 460 V and single-phase 230 V of
inverters.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-16
 6.4 Selecting Options

[ 2 ] DC reactors (DCRs)
A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction (for reducing
harmonic components).
■ For power supply matching
- Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or
more the rated inverter capacity. In this case, the percent reactance of the power supply decreases,
and harmonic components and their peak value increase. These factors may break rectifiers or
capacitors in the converter section of inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor (which can
shorten the inverter's service life).
- Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are being
turned ON/OFF.
- Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power supply exceeds 2%.

Max. voltage (V) Min. voltage (V)

Interphase voltage unbalance (%) = × 67

Chap. 6
Three - phase average voltage (V)

■ For input power factor correction (for suppressing harmonics)

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load, however, it cannot be used in a
system that includes an inverter. Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter's power supply so as to
decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and improve the power factor of inverter.
Using a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 90% to 95%.
x At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is connected across terminals P1 and P (+) on the
terminal block. Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR.
x If a DCR is not going to be used, do not remove the jumper bar.

Figure 6.9 External View of a DC Reactor (DCR) and Connection Example

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-17
 Table 6.9 DC Reactors (DCRs)

Nominal DC reactor (DCR)

Power
applied
supply Inverter type
motor Rated current Inductance Coil resistance Generated loss
voltage Type
(HP) (A) (mH) (mȍ) (W )

1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 0.8

DCR2-0.2 1.5 20 660
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 1.6
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U DCR2-0.4 3.0 12 280 1.9
1 FRN001E1S-2U DCR2-0.75 5.0 7.0 123 2.8
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U DCR2-1.5 8.0 4.0 57.5 4.6
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U DCR2-2.2 11 3.0 43 6.7
230V FRN005E1S-2U DCR2-3.7 18 1.7 21 8.8
5
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U DCR2-5.5 25 1.2 16 14
10 FRN010E1S-2U DCR2-7.5 34 0.8 9.7 16
15 FRN015E1S-2U DCR2-11 50 0.6 7.0
27
20 FRN020E1S-2U DCR2-15 67 0.4 4.3
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U DCR4-0.4 1.5 50 970 2.0
1 FRN001E1S-4U DCR4-0.75 2.5 30 440 2.5
2 FRN002E1S-4U DCR4-1.5 4.0 16 235 4.8
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U DCR4-2.2 5.5 12 172 6.8
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U DCR4-3.7 9.0 7.0 74.5 8.1
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U DCR4-5.5 13 4.0 43 10
10 FRN010E1S-4U DCR4-7.5 18 3.5 35.5 15
15 FRN015E1S-4U DCR4-11 25 2.2 23.2 21
20 FRN020E1S-4U DCR4-15 34 1.8 18.1 28
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U DCR2-0.2 1.5 20 660 1.6
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U DCR2-0.4 3.0 12 280 1.9
Single-
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U DCR2-0.75 5.0 7.0 123 2.8
phase
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U DCR2-1.5 8.0 4.0 57.5 4.6
2 FRN002E1S-7U
DCR2-3.7 18 1.7 21 8.8
3 FRN003E1S-7U

Note 1: Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following
conditions:
- The power supply is three-phase 230 V/460 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
- The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
- The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
- An AC reactor (ACR) is not connected.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-18
 6.4 Selecting Options

[ 3 ] AC reactors (ACRs)
Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power, for example, in
DC link bus operation (shared PN operation). Generally, ACRs are used for correction of voltage
waveform and power factor or for power supply matching, but not for suppressing harmonic
components in the power lines. For suppressing harmonic components, use a DCR.
An ACR should be also used when the power supply is extremely unstable; for example, when the power
supply involves an extremely large interphase voltage unbalance.

Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.10 External View of AC Reactor (ACR) and Connection Example
Table 6.10 AC Reactor (ACR)

Nominal AC reactor (ACR)

Power
applied
supply Inverter type Reactance (mȍ/phase)
motor Rated current Generated loss
voltage Type
(HP) (A) 50 Hz 60 Hz (W )

1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 2.5

1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U ACR2-0.4A 3 917 1100 5
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U 10
1 FRN001E1S-2U ACR2-0.75A 5 493 592 12
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U ACR2-1.5A 8 295 354 14
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U ACR2-2.2A 11 213 256 16
230V FRN005E1S-2U ACR2-3.7A 17 218 153 23
5
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U ACR2-5.5A 25 87.7 105 27
10 FRN010E1S-2U ACR2-7.5A 33 65 78 30
15 FRN015E1S-2U ACR2-11A 46 45.5 54.7 37
20 FRN020E1S-2U ACR2-15A 59 34.8 41.8 43
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U 5
ACR4-0.75A 2.5 1920 2300
1 FRN001E1S-4U 10
2 FRN002E1S-4U ACR4-1.5A 3.7 1160 1390 11
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U ACR4-2.2A 5.5 851 1020 14
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U ACR4-3.7A 9 512 615 17
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U ACR4-5.5A 13 349 418 22
10 FRN010E1S-4U ACR4-7.5A 18 256 307 27
15 FRN015E1S-4U ACR4-11A 24 183 219 40
20 FRN020E1S-4U ACR4-15A 30 139 167 46
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U 5
ACR2-0.4A 3 917 1100
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 10
Single-
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U ACR2-0.75A 5 493 592 12
phase
230V 1 FRN001E1S-7U ACR2-1.5A 8 295 354 14
2 FRN002E1S-7U ACR2-2.2A 11 213 256 16
3 FRN003E1S-7U ACR2-3.7A 17 218 262 23

Note 1: Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following
conditions:
- The power supply is three-phase 230 V/460 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
- The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
- The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
6-19
 [ 4 ] Output circuit filters (OFLs)
Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to:
- Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal
This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge
currents from the 460 V class series of inverters.
- Suppress leakage current (due to higher harmonic components) from the inverter output lines
This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines. Keep the
length of the power feed line less than 1300 ft (400 m).
- Minimize radiation and/or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines
OFLs are effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications such as that used at plants.
Use an ACR within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26.
Otherwise, the filter will overheat.

Table 6.11 Output Circuit Filter (OFL)

Carrier
Nominal Inverter
Power Rated frequency - Maximum
applied Overload power
supply Inverter type Filter type current allowable frequency
motor capability input
voltage (A) range (Hz)
(HP) voltage
(kHz)
1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U OFL-0.4-2 3
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U
1 FRN001E1S-2U
OFL-1.5-2 8 150% for 1
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U Three-phase
min.
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U 200 to 240 V 8 to 15 400
OFL-3.7-2 17 200% for 0.5
230V 5 FRN005E1S-2U 50/60 Hz
sec
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U
OFL-7.5-2 33
10 FRN010E1S-2U
15 FRN015E1S-2U
OFL-15-2 59
20 FRN020E1S-2U
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U OFL-0.4-4 1.5
1 FRN001E1S-4U
OFL-1.5-4 3.7
2 FRN002E1S-4U
150% for 1
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U Three-phase
OFL-3.7-4 9 min.
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 380 to 440 V 8 to 15 400
200% for 0.5
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 50/60 Hz
OFL-7.5-4 18 sec
10 FRN010E1S-4U
15 FRN015E1S-4U
OFL-15-4 30
20 FRN020E1S-4U
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U OFL-0.4-4A 1.5
1 FRN001E1S-4U
OFL-1.5-4A 3.7
2 FRN002E1S-4U
150% for 1
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U Three-phase
OFL-3.7-4A 9 min.
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U 380 to 480 V 0.75 to 15 400
200% for 0.5
460V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 50/60 Hz
OFL-7.5-4A 18 sec
10 FRN010E1S-4U
15 FRN015E1S-4U
OFL-15-4A 30
20 FRN020E1S-4U
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U OFL-0.4-2 3 150% for 1
Single- Three-phase
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U min.
phase 380 to 480 V 8 to 15 400
1 FRN001E1S-7U 200% for 0.5
230V OFL-1.5-2 8 50/60 Hz
2 FRN002E1S-7U sec
3 FRN003E1S-7U OFL-3.7-2 17

Note 1: The OFL-***-4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-20
 6.4 Selecting Options

Figure 6.11 External View of Output Circuit Filter (OFL) and Connection Example

Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-21
 [ 5 ] Zero-phase reactor for reducing radio noise (ACL)
An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter.
An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the
power supply lines inside the inverter. Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL.
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 66 ft (20 m), insert an ACL to the power
supply lines; if it is more than 66 ft (20 m), insert it to the power output lines of the inverter.
Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size (I.D.) and installation requirements.

Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 6.12 Dimensions of Zero-phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL) and Connection Example

Table 6.12 Zero-phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL)

Zero-phase reactor Installation requirements Wire size

type Qty. Number of turns (mm2)
2.0
1 4 3.5
ACL-40B 5.5
8
2 2
14
8
1 4
14
ACL-74B
22
2 2
38
The selected wires are for use with 3-phase input/output lines (3 wires).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-22
 6.4 Selecting Options

6.4.2 Options for operation and communications

[ 1 ] External potentiometer for frequency setting
An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency. Connect the potentiometer to control
signal terminals [11] through [13] of the inverter as shown in Figure 6.13.
Model: RJ-13 (BA-2 B-characteristics, 1 k:)

Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Unit: inch (mm)

Model: WAR3W (3W B-characteristics, 1 k:)

Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 6.13 External Potentiometer Dimensions and Connection Example

6-23
 [ 2 ] Multi-function keypad
Connecting the multi-function keypad on a FRENIC-Multi series inverter with an optional remote
operation extension cable (CB-5S, CB-3S, or CB-1S) allows you to operate the inverter locally or
remotely (from the keypad in hand or mounted on a panel), respectively.
In addition, the multi-function keypad can be used for copying function code data from a FRENIC-Multi
series inverter to other ones (up to three inverters of function code data).

[ 3 ] Extension cable for remote operation

The extension cable connects the inverter with the keypad (standard or multi-function) or
USB—RS-485 converter to enable remote operation of the inverter. The cable is a straight type with
RJ-45 jacks and its length is selectable from 16, 9.3, and 3.3 ft (5, 3, and 1 m).

Table 6.13 Extension Cable Length for Remote Operation

Type Length [ft (m)]

CB-5S 16 (5)
CB-3S 9.8 (3)
CB-1S 3.3 (1)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-24
 6.4 Selecting Options

[ 4 ] RS-485 communications card

The RS-485 communications card (2-port) is exclusively designed for use with the FRENIC-Multi
series of inverters other than with the standard port of the inverter, and enables extended RS-485
communication in addition to the standard RS-485 communication (via the RJ-45 connector for
connecting the keypad.)
The main functions include the following:
- Connecting the inverter to host equipment such as a PC or PLC, which enables the inverter to be
controlled as a slave device.
- Operating the inverters by frequency command setting, forward/reverse running/stopping,
coast-to-stop and resetting, etc.
- Monitoring the operation status of the inverter, e.g., output frequency, output current and alarm
information, etc.
- Setting function code data.

Table 6.14 Transmission Specifications

Chap. 6
Item Specifications

Communication protocol SX protocol Modbus RTU

Fuji general-purpose
(for exclusive use with (Conforming to
inverter protocol

SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

FRENIC Loader) Modicon's Modbus RTU)

Electrical specifications EIA RS-485

Maximum number of units

Host: 1 unit, Inverter: 31 units
connected

Transmission rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400 bps

Synchronization system Asynchronous start-stop system

Transmission method Half-duplex

Maximum length of
1600 ft (500 m)
communication network

[ 5 ] Inverter support loader software

FRENIC Loader is support software which enables the inverter to be operated via the RS-485
communications facility. The main functions include the following:
- Easy editing of function code data
- Monitoring the operation statuses of the inverter such as I/O monitor and multi-monitor
- Operation of inverters on a PC screen (Windows-based only)

Refer to Chapter 5 "RUNNING THOUGH RS-485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)" for details.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-25
 6.4.3 Meter options
[ 1 ] Frequency meters
Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminals [FM] and [11] of the inverter to measure the
frequency component selected by function code F31. Figure 6.14 shows the dimensions of the frequency
meter and a connection example.
Model: TRM-45 (10 VDC, 1 mA)

Unit: inch (mm)

Model: FM-60 (10 VDC, 1 mA)

Unit: inch (mm)

Figure 6.14 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Connection Example

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
6-26
 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter
Model

Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Chapter 7

SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND

INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection procedure,
and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It also helps you
select braking resistors.

Contents

7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters ................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 7-7
[ 1 ] General equation ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F .................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 7-8
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia................................................................................................. 7-8
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time .......................................................................................... 7-10
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time.......................................................................................... 7-10
7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor............................................................................... 7-11
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy............................................................................................ 7-11
7.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor .................................................................................. 7-12
7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor ..................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.1 Selection procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................. 7-13

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

When selecting a general-purpose inverter, first select a motor and then inverter as follows:
(1) Key point for selecting a motor: Determine what kind of load machine is to be used, calculate its
moment of inertia, and then select the appropriate motor capacity.
(2) Key point for selecting an inverter: Taking into account the operation requirements (e.g.,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and frequency in operation) of the load machine to be driven
by the motor selected in (1) above, calculate the acceleration/deceleration/braking torque.
This section describes the selection procedure for (1) and (2) above. First, it explains the output torque
obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter (FRENIC-Multi).

7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics

Figures 7.1 and 7.2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency
individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base. The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and
output torque (%), respectively. Curves (a) through (f) depend on the running conditions.

Chap. 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
Figure 7.1 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 50 Hz)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-1
 Figure 7.2 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 60 Hz)

(1) Continuous allowable driving torque (Curve (a) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
Curve (a) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous
rated current, where the motor cooling characteristic is taken into consideration. When the motor runs at
the base frequency of 60 Hz, 100 % output torque can be obtained; at 50 Hz, the output torque is
somewhat lower than that in commercial power, and it further lowers at lower frequencies. The
reduction of the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving, and that at lower
frequencies is mainly due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventilation performance of the
motor cooling fan.

(2) Maximum driving torque in a short time (Curves (b) and (c) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
Curve (b) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter rated current in
a short time (the output torque is 150% for one minute) when torque-vector control is enabled. At that
time, the motor cooling characteristics have little effect on the output torque.
Curve (c) shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is used
to increase the short-time maximum torque. In this case, the short-time torque is 20 to 30% greater than
that when the standard capacity inverter is used.

(3) Starting torque (around the output frequency 0 Hz in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-2
 7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

(4) Braking torque (Curves (d), (e), and (f) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
In braking the motor, kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the DC link bus
capacitor (reservoir capacitor) of the inverter. Discharging this electrical energy to the braking resistor
produces a large braking torque as shown in curve (e). If no braking resistor is provided, however, only
the motor and inverter losses consume the regenerated braking energy so that the torque becomes
smaller as shown in curve (d).
When an optional braking resistor is used, the braking torque is allowable only for a short time. Its time
ratings are mainly determined by the braking resistor ratings. This manual and associated catalogs list
the allowable values (kW) obtained from the average discharging loss and allowable values (kWs)
obtained from the discharging capability that can be discharged at one time.
Note that the torque % value varies according to the inverter capacity.
Selecting an optimal brake unit enables a braking torque value to be selected comparatively freely in the
range below the short-time maximum torque in the driving mode, as shown in curve (f).
For braking-related values when the inverter and braking resistor are normally combined, refer to
Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors."

Chap. 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-3
7.1.2 Selection procedure
Figure 7.3 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters. Items numbered (1) through (5)
are described on the following pages.
You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration times.
If "there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time" or "acceleration and deceleration are
frequent," then the selection procedure is more complex.

Figure 7.3 Selection Procedure

7-4
 7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

(1) Calculating the load torque during constant speed running (For detailed calculation, refer
to Section 7.1.3.1)
It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads.
First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a
tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running
becomes higher than the load torque. To perform capacity selection efficiently, it is necessary to
match the rated speeds (base speeds) of the motor and load. To do this, select an appropriate
reduction-gear (mechanical transmission) ratio and the number of motor poles.
If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted, the tentative capacity can apply as a
defined capacity.
(2) Calculating the acceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.2)
When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time, calculate it according to the
following procedure:
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Calculate the moment of inertia for the load, referring to Section 7.1.3.2, "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation." For the motor, refer to the related motor catalogs.㩷
2)㩷 Calculate the minimum acceleration torque (See Figure 7.4)㩷
The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short-time output torque (base

Chap. 7
frequency: 60 Hz) explained in Section 7.1.1 (2), "Maximum driving torque in a short time"
and the load torque (WL / KG) during constant speed running calculated in the above (1).
Calculate the minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed.㩷
3) Calculate the acceleration time

SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Assign the value calculated above to the equation (7.10) in Section 7.1.3.2, "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation" to calculate the acceleration time. If the calculated acceleration
time is longer than the expected time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger
capacity and calculate it again.

Figure 7.4 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-5
 (3) Deceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.2)
To calculate the deceleration time, check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the
whole range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time.
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Same as for the acceleration time.
2)㩷 Calculate the minimum deceleration torque (See Figures 7.5 and 7.6.)㩷
Same as for the deceleration time.
3) Calculate the deceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (7.11) to calculate the deceleration time in
the same way as for the acceleration time. If the calculated deceleration time is longer than the
requested time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it
again.

Figure 7.5 Example Study of Minimum Figure 7.6 Example Study of Minimum
Deceleration Torque (1) Deceleration Torque (2)

(4) Braking resistor rating (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.3)
Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle.
1) When the periodic duty cycle is shorter than 100 sec:
Calculate the average loss to determine rated values.㩷
2) When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or longer:
The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking capacity. The
allowable values are listed in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors."

(5) Motor RMS current (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.4)
In metal processing machine and materials handling machines requiring positioning control, highly
frequent running for a short time is repeated. In this case, calculate the maximum equivalent RMS
current value (effective value of current) not to exceed the allowable value (rated current) for the
motor.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-6
 7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

7.1.3 Equations for selections

7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running
[ 1 ] General equation
The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated. Calculation for driving a
load along a straight line with the motor is shown below.
Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed X(m/s) is F (N) and the motor speed for
driving this is NM (r/min), the required motor output torque WM (N·m) is as follows:

60 x X F
WM x ( N x m) (7.1)
2 S x NM KG

where, KG is Reduction-gear efficiency.

When the inverter brakes the motor, efficiency works inversely, so the required motor torque should be
calculated as follows:

60 x X

Chap. 7
WM x Fx K ( N x m) (7.2)
G
2 S x NM

(60·X) / (2S·NM) in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed

SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

X(m/s)around the motor shaft.
The value F (N) in the above equations depends on the load type.

[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F

Moving a load horizontally
A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 7.7. If the mass of the carrier table
is W0 (kg), the load is W (kg), and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is P, then the friction force F
(N) is expressed as follows, which is equal to a required force for driving the load:

F ( W0  W) x g x P ( N) (7.3)

where, g is the gravity acceleration (| 9.8 (m/s2)).

Then, the driving torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows:
60 x X ( W0  W) x g x P
WM x ( N x m) (7.4)
2 S x NM KG

Figure 7.7 Moving a Load Horizontally

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-7
 7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation
When an object whose moment of inertia is J (kg·m2) rotates at the speed N (r/min), it has the following
kinetic energy:

J 2S x N 2
E x( ) (J ) (7.5)
2 60
To accelerate the above rotational object, the kinetic energy will be increased; to decelerate the object,
the kinetic energy must be discharged. The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be
expressed as follows:

2S dN
W Jx ( ) ( N x m) (7.6)
60 dt
This way, the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and deceleration.
First, calculation method of moment of inertia is described, then those for acceleration and deceleration
time are explained.

[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia

For an object that rotates around the shaft, virtually divide the object into small segments and square the
distance from the shaft to each segment. Then, sum the squares of the distances and the masses of the
segments to calculate the moment of inertia.㩷

2
J ¦ ( Wi x ri 2 ) (kg x m ) (7.7)

The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load
systems.

(1) Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder

The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder. The moment of inertia J (kg˜m2) around the
hollow cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows, where the outer and inner diameters are D1 and
D2 [m] and total mass is W [kg] in Figure 7.8.

W x (D12  D2 2 )
J (kg x m 2 ) (7.8)
8
For a similar shape, a solid cylinder, calculate the moment of inertia as D2 is 0.

Figure 7.8 Hollow Cylinder

(2) For a general rotating body

Table 7.1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the
above cylindrical rotating body.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-8
 7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

Table 7.1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies

Mass: W (kg) Mass: W (kg)

Shape Shape
Moment of inertia: Moment of inertia:
J (kg·m2) J (kg·m2)

Hollow cylinder S 2 2
W x (D1  D 2 ) x L x U W A xBxLxU
4

1 2 2
J x W x (D1  D 2 )
8 1 2 2
Ja x W x (L  A )
12
Sphere S 3 1 2 1 2
W xD xU Jb x W x (L  xA )
6 12 4
1 2
J c | W x (L0 2  L0 x L xL )
1 3
2
J xWx D
10

Cone S 2 S 2
W xD xLxU W xD xLxU
12 4

Chap. 7
3 2
J xWxD
40 1 2 3 2
Ja x W x (L  xD )
12 4

SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

W A xBxLxU 1 2 3 2
Rectangular prism Jb x W x (L  xD )
3 16
1
Jc | W x (L02  L0 x L x L2 )
1 2 2 3
J x W x (A  B )
12

Square cone (Pyramid, 1 1

W xA xBxLxU W xA xBxLxU
rectangular base) 3 3

1 2 2 1 2 1 2
J x W x (A  B ) Jb x W x (L  xA )
20 10 4
3 3
Jc | Wx (L02  x L0 x L x L2 )
2 5
Triangular prism 3 2
W xA xLxU
4

1 2 S 2
J xW xA W xD xLxU
3 12

Tetrahedron with an 3 2
W xA xLxU
equilateral triangular 12
1 2 3 2
base Jb x W x (L  xD )
10 8
1 3 3
J xW xA
2 Jc | Wx (L02  x L0 x L  x L2 )
5 2 5

Main metal density (at 20qC) U(kg/m3) Iron: 7860, Copper: 8940, Aluminum: 2700

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-9
 (3) For a load running horizontally
Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 7.7. If the table speed is X (m/s) when the
motor speed is NM (r/min), then an equivalent distance from the shaft is equal to 60·X / (2S·NM) (m). The
moment of inertia of the table and load to the shaft is calculated as follows:

60 x X 2
J ( ) x ( W0  W) (kg x m 2 ) (7.9)
2 S x NM

[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time

Figure 7.9 shows a general load model. Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction-gear with
efficiency KG. The time required to accelerate this load in stop state to a speed of NM (r/min) is calculated
with the following equation:

J1  J2 KG 2S x ( NM  0)
t ACC x (s) (7.10)
WM  WL KG 60

where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
WM: Minimum motor output torque in driving motor (N·m)
WL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
KG: Reduction-gear efficiency.
As clarified in the above equation, the equivalent moment of inertia becomes (J1+J2/KG) by considering
the reduction-gear efficiency.

Figure 7.9 Load Model Including Reduction-gear

[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time

In a load system shown in Figure 7.9, the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of NM (r/min)
is calculated with the following equation:

J1  J 2 x KG 2S x (0  N M )
t DEC x (s) (7.11)
WM  WL x K G
60

where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
WM: Minimum motor output torque in braking (or decelerating) motor (N·m)
WL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
KG: Reduction-gear efficiency
In the above equation, generally output torque WM is negative and load torque WL is positive. So,
deceleration time becomes shorter.
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-10
 7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters

7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor

If the inverter brakes the motor, the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to
be regenerated into the inverter circuit. This regenerative energy is often consumed in so-called braking
resistors as heat. The following explains the braking resistor rating.

[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy

In the inverter operation, one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated at
the time an object is moved by an inertial force.

Kinetic energy of a moving object

When an object with moment of inertia J (kg·m2) rotates at a speed N2 (r/min), its kinetic energy is as
follows:

J 2S x N 2 2
E x( ) (J ) (7.12)
2 60

1 2
| x J x N2 (J) (7.12)'
182.4

Chap. 7
When this object is decelerated to a speed N1 (r/min), the output energy is as follows:

J ª§ 2S x N 2 ·2 § 2S x N1 ·2 º
E «¨ ¸ ¨ ¸ » (J) (7.13)

SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

x
2 «¬© 60 ¹ © 60 ¹ »¼

1 2 2
| x J x ( N2  N1 ) ( J ) (7.13)'
182.4

The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 7.9 is calculated from the reduction-gear
efficiency KG and motor efficiency WM as follows:

E| 1
182.4
x  J1  J 2 x KG  x KM x  N2 2  N1 2  (J ) (7.14)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-11
 7.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor
In case of the load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor, the motor current fluctuates
largely and enters the short-time rating range of the motor repeatedly. Therefore, you have to review the
allowable thermal rating of the motor. The heat value is assumed to be approximately proportional to the square
of the motor current.
If an inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the motor,
calculate the "equivalent RMS current" as mentioned below, and select the motor so that this RMS current will
not exceed the rated current of the motor.

Figure 7.10 Sample of the Repetitive Operation㩷

First, calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern. Then using the torque-current
curve of the motor, convert the torque to the motor current. The "equivalent RMS current, Ieq" can be
finally calculated by the following equation:

I1 2 • t1 + I2 2 • t 2 + I3 2 • t 3 + I4 2 • t 4 + I5 2 • t 5
Ieq = (A) (7.15)
t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 + t 5 + t 6

The torque-current curve for the dedicated motor is not available for actual calculation. Therefore,
calculate the motor current I from the load torque W1 using the following equation (7.16). Then, calculate
the equivalent current Ieq:

2
§ IJ1 ·
I ¨ u It100 2 ¸  Im1002 (A) (7.16)
© 100 ¹

Where, W1 is the load torque (%), It100 is the torque current, and Im100 is exciting current.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-12
 7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor

7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor

7.2.1 Selection procedure
The following three requirements must be satisfied simultaneously:
1) The maximum braking torque should not exceed values listed in Tables 6.6 to 6.8 in Chapter 6,
Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors." To use the maximum braking torque exceeding values in those
tables, select the braking resistor having one class larger capacity.
2) The discharge energy for a single braking action should not exceed the discharging capability (kWs)
listed in Tables 6.6 to 6.8 in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors." For detailed calculation,
refer to Section 7.1.3.3 "Heat energy calculation of braking resistor."
3) The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic period must not
exceed the average loss (kW) listed in Tables 6.6 to 6.8 in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking
resistors."

7.2.2 Notes on selection

The braking time T1, cyclic period T0, and duty cycle %ED are converted under deceleration braking

Chap. 7
conditions based on the rated torque as shown below. However, you do not need to consider these values
when selecting the braking resistor capacity.

SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Figure 7.11 Duty Cycle

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
7-13
 Part 5 Specifications

Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Chapter 8
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, and terminal functions for the
FRENIC-Multi series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment,
external dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.

Contents

8.1 Standard Models ......................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Three-phase 230 V .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 460 V .............................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Single-phase 230 V ............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2 Common Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Terminal Specifications............................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.1 Terminal functions .............................................................................................................................. 8-8
8.3.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications.................................................................. 8-19
8.3.2.1 Main circuit terminals ............................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.2.2 Control circuit terminals............................................................................................................ 8-20
8.4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment ................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2.1 Temporary storage..................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2.2 Long-term storage ..................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5 External Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 8-23
8.5.1 Standard models ................................................................................................................................ 8-23
8.5.2 Standard keypad ................................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.6 Connection Diagrams................................................................................................................................ 8-27
8.6.1 Running the inverter with keypad ..................................................................................................... 8-27
8.6.2 Running the inverter by terminal commands .................................................................................... 8-28
8.7 Protective Functions.................................................................................................................................. 8-30

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 8.1 Standard Models

8.1 Standard Models

8.1.1 Three-phase 230 V

Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motor
*2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 230 V.
*3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
*4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above (F26)
and the inverter continuously runs at 100% load.
*5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA (or 10 times
the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and %X is 5%.
*6 Obtained when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF. (It varies with the efficiency of
the motor.)
*8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as option)
*9 Max voltag e (V) - Min voltag e (V)
Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3)
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-1
 8.1.2 Three-phase 460 V

*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motor

*2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 460 V.
*3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
*4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above (F26)
and the inverter continuously runs at 100% load.
*5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA (or 10 times
the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and %X is 5%.
*6 Obtained when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF. (It varies with the efficiency of
the motor.)
*8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as option)
*9 Max voltag e (V) - Min voltag e (V)
Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3)
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-2
 8.1 Standard Models

8.1.3 Single-phase 230 V

Chap. 8
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motor
*2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 230 V.
*3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.

SPECIFICATIONS
*4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above (F26)
and the inverter continuously runs at 100% load.
*5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA (or 10 times
the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and %X is 5%.
*6 Obtained when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF. (It varies with the efficiency of
the motor.)
*8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as option)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-3
 8.2 Common Specifications
Item Explanation Remarks
Maximum
25 to 400 Hz
frequency
Base frequency 25 to 400 Hz
Setting range

Starting
0.1 to 60.0 Hz, Duration: 0.0 to 10.0 s
frequency
Carrier frequency • 0.75 to 15 kHz
Note: When the carrier frequency is set at 6 kHz or above, it may automatically drop
Output frequency

depending upon the ambient temperature or output current to protect the inverter.
(Automatic carrier frequency reduction/stop function available)
• Carrier frequency modulation with spread spectrum for noise reduction
Accuracy (Stability) • Analog setting: r0.2% of maximum frequency (at 25 r10 qC (77 r50 qF))
• Digital setting: r0.01% of maximum frequency (at -10 to +50 qC (14 to 122 qF))
Setting resolution • Analog setting: 1/3000 of maximum frequency (ex. 0.02 Hz at 60 Hz, 0.04 Hz at 120
Hz)
• Digital setting: 0.01 Hz (99.99 Hz or less), 0.1 Hz (100.0 Hz or more)
• Link setting: Selectable from 2 types
- 1/20000 of maximum frequency (ex. 0.003 Hz at 60 Hz, 0.006 Hz at 120 Hz)
- 0.01 Hz (fixed)
Control method • V/f control
• Dynamic torque-vector control
• V/f control (with sensor, when the optional pulse generator (PG) interface card is
installed)
V/f characteristic Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output
frequency (+80 to +240 V).
230 V The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF.
Non-linear V/f setting (2 points):
Desired voltage (0 to +240 V) and frequency (0 to 400 Hz) can be set.
Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output
frequency (+160 to +500 V).
460 V The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF.
Non-linear V/f setting (2 points):
Control

Desired voltage (0 to +500 V) and frequency (0 to 400 Hz) can be set.

Torque boost • Auto torque boost (for constant torque load)
• Manual torque boost: Desired torque boost (0.0 to 20.0%) can be set.
• Select application load with the function code F37/A13. (Variable torque load or
constant torque load)
Starting torque 200% or over (Reference frequency: 0.5 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque
boost)
Start/stop operation Keypad: Start and stop with and keys (standard keypad)
Start and stop with , , and keys (optional multi-function keypad)
External signals (digital inputs):
Forward (Reverse) rotation, stop command (capable of 3-wire operation), coast-to-stop
command, external alarm, alarm reset, etc.
Link operation: Operation through RS-485 or field bus (option) communications
Switching operation command: Link switching

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-4
 8.2 Common Specifications

Item Explanation Remarks

Frequency command Keypad: and keys (with data protection function)
Analog input: Analog input can be set with external voltage/current input
• 0 to r 10 VDC/0 to r 100% (terminals [12], [C1] (V2 function))
• +4 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100% (terminal [C1])
Note: Terminal [C1] can be switched to input 0 to 10 VDC/0 to 100% (V2 function).
Multi-frequency: Selectable from 16 different of frequencies (0 to 15)
UP/DOWN operation:
Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital input signal is ON.
Link operation:
Frequency can be specified via the RS-485 or field bus communications port (option).
Frequency switching:
Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external signal (digital input).
Changeover between frequency setting and multi-frequency setting via communication
is available.
Auxiliary frequency setting:
Inputs at terminal [12] or [C1] (C1/V2 function) can be added to the main setting as
auxiliary frequency settings.
Inverse operation:
Normal/inverse operation can be set or switched with digital input signal and function
code setting.
• +10 to 0 VDC/0 to 100% at terminal [12] and [C1] (V2 function)
• +20 to +4 mA DC/0 to 100% at terminal [C1] (C1 function)

Chap. 8
Pulse train input:
Max. 30 kHz/Maximum output frequency (when the optional PG interface card is
installed.)
Acceleration/ • 0.00 to 3600 s variable setting
deceleration time

SPECIFICATIONS
• Acceleration and deceleration time can be independently set with 2 types and selected
Control

with digital input signal (1 point).

• Acceleration and deceleration pattern can be selected from 4 types:
Linear, S-curve (weak), S-curve (strong), Curvilinear (constant output maximum
capacity)
• Shutoff of the run command lets the motor coast to a stop.
• Deceleration time exclusively applied to the "force to stop" command STOP can be
specified (setting range: 0.00 to 3600 s). This setting automatically cancels the
S-curve setting.
• Acceleration/deceleration time during jogging operation can be set. (Setting range:
0.00 to 3600 s)
Frequency limiter Specifies the high and low limits in Hz. (Setting range: 0 to 400 Hz)
(Upper limit and lower
limit frequencies)
Bias Bias of reference frequency and PID command can be independently set (setting range:
0 to r100%).
Gain Analog input gain can be set between 0 and 200%.

Jump frequency Three operation points and their common jump width (0 to 30.0 Hz) can be set.

Timer operation The inverter operates and stops for the time set with the keypad (1-cycle operation).

Jogging operation key (standard keypad), / keys (optional multi-function keypad), or digital
input signals
The acceleration and deceleration times dedicated for jogging can be set and they are
common.
Auto-restart after • Restarts the inverter without stopping the motor after momentary power failure.
momentary power • Restart at 0 Hz, restart from the frequency used before momentary power failure can
failure be selected.
• Motor speed at restart can be searched and restarted.
Hardware current Limits the current by hardware to prevent an overcurrent trip from being caused by fast
limiter load variation or momentary power failure, which cannot be covered by the software
current limiter. This limiter can be canceled.
8-5
 Item Explanation Remarks
Slip compensation • Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load, enabling stable operation.
• Time constant can be changed. Possible to enable or disable slip compensation during
acceleration/deceleration or in constant output range.
Droop control Decrease the speed according to the load torque.
• Controls the output torque lower than the set limit value.
Torque limiter • Can be switched to the second torque limit with digital input signal.
• Soft start (filter function) is available when switching the torque control to 1/2.
Software current
Keeps the current under the preset value during operation by software.
limiter
Detects torque or current. If the detected value exceeds the preset one, this function stops
Overload stop the motor in any of the following modes--"decelerate to stop," "coast to a stop" and "hit
mechanical stop" according to the function code J65 data.
PID control PID process control and PID dancer control are available.
• Process command: Keypad, analog input (terminals [12] and [C1]) and RS-485
communications
• Feedback value: Analog input (terminals [12] and [C1])
• Alarm output (absolute value alarm, deviation alarm)
• Normal operation/inverse operation • Anti-reset windup function
• PID output limiter • Integration reset/hold
Speed control (slip compensation, A phase and B phase/B phase)
(When the optional PG interface card is installed.)
Auto search for idling The inverter automatically searches the idling motor speed to be harmonized and starts to
motor speed drive it without stopping it.
Automatic When the torque calculation value exceeds the limit level set for the inverter during
deceleration deceleration, the output frequency is automatically controlled and the deceleration time
Control

automatically extends to avoid an W trip.

Deceleration The motor loss increases during deceleration to reduce the load energy regenerating at
characteristic the inverter to avoid an W trip upon mode selection.
(improving braking
ability)
Auto energy saving The output voltage is controlled to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and inverter
operation loss at a constant speed.
Overload prevention The output frequency is automatically reduced to suppress the overload protection trip of
Control inverter caused by an increase in the ambient temperature, operation frequency, motor
load or the like.
Auto-tuning Automatically tunes the motor for r1, Xı, excitation current, and slip frequency (r2).
Cooling fan ON/OFF Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the temperature is low.
control
• One inverter can be used to control two motors by switching (switching is not
Secondary motor available while a motor is running). Base frequency, rated current, torque boost,
setting electronic thermal, and slip compensation can be set as data for the secondary motor.
• The second motor constants can be set in the inverter. (Auto-tuning possible)
The presence of digital signal in a device externally connected to the set terminal can be
Universal DI
sent to the master controller.
Universal AO The output from the master controller can be output from the terminal [FM].
The motor speed can be detected with the pulse encoder and speed can be controlled.
Speed control
(When the optional PG interface card is installed.)
Only one program can be executed by setting the number of pulses to the stop position
Positioning control and deceleration point.
(When the optional PG interface card is installed.)
Rotation direction
Select either of reverse or forward rotation prevention.
control

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-6
 8.2 Common Specifications

Item Explanations Remarks

Running/stopping Speed monitor, output current (A), output voltage (V), torque calculation value, input
power (kW), PID command, PID feedback amount, PID output, load factor, motor
output, period for timer operation (s)
Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following:
• Reference frequency (Hz)
• Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation) (Hz)
• Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation) (Hz)
• Motor speed (set value) (r/min) • Motor speed (r/min)
• Load shaft speed (set value) (r/min) • Load shaft speed (r/min)
• Line speed (set value) (m/min) • Line speed (m/min)
• Constant feeding rate time (set value) (min)
• Constant feeding rate time (running) (min)
Life early warning The life early warning of the main circuit capacitors, capacitors on the PC boards and
the cooling fan can be displayed.
An external output is issued in a transistor output signal.
Cumulative run time Shows the cumulative running hours of the motor and inverter.
I/O check Displays the input/output signal status of the inverter.
Power monitor Displays input power (momentary), accumulated power, electricity cost (accumulated
Indication

power x displayed coefficient).

Trip error code Displays the cause of trip by codes. • N Motor 1 overload
• E Overcurrent during acceleration • N Motor 2 overload

Chap. 8
• E Overcurrent during deceleration • NW Inverter overload
• E Overcurrent at constant speed • GT Memory error
• NKP Input phase loss • GT Keypad communication error

SPECIFICATIONS
• NW Undervoltage • GT CPU error
• RN Output phase loss • GT Optional communication error
• W Overvoltage during acceleration • GT Option error
• W Overvoltage during deceleration • GT Operation error
• W Overvoltage at constant speed • GT Tuning error
• J Overheating of the heat sink • GT RS-485 communication error
• J External alarm • GTH Data save error due to
• J Inverter overheat undervoltage

• J Motor protection • GTR RS-485 communication error

(PTC thermistor) (option)

• FDJ Overheating of braking resistor • GTJ Hardware error

• RI PG disconnection • GTT Mock alarm

Running or trip mode Trip history: Saves and displays the last 4 trip factors and their detailed description.
Environment Protection

Refer to Section 8.7 "Protective Functions."

Refer to Section 8.4 "Operating Environment and Storage Environment."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-7
 8.3 Terminal Specifications
8.3.1 Terminal functions
Main circuit and analog input terminals
Classifi-
cation

Symbol Name Functions

L1/R, L2/S, Main circuit Connect the three-phase input power lines, or single-phase input
L3/T or power inputs power lines.
L1/L, L2/N
U, V, W Inverter outputs Connect a three-phase motor.
P1, P(+) DC reactor Connect a DC reactor (DCR) for correcting power factor.
Main circuit

connection
P(+), DB Braking resistor Connect the braking resistor (option).
P(+), N(-) DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter(s). An optional regenerative
converter is also connectable to these terminals.

G Grounding for Grounding terminals for the inverter’s chassis (or case) and motor.
inverter and Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the
motor motor. Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function
equivalently.
[13] Power supply Power supply (+10 VDC) for frequency command potentiometer
for the (Potentiometer: 1 to 5k:)
potentiometer The potentiometer of 1/2 W rating or more should be connected.
[12] Analog setting (1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog
voltage input input voltage.
• 0 to r10 VDC/0 to r100% (Normal operation)
• r10 to 0 VDC/0 to r100% (Inverse operation)
(2) Inputs setting signal (PID command value) or feedback signal.
Analog input

(3) Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency

settings.
• Input impedance: 22k:
• The maximum input is r15 VDC, however, the current
larger than r10 VDC is handled as r10 VDC.
Note: Inputting a bipolar analog voltage (0 to r10 VDC) to terminal
[12] requires setting function code C35 to "0."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-8
 8.3 Terminal Specifications

Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[C1] Analog setting (1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog
current input input current.
(C1 function) • 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 100% (Normal operation)
• 20 to 4 mA DC/0 to 100 % (Inverse operation)
(2) Inputs setting signal (PID process command value) or feedback
signal.
(3) Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency
settings.
• Input impedance: 250:
• Maximum input is +30 mA DC, however, the current larger
than +20 mA DC is handled as +20 mA DC.

Analog setting (1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog
voltage input input voltage.
(V2 function) • 0 to +10 VDC/0 to +100 % (Normal operation)
• +10 to 0 VDC/0 to +100 % (Inverse operation)
(2) Inputs setting signal (PID process command value) or feedback
signal.
(3) Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency

Chap. 8
settings.
• Input impedance: 22 k:
Analog input

• Maximum input is +15 VDC, however, the voltage larger

than +10 VDC is handled as +10 VDC.

SPECIFICATIONS
PTC thermistor (1) Connects PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor
input for motor protection. The figure shown below illustrates the
(PTC function) internal circuit diagram. To use the PTC thermistor, you must
change data of the function code H26.

Figure 8.1 Internal Circuit Diagram

The C1 function, V2 function, or PTC function can be assigned to terminal [C1].

Doing so requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the
related function code. For details, refer to "Setting up the slide switches" on page 8-17.
[11] Analog common Common for analog input/output signals ([13], [12], [C1], and
[FM])
Isolated from terminals [CM]s and [CMY].

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-9
 Classifi-
Related

cation
Symbol Name Functions function
codes
- Since low level analog signals are handled, these signals are especially susceptible
to the external noise effects. Route the wiring as short as possible (within 66 ft (20
m)) and use shielded wires. In principle, ground the shielded sheath of wires; if
effects of external inductive noises are considerable, connection to terminal [11]
may be effective. As shown in Figure 8.2, ground the single end of the shield to
enhance the shield effect.
- Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control
circuit. Do not connect the relay's contact to terminal [11].
- When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal,
a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter. If this
happens, according to the circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or
an equivalent) to the device outputting the analog signal and/or connect a
Analog input

capacitor having the good cut-off characteristics for high frequency between
control signal wires as shown in Figure 8.3.
- Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1] when you assign
the terminal [C1] to C1 function. Doing so could damage the internal control
circuit.

Figure 8.2 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 8.3 Example of Electric Noise Reduction

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-10
 8.3 Terminal Specifications

Digital Input Terminals

Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[X1] Digital input 1 (1) Various signals such as coast-to-stop, alarm from external
equipment, and multi-frequency commands can be assigned
[X2] Digital input 2 to terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] by setting
function codes E01 to E05, E98, and E99. For details, refer to
[X3] Digital input 3 Chapter 9, Section 9.2 "Overview of Function Codes."
[X4] Digital input 4 (2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the
internal slide switch. (Refer to "Setting up the slide switches"
[X5] Digital input 5 on page 8-17.)
(3) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals
[FWD] Run forward [X1] to [X5], [FWD], or [REV]. If the logic value for ON of
command the terminal [X1] is 1 in the normal logic system, for example,
[REV] Run reverse OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa.
command (4) The negative logic system never applies to the terminals
assigned for FWD and REV.
(Digital input circuit specifications)

Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Digital input

Figure 8.4 Digital Input Circuit


Item Min. Max.
Operation ON level 0V 2V
voltage
(SINK) OFF level 22 V 27 V
Operation ON level 22 V 27 V
voltage
(SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
Operation current at ON 2.5 mA 5 mA
(Input voltage is at 0 V)
Allowable leakage - 0.5 mA
current at OFF
[PLC] PLC signal Connects to PLC output signal power supply.
power (Rated voltage: +24 VDC (Maximum 50 mA DC): Allowable
range: +22 to +27 VDC)
This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to
the transistor output terminals [Y1] and [Y2]. Refer to "Analog
output, pulse output, transistor output, and relay output terminals"
in this Section for more.
[CM] Digital input Two common terminals for digital input signals
common
These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals [11]s
and [CMY].

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-11
Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions

„ Using a relay contact to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV]
ON or OFF
Figure 8.5 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control
signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit
(a), the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b) it has been
turned to SOURCE.
Note: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay.
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW)

(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 8.5 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact

„ Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4],
Digital input

[X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF

Figure 8.6 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller
(PLC) to turn control signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV]
ON or OFF. In circuit (a), the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK, whereas in
circuit (b) it has been turned to SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit
in the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal [X1],
[X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV]. When using this type of circuit, observe
the following:
- Connect the + node of the external power source (which should be isolated from
the PLC's power) to terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
- Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.

(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 8.6 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC

For details about the slide switch setting, refer to "Setting up the slide switches" on page
8-17.)

8-12
 8.3 Terminal Specifications

Analog output, pulse output, transistor output, and relay output terminals

Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[FM] Analog monitor The monitor signal for analog DC voltage (0 to +10 V) is output.
(FMA function) You can select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the
interface PCB, and change the data of the function code F29.
You can also select the signal functions following with function
code F31.
• Output frequency 1 (Before slip compensation)
• Output frequency 2 (After slip compensation)
• Output current • Output voltage
Analog output

• Output torque • Load factor

• Input power • PID feedback amount (PV)
• PG feedback value • DC link bus voltage
• Universal AO • Motor output
• Calibration • PID command (SV)
• PID output (MV)
* Input impedance of external device:
Min. 5k: (0 to +10 VDC output)
* While the terminal is outputting 0 to +10 VDC, it is capable
to drive up to two meters with 10k: impedance.
(Adjustable range of the gain: 0 to 300%)

Chap. 8
Pulse monitor Pulse signal is output. You can select FMP function with the
(FMP function) slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB, and change the data of

SPECIFICATIONS
the function code F29.
You can also select the signal functions following with function
code F31.
* Input impedance of the external device:
Min. 5k:
* Pulse duty: Approx. 50%
Pulse rate: 25 to 6000 p/s
Voltage waveform
• Pulse output waveform
Pulse output

• FM output circuit

[11] Analog common Two common terminals for analog input and output signal
terminals
These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals [CM]s
and [CMY].
8-13
 Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions

[Y1] Transistor (1) Various signals such as inverter running, speed/freq. arrival
output 1 and overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals,
[Y1] and [Y2] by setting function code E20 and E21. Refer to
[Y2] Transistor Chapter 9, Section 9.2 "Overview of Function Codes" for
output 2 details.
(2) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals
between [Y1], [Y2], and [CMY]. If the logic value for ON
between [Y1], [Y2], and [CMY] is 1 in the normal logic
system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system
and vice versa.

(Transistor output circuit specifications)

Transistor output

Figure 8.7 Transistor Output Circuit

Item Max.

Operation ON level 3V
voltage OFF level 27 V
Maximum motor current
50 mA
at ON
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Figure 8.8 shows examples of connection between the control
circuit and a PLC.
• When a transistor output drives a control relay,
connect a surge-absorbing diode across relay’s coil
terminals.
• When any equipment or device connected to the
transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power,
feed the power (+24 VDC: allowable range: +22 to
+27 VDC, 50 mA max.) through the [PLC] terminal.
Short-circuit between the terminals [CMY] and [CM]
in this case.
[CMY] Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals
output common
This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals, [CM]s and
[11]s.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-14
 8.3 Terminal Specifications

Classifi-
Related

cation
Symbol Name Functions function
codes
„ Connecting Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) to Terminal [Y1] or [Y2]
Figure 8.8 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of
the inverter’s control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC
serves as a SINK for the control circuit output, whereas in example (b), it serves as a
SOURCE for the output.
Transistor output

(a) PLC serving as SINK (b) PLC serving as SOURCE

Figure 8.8 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit

[30A/B/C] Alarm relay (1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a protective function
output has been activated to stop the motor.
(for any error) Contact rating:

Chap. 8
250 VAC, 0.3A, cos I = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A
Relay output

(2) Any one of output signals assigned to terminals [Y1] and [Y2]
can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal
output.

SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to
the following two contact output modes: "Between terminals
[30A] and [30C] is closed (excited) for ON signal output
(Active ON)" or "Between terminals [30A] and [30C] is open
(non-excited) for ON signal output (Active OFF)."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-15
 RS-485 communications port

Classifi-
cation
Connector Name Functions

RJ-45 Standard RJ-45 (1) Used to connect the inverter with the keypad. The inverter
connector connector supplies the power to the keypad through the pins specified
for the below. The extension cable for remote operation also uses
keypad wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power.
(2) Remove the keypad from the standard RJ-45 connector, and
connect the RS-485 communications cable to control the
inverter through the PC or PLC (Programmable Logic
Controller). Refer to "Setting up the slide switches" on page
8-17 for setting of the terminating resistor.
Communication

Figure 8.9 RJ-45 Connector and its Pin Assignment*

* Pins 1, 2, 7, and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the standard keypad
and multi-function keypad, so do not use those pins for any other equipment.

• Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit
as possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
• Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the
main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
• The RJ-45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC-Multi series is different from that on
the FVR-E11S series. Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR-E11S series of inverter.
Doing so could damage the internal control circuit.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-16
 8.3 Terminal Specifications

Setting up the slide switches

Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize the
operation mode of the analog output terminals, digital I/O terminals, and communications ports. The
locations of those switches are shown in Figure 8.10.
To access the slide switches, remove the terminal cover and keypad.

For details on how to remove the terminal cover, refer to the FRENIC-Multi Instruction Manual,
Chapter 2, Section 2.3.1, "Removing the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover"
and Chapter 1, Section 1.2, "External View and Terminal Blocks," Figure 1.4.
Table 8.1 lists the function of each slide switch.
Table 8.1 Function of Each Slide Switch

Slide Switch Function

SW1 Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE.
ƒ To make the digital input terminal [X1] to [X5], [FWD] or [REV] serve as a current
sink, turn SW1 to the SINK position. To make them serve as a current source, turn
SW1 to the SOURCE position.
Factory default: SINK
SW3 Switches the terminating resistor of RS-485 communications port on the inverter on
and off.
ƒ To connect a keypad to the inverter, turn SW3 to OFF. (Factory default)
ƒ If the inverter is connected to the RS-485 communications network as a terminating

Chap. 8
device, turn SW3 to ON.
SW6 Switches the output mode of the output terminal [FM] between analog voltage and
pulse output.
When changing this switch setting, also change the data of function code F29.

SPECIFICATIONS
SW6 Data for F29
Analog voltage output FMA 0
(Factory default)
Pulse output FMP 2

SW7 Switches property of the input terminal [C1] for C1, V2, or PTC.
SW8 When changing this switch setting, also change the data of function code E59 and H26.
Data Data
SW7 SW8
for E59 for H26
Analog frequency setting in current
C1 OFF 0 0
(Factory default)
Analog frequency setting in voltage V2 OFF 1 0
PTC thermistor input C1 ON 0 1

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-17
 Figure 8.10 shows the location of slide switches for the input/output terminal configuration.


Switching example
SW3
OFF ON

Factory
default

SW6 SW1
SW7 SW8
FMA C1 OFF SINK
Factory
default

FMP V2 ON SOURCE
-

Figure 8.10 Location of the Slide Switches

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-18
 8.3 Terminal Specifications

8.3.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications

8.3.2.1 Main circuit terminals
The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes, tightening torque and terminal arrangements. Note
that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types. Two terminals designed for
grounding shown as the symbol, G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power supply
source (a primary circuit) and a motor (a secondary circuit).
Table 8.2 Main Circuit Terminal Properties
Nominal
Power Tightening Tightening
applied Terminal Grounding
supply Inverter type torque torque Refer to:
motor screw size screw size
voltage [lb-in (N·m)] [lb-in (N·m)]
(HP)
1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U
M3.5 10.6 (1.2) M3.5 10.6 (1.2) Figure A
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U
1 FRN001E1S-2U
Three- 2 FRN002E1S-2U
phase 3 FRN003E1S-2U M4 15.9 (1.8) M4 15.9 (1.8) Figure B
230 V 5 FRN005E1S-2U
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U
M5 33.6 (3.8) M5 33.6 (3.8)
10 FRN010E1S-2U
Figure C
15 FRN015E1S-2U
M6 51.3 (5.8) M6 51.3 (5.8)
20 FRN020E1S-2U
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U

Chap. 8
1 FRN001E1S-4U
2 FRN002E1S-4U M4 15.9 (1.8) M4 15.9 (1.8) Figure B
Three- 3 FRN003E1S-4U
phase 5 FRN005E1S-4U

SPECIFICATIONS
460 V 7.5 FRN007E1S-4U
M5 33.6 (3.8) M5 33.6 (3.8)
10 FRN010E1S-4U
Figure C
15 FRN015E1S-4U
M6 51.3 (5.8) M6 51.3 (5.8)
20 FRN020E1S-4U
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U
Single- M3.5 10.6 (1.2) M3.5 10.6 (1.2) Figure D
1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U
phase
1 FRN001E1S-7U
230 V
2 FRN002E1S-7U
M4 15.9 (1.8) M4 15.9 (1.8) Figure E
3 FRN003E1S-7U

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-19
 8.3.2.2 Control circuit terminals
The control circuit terminal arrangement, screw sizes, and tightening torque are shown below.

Screw size: M3, Tightening torque: 4.4 to 5.3 lb-in (0.5 to 0.6 N·m)

Table 8.3 Control Circuit Terminals

Screwdriver type Allowable wire size Wire strip length Ferrule terminal (for Europe
type terminal block)*

Flat screwdriver AWG26 to AWG16 0.10 (W) x 0.07 (H) inch

0.24 inch (6 mm)
0.6 x 3.5 mm (0.14 to 1.5 mm2) (2.51 (W) x 1.76 (H) mm)

* Manufacturer of ferrule terminals: Phoenix Contact Inc. Refer to the table below.

Table 8.4 Recommended Ferrule Terminals

Type
Screw size
With insulated collar Without insulated collar
AWG24 (0.25 mm2) AI0.25-6BU --
2
AWG22 (0.34 mm ) AI0.34-6TQ A0.34-7
2 3.5 mm
AWG20 (0.5 mm ) AI0.5-6WH A0.5-6
AWG18 (0.75 mm2) AI0.75-6GY A0.75-6
Head thickness: 0.6 mm
Screwdriver head style
AWG16 (1.25 mm2) AI1.5-6BK A1.5-7

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-20
 8.4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment

8.4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment

8.4.1 Operating environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 8.5.

Table 8.5 Environmental Requirements

Item Specifications
Site location Indoors
Ambient temperature -10 to +50qC (14 to 122 qF) (Note 1)
Relative humidity 5 to 95% (No condensation)
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases,
flammable gas, oil mist, vapor or water drops.
Pollution degree 2 (IEC60664-1) (Note 2)
The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt.
(0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will
cause condensation to form.
Altitude 1000 m max. (Note 3)

Chap. 8
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa
Vibration 3 mm
2 to less than 9 Hz
(Max. amplitude)

SPECIFICATIONS
9.8 m/s2 9 to less than 20 Hz
2 m/s2 20 to less than 55 Hz
1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz

(Note 1) When inverters are mounted side-by-side without any gap between them (5 HP or less), the ambient
temperature should be within the range from -10 to +40qC (14 to 104 qF).
(Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt
which will clog the heat sink in the inverter. If the inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in
the panel of your system or other dustproof containers.
(Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude above 3300 ft (1000 m), you should apply an output current derating
factor as listed in Table 8.6.

Table 8.6 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude

Altitude Output current derating factor

3300 ft (1000 m) or lower 1.00
3301 to 4900 ft (1000 to 1500 m) 0.97
4901 to 6600 ft (1500 to 2000 m) 0.95

6601 to 8200 ft (2000 to 2500 m) 0.91

8201 to 9800 ft (2500 to 3000 m) 0.88

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-21
 8.4.2 Storage environment
8.4.2.1 Temporary storage
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below.

Table 8.7 Storage and Transport Environments

Item Specifications

Storage -25 to +70qC (-13 to 158 qF)

temperature *1 Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or
Relative 5 to 95% *2 condensation or freezing
humidity
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases,
oil mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere must contain only a low level
of salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
pressure
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming a comparative short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to
sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.

Precautions for temporary storage

(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed above, wrap the inverter in an
airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in a high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica gel) in
the airtight package described in item (2).

8.4.2.2 Long-term storage

The long-term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the storage
site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the ambient temperature range should be within the
range from -10 to 30°C (14 to 86 qF). This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deterioration.
(2) The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture. Add a drying agent inside the
package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be
subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the
environment specified in Table 8.7.

Precautions for storage over 1 year

If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes. Do
not connect the inverters to the load circuit (secondary side) or run the inverter.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-22
 8.5 External Dimensions

8.5 External Dimensions

8.5.1 Standard models
The diagrams below show external dimensions of the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters according to the
type.
Unit: inch (mm)

Power Dimensions [inch (mm)]

supply Inverter type
D D1 D2
voltage
FRNF12E1S-2U

Chap. 8
Three- 3.62 (92) 0.39 (10)
FRNF25E1S-2U
phase 3.23 (82)
FRNF50E1S-2U 4.21 (107) 0.98 (25)
230 V
FRN001E1S-2U 5.2 (132) 1.97 (50)
FRNF12E1S-7U
Single- 3.62 (92) 0.39 (10)

SPECIFICATIONS
FRNF25E1S-7U 3.23 (82)
phase
FRNF50E1S-7U 4.21 (107) 0.98 (25)
230 V
FRN001E1S-7U 5.98 (152) 4.02 (102) 1.97 (50)

Power Dimensions [inch (mm)]

supply Inverter type
D D1 D2
voltage
Three- FRNF50E1S-4U 4.96 (126) 1.57 (40)
phase 3.39 (86)
FRN001E1S-4U 5.91 (150) 2.52 (64)
460 V

8-23
 Unit: inch (mm)

Power Dimensions [inch (mm)]

supply Inverter type
D D1 D2
voltage
Three- FRN002E1S-2U
phase
230 V FRN003E1S-2U
5.91 (150) 3.39 (86)
Three- FRN002E1S-4U
phase 2.52 (64)
460 V FRN003E1S-4U
Single-
phase FRN002E1S-7U 6.30 (160) 3.78 (96)
230 V

Power supply voltage Inverter type

Three-phase 230 V FRN005E1S-2U

Three-phase 460 V FRN005E1S-4U
Single-phase 230 V FRN003E1S-7U

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-24
 8.5 External Dimensions

Unit: inch (mm)

Power supply voltage Inverter type

FRN007E1S-2U
Three-phase 230 V
FRN010E1S-2U
FRN007E1S-4U

Chap. 8
Three-phase 460 V
FRN010E1S-4U

SPECIFICATIONS

Power supply voltage Inverter type

FRN015E1S-2U
Three-phase 230 V
FRN020E1S-2U
FRN015E1S-4U
Three-phase 460 V
FRN020E1S-4U

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-25
 8.5.2 Standard keypad

Unit: inch (mm)

For remote operation or panel wall-mounting

(The keypad rear cover should be mounted.)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-26
 8.6 Connection Diagrams

8.6 Connection Diagrams

8.6.1 Running the inverter with keypad
The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with the keypad.

Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS

(Note 1) When connecting an optional DC reactor (DCR), remove the jumper bar from the terminals [P1] and [P (+)].
(Note 2) Install a recommended molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) (with an
overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. At this time, ensure that the
circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
(Note 3) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the MCCB
or GFCI, when necessary.
Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 4) THR function can be used by assigning code "9" (external alarm) to any of the terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV]
(function code; E01 to E05, E98, or E99).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-27
 8.6.2 Running the inverter by terminal commands
The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with terminal commands.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-28
 8.6 Connection Diagrams

(Note 1) When connecting an optional DC reactor (DCR), remove the jumper bar from the terminals [P1] and [P (+)].
(Note 2) Install a recommended molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) (with an
overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. At this time, ensure that
the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
(Note 3) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the
MCCB or GFCI, when necessary.
Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 4) THR function can be used by assigning code "9" (external alarm) to any of the terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD]
and [REV] (function code: E01 to E05, E98, or E99).
(Note 5) Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency-setting device (external potentiometer) between the terminals
[11], [12] and [13] instead of inputting a voltage signal (0 to +10 VDC, 0 to +5 VDC or +1 to
+5 VDC) between the terminals [12] and [11].
(Note 6) For the control signal wires, use shielded or twisted pair wires. Ground the shielded wires. To prevent
malfunction due to noise, keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible
(recommended: 10 cm or more). Never install them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit
wiring with the main circuit wiring, set them at right angles.

Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-29
 8.7 Protective Functions
The table below lists the name of the protective functions, description, alarm codes on the LED monitor,
presence of alarm output at terminals [30A/B/C], and related function codes. If an alarm code appears on
the LED monitor, remove the cause of activation of the alarm function referring to FRENIC-Multi
Instruction Manual, Chapter 6, "TROUBLESHOOTING."

LED Alarm
Name Description monitor output
displays [30A/B/C]
Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the During E Yes
protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration
overload.
Short-circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the
protection inverter from overcurrent due to a
short-circuiting in the output circuit.
During E
deceleration
Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the
protection inverter from overcurrent due to a ground During running at E
fault in the output circuit. This protection is constant speed
effective only during startup of the inverter.
If you turn ON the inverter without
removing the ground fault, this protection
may not work.
Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During W Yes
protection an overvoltage condition (400 VDC for acceleration
three-phase 230 V, 800 VDC for During W
three-phase 460 V) in the DC link bus. deceleration
This protection is not assured if extremely
During running at W
large AC line voltage is applied constant speed
inadvertently.
(stopped)
Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops NW Yes*1
protection below the undervoltage level (200 VDC for three-phase 230V,
400 VDC for three-phase 460 V).
However, if data "4 or 5" is selected for F14, no alarm is output
even if the DC link bus voltage drops.
Input phase loss Detects input phase loss, stopping the inverter output. This NKP Yes
protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that
may be caused by input phase loss or inter-phase voltage
unbalance and may damage the inverter.
If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the
inverter, this function will not detect input phase loss if any.
Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running RN Yes
loss protection and during running, stopping the inverter output.

Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink J Yes
protection temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload.
Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to FDJ Yes
overheating of an external braking resistor.
* Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking
resistor.
*1 This alarm on [30A/B/C] should be ignored depending upon the function code setting.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-30
 8.7 Protective Functions

LED Alarm
Name Description monitor output
displays [30A/B/C]
Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor NW Yes
protection (IGBT) internal temperature calculated from the output current
and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value.
External alarm Places the inverter in alarm-stop state upon receiving digital J Yes
input input signal THR.

Electronic In the following cases, the inverter stops running the motor to N Yes
thermal protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal N
overload overload protection setting.
- Protects general-purpose motors over the entire frequency
range (F10 = 1.)
- Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range
(F10 = 2.)
Motor protection

The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11
and F12.
For motor 2, read F10 to F12 as A06 to A08.
PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor J Yes

Chap. 8
thermistor protection.
Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals [C1] and [11] and
set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB
accordingly.

SPECIFICATIONS
Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the inverter — —
early is stopped by the electronic thermal overload protection for the
warning motor.
Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active. — —
Instantaneous overcurrent limiting:
Operates if the inverter's output current exceeds the
instantaneous overcurrent limit level, avoiding tripping of the
inverter (during constant speed operation or during acceleration).
Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter — Yes
output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output.
(for any fault) < Alarm reset >
The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the key or by the
digital input signal RST.
< Saving the alarm history and detailed data >
The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and
displayed.
Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power-on and when the GT Yes
detection data is written. If a memory error is detected, the inverter stops.
Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error between GT Yes
communications the inverter and the keypad during operation using the standard
error detection keypad or multi-function keypad (optional).
CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise or GT Yes
detection some other factors, this function stops the inverter.
"—": Not applicable

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-31
 LED Alarm
Name Description monitor output
displays [30A/B/C]
Option Upon detection of an error in the communication between the GT —
communications inverter and an optional card, stops the inverter output.
error detection
Option error When an option card has detected an error, this function stops GT —
detection the inverter output.
Operation STOP Pressing the key on the keypad forces the inverter GT Yes
protection key to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is
priority running by any run commands given via the terminals
or communications (link operation). After the motor
stops, the inverter issues alarm GT.

Start The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays GT Yes
check GT on the 7-segment LED monitor if any run
function command is present when:
- Powering up
- An alarm is released (the key is turned ON or an
alarm reset RST is input.)
- "Enable communications link LE" has been
activated and the run command is active in the
linked source.
Tuning error During tuning of motor parameters, if the tuning has failed or GT Yes
detection has aborted, or an abnormal condition has been detected in the
tuning result, the inverter stops its output.
RS-485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network GT Yes
communications via the RS-485 port designed for the keypad, detecting a
error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an
error code GT.
Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the GTH Yes
during under- undervoltage protection function, the inverter displays the alarm
voltage code.
RS-485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network GTR Yes
communications via an optional RS-485 communications card, detecting a
error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an
(optional) error code GTR .
Retry When the inverter has stopped because of a trip, this function — —
allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart. (You
can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop
and reset.)
Surge protection Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear — —
between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the
ground.
Command loss Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command (because of a — —
detected broken wire, etc.), this function issues an alarm and continues
the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency
(specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection).
Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 — —
against ms, this function stops the inverter output.
momentary If restart after momentary power failure is selected, this function
power failure invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a
predetermined period.
"—": Not applicable

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-32
 8.7 Protective Functions

LED Alarm
Name Description monitor output
displays [30A/B/C]
Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload — —
prevention condition (alarm code: J or NW), the output frequency of
control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping.
Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the GTJ Yes
control printed circuit board (control PCB) and power printed
circuit board (power PCB), interface printed circuit board
(interface PCB) or option card, or short-circuit between
terminals [13] and [11] is detected.
Mock alarm Simulated alarm is output to check the fault sequence. GTT Yes
"—": Not applicable

Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
8-33
 Chapter 9
FUNCTION CODES
This chapter contains overview lists of function codes available for the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters and
details of each function code.

Contents

9.1 Function Code Tables.................................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.2 Overview of Function Codes .................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ...................................................................................................... 9-14
9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)............................................................................................. 9-43
9.2.3 C codes (Control functions) .............................................................................................................. 9-70
9.2.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) ........................................................................................................... 9-77
9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions) ............................................................................................. 9-80
9.2.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters)......................................................................................................... 9-102
9.2.7 J codes (Application functions)....................................................................................................... 9-104
9.2.8 y codes (Link functions).................................................................................................................. 9-119

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 9.1 Function Code Tables

9.1 Function Code Tables

Function codes enable the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters to be set up to match your system
requirements.
Each function code consists of a 3-letter alphanumeric string. The first letter is an alphabet that identifies
its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group. The
function codes are classified into nine groups: Fundamental Functions (F codes), Extension Terminal
Functions (E codes), Control Functions (C codes), Motor 1 Parameters (P codes), High Performance
Functions (H codes), Motor 2 Parameters (A codes), Application Functions (J codes), Link Functions (y
codes) and Option Functions (o codes). To determine the property of each function code, set data to the
function code.
This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function (o codes). For Option Function (o
codes), refer to the instruction manual for each option.
The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 9-3 and
subsequent pages.

„ Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the inverter is running
Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the
inverter is running:
Notation Change when running Validating and saving function code data
Y* Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y* is changed with
and keys, the change will immediately take effect;
however, the change is not saved into the inverter's memory.
To save the change, press the key. If you press the key
without pressing the key to exit the current state, then the

Chap. 9
changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take
effect for the inverter operation.
Y Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with

FUNCTION CODES
and keys, the change will not take effect. Pressing the
key will make the change take effect and save it into the
inverter's memory.
N Impossible —

„ Copying data
The data copying feature copies the function code data stored in the inverter's memory into the keypad's
memory. With this feature, you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination
inverters.
The standard keypad does not support this feature. The optional multi-function keypad supports it with
Menu #8 in Programming mode.
If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ, some code data may not be copied to
ensure safe operation of your power system. Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the
following symbols in the "Data copying" column of the function code tables given below.
Y: Will be copied unconditionally.
Y1: Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter.
Y2: Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter.
N: Will not be copied. (The function code marked with "N" is not subject to the Verify operation,
either.)
If necessary, set up uncopied code data manually and individually.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-1
 „ Using negative logic for programmable I/O terminals
The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the
function code data specifying the properties for those terminals. Negative logic refers to the inverted
ON/OFF (logical value 1 (true)/0 (false)) state of input or output signal. An active-ON signal (the
function takes effect if the terminal is short-circuited.) in the normal logic system is functionally
equivalent to active-OFF signal (the function takes effect if the terminal is opened.) in the negative logic
system. An active-ON signal can be switched to active-OFF signal, and vice versa, with the function
code data setting.
To set the negative logic system for an I/O terminal, enter data of 1000s (by adding 1000 to the data for
the normal logic) in the corresponding function code. Some signals cannot switch to active-OFF
depending upon their assigned functions.
Example: "Coast to a stop" command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals [X1] to [X5] using
any of function codes E01 through E05
Function code data BX
7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop. (Active-ON)
1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop. (Active-OFF)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-2
 9.1 Function Code Tables

The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters
F codes: Fundamental Functions
Change Refer
Name Data setting range Incre- Data Default
Code Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
F00 Data Protection 0: Disable both data protection and digital reference protection 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-14
1: Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection
2: Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection
3: Enable both data protection and digital reference protection
F01 Frequency Command 1 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
1: Voltage input to terminal [12] (-10 to +10 VDC)
2: Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals [12] and [C1]
(C1 function)
5: Voltage input to terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to 10 VDC)
7: Terminal command UP /DOWN control
11: DIO interface card (option)
12: PG interface card (option)
F02 Operation Method 0: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (Motor rotational direction specified by 㧙 㧙 N Y 2 9-15
terminal command FWD /REV )
1: Terminal command FWD or REV
2: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (forward)
3: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (reverse)
F03 Maximum Frequency 1 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y 60.0 9-16
F04 Base Frequency 1 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y 60.0
F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 0: Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 1 V N Y2
80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 230 V) 230
160 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 460 V) 460
F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 230 V) 1 V N Y2 230
160 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 460 V) 460
F07 Acceleration Time 1 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00 9-18
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration time, requiring external
soft-start.
F08 Deceleration Time 1 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the deceleration time, requiring external
soft-start.
F09 Torque Boost 1 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 % Y Y Depending
(percentage with respect to "F05: Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1") on the
Note: This setting takes effect when F37 = 0, 1, 3, or 4. inverter
capacity
F10 Electronic Thermal Overload 1: For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan 㧙 㧙 Y Y 1 9-21
Protection for Motor 1 2: For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with

Chap. 9
(Select motor characteristics) separately powered cooling fan
F11 (Overload detection level) 0.00: Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 100% of
0.01 to 100.00 Y2 the motor
1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable continuous drive current) of the rated
motor current
F12 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 0.1 min Y Y 5.0

FUNCTION CODES
F14 Restart Mode after Momentary 0: Disable restart (Trip immediately) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-24
Power Failure 1: Disable restart (Trip after a recovery from power failure)
(Mode selection) 4: Enable restart (Restart at the frequency at which the power failure
occurred, for general loads)
5: Enable restart (Restart at the starting frequency, for low-inertia load)
F15 Frequency Limiter (High) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 70.0 9-28
F16 (Low) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0
F18 Bias‫( ޓ‬Frequency command 1) -100.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00 9-29
F20 DC Braking 1 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0 9-32
(Braking starting frequency)
F21 (Braking level) 0 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
F22 (Braking time) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
0.01 to 30.00
F23 Starting Frequency 1 0.1 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.5 9-33
F24 (Holding time) 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
F25 Stop Frequency 0.1 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.2
F26 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency) 0.75 to 15 1 kHz Y Y 2 9-34
F27 (Tone) 0: Level 0 (Inactive) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3

The shaded function codes ( ) are applicable to the quick setup.

*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-3
 (F code continued)
Change Refer
Incre- Data Default
Code Name Data setting range Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
F29 Analog Output [FM] 0: Output in voltage (0 to 10 VDC) ( FMA ) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-35
(Mode selection) 2: Output in pulse (0 to 6000 p/s) ( FMP )
F30 (Voltage adjustment) 0 to 300 (FMA ) 1 % Y* Y 100
F31 (Function) Select a function to be monitored from the followings. 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
0: Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)
1: Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation)
2: Output current
3: Output voltage
4: Output torque
5: Load factor
6: Input power
7: PID feedback amount (PV)
8: PG feedback value
9: DC link bus voltage
10: Universal AO
13: Motor output
14: Calibration
15: PID command (SV)
16: PID output (MV)
F33 (Pulse rate) 25 to 6000 (FMP , Pulse rate at 100% output) 1 p/s Y* Y 1440
F37 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/ 0: Variable torque load 㧙 㧙 N Y 1 9-18
Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 1: Constant torque load 9-37
2: Auto-torque boost
3: Auto-energy saving operation (Variable torque load during ACC/DEC)
4: Auto-energy saving operation (Constant torque load during ACC/DEC)
5: Auto-energy saving operation (Auto-torque boost during ACC/DEC)
F39 Stop Frequency 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.00 9-33
(Holding Time) 9-37
F40 Torque Limiter 1 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999 9-37
(Limiting level for driving) 999: Disable
F41 (Limiting level for braking) 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999
999: Disable
F42 Control Mode Selection 1 0: V/f control with slip compensation inactive 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
1: Dynamic torque vector control
2: V/f control with slip compensation active
3: V/f control with optional PG interface
4: Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface
F43 Current Limiter 0: Disable (No current limiter works.) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 2 9-39
(Mode selection) 1: Enable at constant speed (Disable during ACC/DEC)
2: Enable during ACC/constant speed operation
F44 (Level) 20 to 200 (The data is interpreted as the rated output current of the inverter 1 % Y Y 180
for 100%.)
F50 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 to 900 1 kWs Y Y 999
Protection for Braking Resistor 999: Disable
(Discharging capability) 0: Reserved
F51 (Allowable average loss) 0.001 to 50.000 0.001 kW Y Y 0.000
0.000: Reserved

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-4
 9.1 Function Code Tables

E codes: Extension Terminal Functions

Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
E01 T erminal [X1] Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-43
terminals [X1] to [X5] as listed below.
E02 T erminal [X2] Function 0 (1000): Select multi-frequency ( SS1 ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 1
E03 T erminal [X3] Function 1 (1001): Select multi-frequency ( SS2 ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 2
E04 T erminal [X4] Function 2 (1002): Select multi-frequency ( SS4 ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 7
E05 T erminal [X5] Function 3 (1003): Select multi-frequency ( SS8 ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 8
4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time ( RT1 )
6 (1006): Enable 3-wire operation ( HLD )
7 (1007): Coast to a stop ( BX )
8 (1008): Reset alarm ( RST )
9 (1009): Enable external alarm trip ( THR )
10 (1010): Ready for jogging ( JOG )
11 (1011): Select frequency command 2/1 ( Hz2/Hz1 )
12 (1012): Select motor 2/motor 1 ( M2/M1 )
13 : Enable DC braking ( DCBRK )
14 (1014): Select torque limiter level ( TL2/TL1 )
17 (1017): UP (Increase output frequency) ( UP )
18 (1018): DOWN (Decrease output frequency) ( DOWN )
19 (1019): Enable data change with keypad ( WE-KP )
20 (1020): Cancel PID control ( Hz/PID )
21 (1021): Switch normal/inverse operation ( IVS )
24 (1024): Enable communications link via ( LE )
RS-485 or field bus
25 (1025): Universal DI ( U-DI )
26 (1026): Enable auto search for idling motor ( STM )
speed at starting
30 (1030): Force to stop ( STOP )
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and differential ( PID-RST )
components
34 (1034): Hold PID integral component ( PID-HLD )
42 (1042): Reserved *2
43 (1043): Reserved *2
44 (1044): Reserved *2
45 (1045): Reserved *2
Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses ( ) shown above assigns a
negative logic input to a terminal.
Note: In the case of THR and STOP , data (1009) and (1030) are for normal

Chap. 9
logic, and "9" and "30" are for negative logic, respectively.
E10 Acceleration T ime 2 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 10.0 9-18
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration time, requiring external soft- 9-55
start.
E11 Deceleration T ime 2 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 10.0
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration time, requiring external soft-

FUNCTION CODES
start.
E16 T orque Limiter 2 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999 9-37
(Limiting level for driving) 999 : Disable 9-55
E17 (Limiting level for braking) 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999
999 : Disable
E20 T erminal [Y1] Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-55
terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C] as listed below.
E21 T erminal [Y2] Function 0 (1000): Inverter running ( RUN ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 7
E27 T erminal [30A/B/C] Function 1 (1001): Frequency arrival signal ( FAR ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 99
2 (1002): Frequency detected ( FDT )
3 (1003): Undervoltage detected ( LU )
(Inverter stopped)
4 (1004): T orque polarity detected ( B/D )
5 (1005): Inverter output limiting ( IOL )
6 (1006): Auto-restarting after momentary ( IPF )
power failure
7 (1007): Motor overload early warning ( OL )
10 (1010): Inverter ready to run ( RDY )
21 (1021): Frequency arrival signal 2 ( FAR2 )
22 (1022): Inverter output limiting with delay ( IOL2 )
26 (1026): Auto-resetting ( TRY )
28 (1028): Heat sink overheat early warning ( OH )
30 (1030): Service lifetime alarm ( LIFE )
33 (1033): Reference loss detected ( REF OFF )
35 (1035): Inverter output on ( RUN2 )
36 (1036): Overload prevention control ( OLP )
37 (1037): Current detected ( ID )
38 (1038): Current detected 2 ( ID2 )
42 (1042): PID alarm ( PID-ALM )
49 (1049): Switched to motor 2 ( SWM2 )
57 (1057): Brake signal ( BRKS )
80 (1080): Reserved *2
81 (1081): Reserved *2
82 (1082): Reserved *2
99 (1099): Alarm output (for any alarm) ( ALM )
Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses ( ) shown above assigns a
negative logic input to a terminal.

2
* These function codes and their data are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise
specified, do not access these function codes.
9-5
 (E code continued)
Change Refer
Incre- Data Default
Code Name Data setting range Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
E29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time 0.01 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.10 9-60
E30 Frequency Arrival 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 2.5
(Hysteresis width)
E31 Frequency Detection (FDT) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 60.0
(Detection level)
E32 (Hysteresis width) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.0
E34 Overload Early Warning/Current 100% of 9-61
Detection the motor
(Level) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 rated
Current value of 1 to 200% of the inverter rated current Y2 current
E35 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 10.00
E37 Current Detection 2‫ޓ‬ (Level) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 100% of
Current value of 1 to 200% of the inverter rated current Y2 the motor
rated
E38 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 10.00
E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding 0.000 to 9.999 0.001 㧙 Y Y 0.000 9-62
Rate Time
E40 PID Display Coefficient A -999 to 0.00 to 9990 *1 0.01 㧙 Y Y 100
E41 PID Display Coefficient B -999 to 0.00 to 9990 *1 0.01 㧙 Y Y 0.00
E42 LED Display Filter 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.5 9-63
E43 LED Monitor (Item selection) 0: Speed monitor (select by E48) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-64
3: Output current
4: Output voltage
8: Calculated torque
9: Input power
10: PID command
12: PID feedback amount
13: Timer
14: PID output
15: Load factor
16: Motor output
21: Reserved *2
22: Reserved *2
E45 LCD Monitor *3 (Item selection) 0: Running status, rotational direction and operation guide 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-65
1: Bar charts for output frequency, current and calculated torque
E46 (Language selection) 0: Japanese 㧙 㧙 Y Y 1 9-66
1: English
2: German
3: French
4: Spanish
5: Italian
E47 (Contrast control) 0 (Low) to 10 (High) 1 㧙 Y Y 5
E48 LED Monitor (Speed monitor item) 0: Output frequency (Before slip compensation) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-64
1: Output frequency (After slip compensation) 9-66
2: Reference frequency
3: Motor speed in r/min
4: Load shaft speed in r/min
5: Line speed in m/min
6: Constant feeding rate time
E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication 0.01 to 200.00 *1 0.01 㧙 Y Y 30.00 9-62
9-66
E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt- 0.000 (Cancel/reset㧕 0.001 㧙 Y Y 0.010 9-66
hour Data 0.001 to 9999
E52 Keypad (Menu display mode) 0: Function code data editing mode (Menus #0 and #1) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-67
1: Function code data check mode (Menu #2)
2: Full-menu mode (Menus #0 through #6)
E59 Terminal [C1] Signal Definition 0: Current input (C1 function), 4 to 20 mADC 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-68
(C1/V2 Function) 1: Voltage input (V2 function), 0 to +10 VDC
E61 Terminal [12] Extended Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
terminals [12] and [C1] (C1/V2 function) as listed below.
E62 Terminal [C1] Extended Function 0: None 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
(C1 function) 1: Auxiliary frequency command 1
E63 Terminal [C1] Extended Function 2: Auxiliary frequency command 2 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
(V2 function) 3: PID command 1
5: PID feedback amount
E65 Reference Loss Detection 0: Decelerate to stop 1 % Y Y 999 9-69
(Continuous running frequency) 20 to 120
999: Disable

The shaded function codes ( ) are applicable to the quick setup.

*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
*2 These function codes and their data are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise
specified, do not access these function codes.
*3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi-function keypad.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-6
 9.1 Function Code Tables

(E code continued)
Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
E98 T erminal [FWD] Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 㧙 㧙 N Y 98 9-43
terminals [FWD] and [REV] as listed below. 9-69
E99 T erminal [REV] Function 0 (1000): Select multi-frequency ( SS1 ) 㧙 㧙 N Y 99
1 (1001): Select multi-frequency ( SS2 )
2 (1002): Select multi-frequency ( SS4 )
3 (1003): Select multi-frequency ( SS8 )
4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time ( RT1 )
6 (1006): Enable 3-wire operation ( HLD )
7 (1007): Coast to a stop ( BX )
8 (1008): Reset alarm ( RST )
9 (1009): Enable external alarm trip ( THR )
10 (1010): Ready for jogging ( JOG )
11 (1011): Select frequency command 2/1 ( Hz2/Hz1 )
12 (1012): Select motor 2/motor 1 ( M2/M1 )
13 : Enable DC braking ( DCBRK )
14 (1014): Select torque limiter level ( TL2/TL1 )
17 (1017): UP (Increase output frequency) ( UP )
18 (1018): DOWN (Decrease output ( DOWN )
frequency)
19 (1019): Enable data change with keypad ( WE-KP )
20 (1020): Cancel PID control ( Hz/PID )
21 (1021): Switch normal/inverse operation ( IVS )
24 (1024): Enable communications link via ( LE )
RS-485 or field bus
25 (1025): Universal DI ( U-DI )
26 (1026): Enable auto search for idling motor ( STM )
speed at starting
30 (1030): Force to stop ( STOP )
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and differential ( PID-RST )
components
34 (1034): Hold PID integral component ( PID-HLD )
42 (1042): Reserved *2
43 (1043): Reserved *2
44 (1044): Reserved *2
45 (1045): Reserved *2
98 : Run forward ( FWD )
99 : Run reverse ( REV )
Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses ( ) shown above assigns a

Chap. 9
negative logic input to a terminal.
Note: In the case of THR and STOP , data (1009) and (1030) are for normal
logic, and "9" and "30" are for negative logic, respectively.

C codes: Control Functions

FUNCTION CODES
Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
C01 Jump Frequency 1 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.00 9-70
C02 2 Y Y 0.00
C03 3 Y Y 0.00
C04 (Hysteresis width) 0.0 to 30.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 3.0
C05 Multi-Frequency 1 0.00 to 400.0 0.01 Hz Y Y 0.00 9-71
C06 2 Y Y 0.00
C07 3 Y Y 0.00
C08 4 Y Y 0.00
C09 5 Y Y 0.00
C10 6 Y Y 0.00
C11 7 Y Y 0.00
C12 8 Y Y 0.00
C13 9 Y Y 0.00
C14 10 Y Y 0.00
C15 11 Y Y 0.00
C16 12 Y Y 0.00
C17 13 Y Y 0.00
C18 14 Y Y 0.00
C19 15 Y Y 0.00
C20 Jogging Frequency 0.00 to 400.0 0.01 Hz Y Y 0.00 9-72
C21 T imer Operation 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-73
1: Enable
C30 Frequency Command 2 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad 㧙 㧙 N Y 2 9-14
1: Voltage input to terminal [12]‫(ޓ‬-10 to +10 VDC) 9-73
2: Current input to terminal [C1]‫(ޓ‬C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals [12] and
[C1] (C1 function)
5: Voltage input to terminal [C1]‫(ޓ‬V2 function) (0 to 10 VDC)
7: T erminal command UP /DOWN control
11: DIO interface card (option)
12: PG interface card (option)

2
* These function codes and their data are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise
specified, do not access these function codes.
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-7
(C code continued)
Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
C31 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] -5.0 to 5.0 0.1 % Y* Y 0.0 9-74
(Offset)
C32 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-29
9-74
C33 (Filter time constant) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.05 9-74
C34 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-29
9-74
C35 (Polarity) 0: Bipolar 㧙 㧙 N Y 1 9-74
1: Unipolar
C36 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] -5.0 to 5.0 0.1 % Y* Y 0.0 9-74
(C1 function) (Offset) 9-75
C37 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-29
9-75
C38 (Filter time constant) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.05 9-74
9-75
C39 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-29
9-75
C41 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] -5.0 to 5.0 0.1 % Y* Y 0.0 9-74
(V2 function) (Offset) 9-75
C42 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-29
9-75
C43 (Filter time constant) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.05 9-74
9-75
C44 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-29
C50 Bias (Frequency command 1) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00 9-75
(Bias base point)
C51 Bias (PID command 1) -100.00 to 100.00 9-76
(Bias value) 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00
C52 (Bias base point) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00
C53 Selection of Normal/Inverse Operation 0: Normal operation 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
(Frequency command 1) 1: Inverse operation

P codes: Motor 1 Parameters

Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 2 poles N Y1 4 9-77
Y2
P02 (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 0, 3, or 4.) 0.01 kW N Y1 Rated
0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 1.) 0.01 HP Y2 capacity of
motor
P03 (Rated current) 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P04 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N N 0
1: Enable (T une %R1 and %X while the motor is stopped.)
2: Enable (T une %R1, %X and rated slip while the motor is stopped, and
no-load current while running.)
P05 (Online tuning) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: Enable
P06 (No-load current) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value 9-78
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P07 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P08 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P09 (Slip compensation gain for driving) 0.0 to 200.0 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 9-78
P10 (Slip compensation response time) 0.01 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y1 0.50 9-79
Y2
P11 (Slip compensation gain for braking) 0.0 to 200.0 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0
P12 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00 0.01 Hz N Y1 Rated value 9-79
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P99 Motor 1 Selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series) 㧙 㧙 N Y1 0
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors) Y2
3: Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
4: Other motors

*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
9-8
 9.1 Function Code Tables

H codes: High Performance Functions

Change Refer
Name Data setting range Incre- Data Default
Code Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
H03 Data Initialization 0: Disable initialization 㧙 㧙 N N 0 9-80
1: Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
2: Initialize motor 1 parameters
3: Initialize motor 2 parameters
H04 Auto-reset (Times) 0: Disable 1 times Y Y 0 9-84
1 to 10
H05 (Reset interval) 0.5 to 20.0 0.1 s Y Y 5.0
H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control 0: Disable (Always in operation) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-85
1: Enable (ON/OFF controllable)
H07 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 0: Linear 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-86
1: S-curve (Weak)
2: S-curve (Strong)
3: Curvilinear
H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-87
1: Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited㧕
2: Enable (Forward rotation inhibited㧕
H09 Starting Mode (Auto search) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-88
1: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure)
2: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start)
H11 Deceleration Mode 0: Normal deceleration 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-90
1: Coast-to-stop
H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y Y 1
Limiting 1: Enable
(Mode selection)
H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s Y Y1 Depending 9-24
‫(ޓ‬Restart time) Y2 on the 9-91
inverter
capacity
H14 (Frequency fall rate) 0.00: Deceleration time selected by F08 0.01 Hz/s Y Y 999
0.01 to 100.00
999: Follow the current limit command
H16 (Allowable momentary 0.0 to 30.0 0.1 s Y Y 999
power failure time) 999 : Automatically determined by inverter
H26 Thermistor (Mode selection) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-91
1: Enable (With PTC, the inverter immediately trips with J displayed.)

H27 (Level) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 V Y Y 1.60

H28 Droop Control -60.0 to 0.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0 9-92
H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-93
(Mode selection) 0: F01/C30 F02
1: RS-485 F02
2: F01/C30 RS-485
3: RS-485 RS-485

Chap. 9
4: RS-485 (option) F02
5: RS-485 (option) RS-485
6: F01/C30 RS-485 (option)
7: RS-485 RS-485 (option)
8: RS-485 (option) RS-485 (option)
H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor (0000 to FFFF: Hexadecimal) 1 㧙 Y N 㧙 9-94
H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication of cumulative run time of cooling fan for replacement 㧙 㧙 Y N 㧙

FUNCTION CODES
H44 Startup Times of Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup times 㧙 㧙 Y N 㧙
H45 Mock Alarm 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y N 0 9-95
1: Enable (Once a mock alarm occurs, the data automatically returns to 0.) 9-99

H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor (0000 to FFFF: Hexadecimal) 㧙 㧙 Y N Set at 9-95
factory
shipping
H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit boards (0000 to FFFF: 㧙 㧙 Y N 㧙
Printed Circuit Boards Hexadecimal). Resettable.
H49 Starting Mode (Delay time) 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 㨟 Y Y 0.0 9-88
9-95
H50 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 0.0 : Cancel 0.1 Hz N Y 0.0 9-16
(Frequency) 0.1 to 400.0 9-95
H51 (Voltage) 0 to 240 : Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 230 V) 1 V N Y2 0
0 to 500 : Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 460 V)
H52 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 0.0 : Cancel 0.1 Hz N Y 0.0
(Frequency) 0.1 to 400.0
H53 (Voltage) 0 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 230 V) 1 V N Y2 0
0 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 460 V)
H54 ACC/DEC Time 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00 9-95
(Jogging operation) *ACC time and DEC time are common.
H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00 9-96
H61 UP /DOWN Control 0: 0.00 㧙 㧙 N Y 1
(Initial frequency setting) 1: Last UP /DOWN command value on releasing run command
H63 Low Limiter (Mode selection) 0: Limit by F16 (Frequency limiter: Low) and continue to run 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-28
1: If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 (Frequency 9-96
limiter: Low), decelerate to stop the motor.
H64 (Lower limiting frequency) 0.0 (Depends on F16 (Frequency limiter: Low)) 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.6 9-96
0.1 to 60.0

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-9
 (H code continued)
Change Refer
Name Data setting range Incre- Data Default
Code Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
H68 Slip Compensation 1 0: Enable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-37
(Operating conditions) 1: Disable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above 9-96
2: Enable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
3: Disable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
H69 Automatic Deceleration 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-97
(Mode selection) 2: Enable (Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the
one specified by F08/E11.)
4: Enable (Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times
the one specified by F08/E11.)
H70 Overload Prevention Control 0.00 : Follow deceleration time specified by F08/E11 0.01 Hz/s Y Y 999
0.01 to 100.0
999: Disable
H71 Deceleration Characteristics 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-98
1: Enable
H76 Torque Limiter (Frequency increment 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 5.0 9-97
limit for braking) 9-98
H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0.00 to 0.40 0.01 㧙 Y Y 0.20 9-98
Gain for Motor 1
H89 Reserved *2 0, 1 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
H90 Reserved *2 0, 1 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
H91 Reserved *2 0, 1 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0.0
H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Change or reset the cumulative data 㧙 㧙 N N 㧙
H95 DC Braking 0: Slow 㧙 㧙 Y Y 1 9-32
(Braking response mode) 1: Quick 9-98
H96 STOP Key Priority/Start Check Data STOP key priority Start check function 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-99
Function 0: Disable Disable
1: Enable Disable
2: Disable Enable
3: Enable Enable
H97 Clear Alarm Data 0: Does not clear alarm data 㧙 㧙 Y N 0 9-95
1: Clear alarm data and return to zero 9-99
H98 Protection/Maintenance Function 0 to 31: Display data on the keypad's LED monitor in decimal format 㧙 㧙 Y Y 19 9-99
(In each bit, "0" for disabled, "1" for enabled.) (bit4,
(Mode selection) Bit 0: Lower the carrier frequency automatically 1,0㧩1)
Bit 1: Detect input phase loss
Bit 2: Detect output phase loss
Bit 3: Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor
Bit 4: Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor

A codes: Motor 2 Parameters

Change Refer
Name Data setting range Incre- Data Default
Code Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
A01 Maximum Frequency 2 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y 60.0 9-102
A02 Base Frequency 2 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y 60.0
A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0: Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 1 V N Y2
80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 230 V) 230
160 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 460 V) 460
A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 230 V) 1 V N Y2 230
160 to 500V: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 460 V) 460
A05 Torque Boost 2 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 % Y Y Depending
(percentage with respect to "A03: Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2") on the
Note: This setting takes effect when A13 = 0, 1, 3, or 4. inverter
capacity
A06 Electronic Thermal Overload 1: For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan 㧙 㧙 Y Y 1
Protection for Motor 2 2: For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with
(Select motor characteristics) separately powered cooling fan
A07 (Overload detection level) 0.00: Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 100% of
1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable continuous drive current) of the Y2 the motor
motor rated
A08 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 0.1 min Y Y 5.0
A09 DC Braking 2 0.0 to 60.0Hz
(Braking starting frequency) 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0
A10 (Braking level) 0 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
A11 (Braking time) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
0.01 to 30.00
A12 Starting Frequency 2 0.1 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.5
A13 Load Selection/ 0: Variable torque load 㧙 㧙 N Y 1
Auto Torque Boost/ 1: Constant torque load
Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 2: Auto-torque boost
3: Auto-energy saving operation (Variable torque load during ACC/DEC)
4: Auto-energy saving operation (Constant torque load during ACC/DEC)
5: Auto-energy saving operation (Auto-torque boost during ACC/DEC)

*2 These function codes and their data are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise
specified, do not access these function codes.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-10
 9.1 Function Code Tables

(A code continued)
Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
A14 Control Mode Selection 2 0: V/f operation with slip compensation inactive 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-102
1: Dynamic torque vector operation
2: V/f operation with slip compensation active
3: V/f operation with optional PG interface
4: Dynamic torque vector operation with optional PG interface
A15 Motor 2 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 2 poles N Y1 4
Y2
A16 (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 0, 3, or 4.) 0.01 kW N Y1 Rated
0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 1.) 0.01 HP Y2 capacity of
motor
A17 (Rated current) 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A18 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N N 0
1: Enable (T une %R1 and %X while the motor is stopped.)
2: Enable (T une %R1, %X and rated slip while the motor is stopped, and
no-load current while running.)
A19 (Online tuning) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: Enable
A20 (No-load current) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A21 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A22 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A23 (Slip compensation gain for driving) 0.0 to 200.0 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0
A24 (Slip compensation response time) 0.01 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y1 0.50 9-103
A25 (Slip compensation gain for braking) 0.0 to 200.0 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0
A26 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00 0.01 Hz N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard

Chap. 9
motor
A39 Motor 2 Selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series) 㧙 㧙 N Y1 0
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors) Y2
3: Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
4: Other motors
A40 Slip Compensation 2 0: Enable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above 㧙 㧙 N Y 0

FUNCTION CODES
(Operating conditions) 1: Disable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above
2: Enable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
3: Disable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
A41 Output Current Fluctuation 0.00 to 0.40 0.01 㧙 Y Y 0.20
Damping Gain for Motor 2
A45 Cumulative Motor Run T ime 2 Change or reset the cumulative data 㧙 㧙 N N 㧙
A46 Startup T imes of Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup times 㧙 㧙 Y N 㧙

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-11
J codes: Application Functions
Change Refer
Incre- Data Default
Code Name Data setting range Unit when to
ment copying setting
running page:
J01 PID Control (Mode selection) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N Y 0 9-104
1: Enable (Process control, normal operation)
2: Enable (Process control, inverse operation)
3: Enable (Dancer control)
J02 (Remote command SV) 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
1: PID command 1
3: Terminal command UP /DOWN control
4: Command via communications link
J03 P (Gain) 0.000 to 30.000 *1 0.001 times Y Y 0.100
J04 I (Integral time) 0.0 to 3600.0 *1 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
J05 D (Differential time) 0.00 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
J06 (Feedback filter) 0.0 to 900.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.5
J10 (Anti reset windup) 0 to 200 1 % Y Y 200 9-112
J11 (Select alarm output) 0: Absolute-value alarm 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: Absolute-value alarm (with Hold)
2: Absolute-value alarm (with Latch)
3: Absolute-value alarm (with Hold and Latch)
4: Deviation alarm
5: Deviation alarm (with Hold)
6: Deviation alarm (with Latch)
7: Deviation alarm (with Hold and Latch)
J12 (Upper level alarm (AH)) -100 to 100 1 % Y Y 100
J13 (Lower level alarm (AL)) -100 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
J18 (Upper limit of PID process output) -150 to 150 1 % Y Y 999 9-114
999: The F15 data applies.
J19 (Lower limit of PID process output) -150 to 150 1 % Y Y 999
999: The F16 data applies.
J56 (Speed command filter) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.10
J57 (Dancer reference position) -100 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
J58 (Detection width of dancer 0: Disable switching PID constant 1 % Y Y 0
position deviation) 1 to 100
J59 P (Gain) 2 0.000 to 30.00 *1 0.001 times Y Y 0.100
J60 I (Integral time) 2 0.0 to 3600.0 *1 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
J61 D (Differential time) 2 0.00 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
J62 (PID control block selection) Bit 0: PID output pole 1 㧙 N Y 0 9-115
0 = addition, 1 = subtraction
Bit 1: Select compensation of output ratio
0 = speed command, 1 = ratio
J63 Overload Stop 0: Torque 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
(Detection value) 1: Current
J64 (Detection level) 20 to 200 0.1 % Y Y 100
J65 (Mode selection) 0: Disable 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Coast to a stop
3: Hit mechanical stop
J66 (Operation condition) 0: Enable at constant speed and during deceleration 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: Enable at constant speed
2: Enable anytime
J67 (Timer) 0.00 to 600.00 0.01 s Y Y 0
J68 Braking Signal 0 to 200 1 % Y Y 100 9-117
(Brake OFF current)
J69 (Brake OFF frequency) 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.0
J70 (Brake OFF timer) 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Y Y 1.0
J71 (Brake ON frequency) 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.0
J72 (Brake ON timer) 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Y Y 1.0
J73 Positioning Control (Start timer) *2 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.0 9-118
J74 (Start point; upper digits) *2 -999 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J75 (Start point; lower digits) *2 [P], 0 to 9999 *4 1 p Y Y 0
J76 (Preset point; upper digits) *2 -999 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J77 (Preset point; lower digits) *2 [P], 0 to 9999 *4 1 p Y Y 0
J78 (Creep speed SW point; upper digits) *2 0 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J79 (Creep speed SW point; lower digits) *2 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J80 (Creep speed) *2 0 to 400 1 Hz Y Y 0
J81 (End point; upper digits) *2 -999 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J82 (End point; lower digits) *2 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J83 (Positioning allowance) *2 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J84 (End timer) *2 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
J85 (Coasting compensation) *2 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J86 (End point command) *2 0, 1 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
J87 (Preset positioning requirement) *2 0, 1, 2 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
J88 (Position detection direction) *2 0, 1 㧙 㧙 N Y 0
J90 Overload Stop Function 0.000 to 2.000, 999 0.001 㧙 Y Y 999
P (Gain) *2
J91 I (Integral time) *2 0.001 to 9.999, 999 0.001 s Y Y 999
J92 (Level adjustment) *2 50.0 to 150.0 0.1 % Y Y 100.0

*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
*2 These are available on inverters with inverter's ROM version 0700 or later. (For the version checking procedure, refer to
Chapter 3, Section 3.3.6 "Reading maintenance information."
*3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi-function keypad.
*4 [P]: Current position (Absolute position)
9-12
 9.1 Function Code Tables

y codes: Link Functions

Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
y01 RS-485 Communication (Standard) 1 to 255 9-119
(Station address) 1 㧙 N Y 1
y02 (Communications error processing) 0: Immediately trip with alarm GT 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: T rip with alarm GT after running for the period specified by timer y03
2: Retry during the period specified by timer y03. If the retry fails, trip with
alarm GT . If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y03 (T imer) 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 s Y Y 2.0
y04 (Baud rate) 0: 2400 bps 㧙 㧙 Y Y 3
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y05 (Data length) 0: 8 bits 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: 7 bits
y06 (Parity check) 0: None (2 stop bits for Modbus RT U) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: Even parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
2: Odd parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
3: None (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
y07 (Stop bits) 0: 2 bits 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: 1 bit
y08 (No-response error detection time) 0: No detection 1 s Y Y 0
1 to 60
y09 (Response interval) 0.00 to 1.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.01
y10 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RT U protocol 㧙 㧙 Y Y 1
1: FRENIC Loader protocol (SX protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
y11 RS-485 Communication (Option) 1 to 255
(Station address) 1 㧙 N Y 1
y12 (Communications error processing) 0: Immediately trip with alarm GTR 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: T rip with alarm GTR after running for the period specified by timer y13
2: Retry during the period specified by timer y13. If the retry fails, trip with
alarm GTR . If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y13 (T imer) 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 s Y Y 2.0
y14 (Baud rate) 0: 2400 bps 㧙 㧙 Y Y 3
1: 4800 bps

Chap. 9
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y15 (Data length) 0: 8 bits 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: 7 bits
y16 (Parity check) 0: None (2 stop bits for Modbus RT U) 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0

FUNCTION CODES
1: Even parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
2: Odd parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
3: None (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
y17 (Stop bits) 0: 2 bits 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
1: 1 bit
y18 (No-response error detection time) 0: No detection 1 s Y Y 0
1 to 60
y19 (Response interval) 0.00 to 1.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.01
y20 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RT U protocol 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
y98 Bus Link Function (Mode selection) Frequency command Run command 㧙 㧙 Y Y 0 9-93
0: Follow H30 data Follow H30 data 9-123
1: Via field bus option Follow H30 data
2: Follow H30 data Via field bus option
3: Via field bus option Via field bus option
y99 Loader Link Function (Mode selection) ‫ޓ‬ Frequency command Run command 㧙 㧙 Y N 0 9-123
0: Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data
1: Via RS-485 link (Loader) Follow H30 and y98 data
2: Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS-485 link (Loader)
3: Via RS-485 link (Loader) Via RS-485 link (Loader)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-13
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes
This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC-Multi series
of inverters. In each code group, its function codes are arranged in an ascending order of the identifying
numbers for ease of access. Note that function codes closely related each other for the implementation of
an inverter's operation are detailed in the description of the function code having the youngest
identifying number. Those related function codes are indicated in the right end of the title bar.

9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions)

F00 Data Protection

F00 specifies whether to protect function code data (except F00) and digital reference data
(such as frequency command, PID command and timer operation) from accidentally getting
changed by pressing the / keys.
Data for F00 Function
0 Disable both data protection and digital reference protection,
allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with
the / keys.
1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection,
allowing you to change digital reference data with the / keys. But you
cannot change function code data (except F00).
2 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection,
allowing you to change function code data with the / keys. But you
cannot change digital reference data.
3 Enable both data protection and digital reference protection,
not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the
/ keys.

Enabling the protection disables the / keys to change function code data.
To change F00 data, simultaneous keying of + (from 0 to 1) or + (from 1 to 0)
keys is required.
Even when F00 = 1 or 3, function code data can be changed via the communications
link.
For similar purposes, WE-KP, a signal enabling editing of function code data from
the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals. (Refer to
the descriptions of E01 through E05.)

F01 Frequency Command 1 C30 (Frequency Command 2)

F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2,
respectively.
Data for
Function
F01, C30
0 Enable / keys on the keypad.
(Refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD.")
1 Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to r10 VDC, maximum frequency
obtained at r10 VDC).
2 Enable the current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (+4 to +20 mA DC,
maximum frequency obtained at +20 mA DC).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-14
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Data for
Function
F01, C30
3 Enable the sum of voltage (0 to +10 VDC) and current inputs (+4 to +20 mA
DC) given to terminals [12] and [C1] (C1 function), respectively. See the two
items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum
frequencies.
Note: If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency (F03/A01), the maximum
frequency will apply.
5 Enable the voltage input to terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to +10 VDC,
maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC).
7 Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals.
The UP command (data = 17) and DOWN command (data = 18) should be
assigned to the digital input terminals [X1] to [X5].
11 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal (BCD) code or binary data
entered via the DIO interface card (option).
For details, refer to the DIO Interface Card Instruction Manual.
12 Enable the pulse train entered via the PG interface card (option).
For details, refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual.
• To input bipolar analog voltage (0 to r10 VDC) to terminal [12], set function
code C35 to "0." Setting C35 to "1" enables the voltage range from 0 to +10 VDC
and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to -10 VDC as 0 V.
• Terminal [C1] can be used for current input (C1 function) or voltage input (V2
function) depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and
function code E59.
• In addition to the frequency command sources described above, higher priority
command sources including communications link and multi-frequency are

Chap. 9
provided.

• Using the terminal command Hz2/Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input
terminals switches between frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency

FUNCTION CODES
command 2 (C30). Refer to function codes E01 to E05.

F02 Operation Method

F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor.
Data for F02 Run Command Source Description
0 Keypad Enables the / keys to run and stop the motor.
(Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by
specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV.
command)
1 External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run the
motor.
2 Keypad Enables / keys to run and stop the motor. Note
(Forward rotation) that this run command enables only the forward
rotation.
There is no need to specify the rotation direction.
3 Keypad Enables / keys to run and stop the motor. Note
(Reverse rotation) that this run command enables only the reverse
rotation.
There is no need to specify the rotation direction.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-15
 • When function code F02 = 0 or 1, the "Run forward" FWD and "Run reverse"
REV terminal commands must be assigned to terminals [FWD] and [REV],
respectively.
• When the FWD or REV is ON, the F02 data cannot be changed.
• When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal [FWD] or [REV] with F02 being
set to "1," be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand; otherwise, the
motor may unintentionally rotate.
• In addition to the run command sources described above, higher priority
command sources including communications link are provided.

F03 Maximum Frequency 1 A01 (Maximum Frequency 2)

F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency. Specifying the maximum
frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a
dangerous situation. Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment
rating.

The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting,
carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing
F15 data specifying a frequency limiter (high).

F04 Base Frequency 1 H50 (Non-linear V/f Pattern 1, Frequency)

A02 (Base Frequency 2)

F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 H51 (Non-linear V/f Pattern 1, Voltage)
A03 (Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2)

F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H52 (Non-linear V/f Pattern 2, Frequency)

H53 (Non-linear V/f Pattern 2, Voltage)
A04 (Maximum Output Voltage 2)

These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency
essentially required for running the motor properly. If combined with the related function codes
H50 through H53, these function codes may profile the non-linear V/f pattern by specifying
increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V/f pattern.
The following description includes setups required for the non-linear V/f pattern.
At high frequencies, the motor impedance may increase, resulting in an insufficient output
voltage and a decrease in output torque. This feature is used to increase the voltage with the
maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening. Note, however, that you
cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter’s input power.
„ Base Frequency 1 (F04)㩷
Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
„ Rated Voltage at Base Frequency (F05)㩷
Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
- If 0 is set, the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the
inverter. The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage.
- If the data is set to anything other than 0, the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage
constant in line with the setting. When any of the auto torque boost settings, auto energy
saving or slip compensation is active, the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage
of the motor.
9-16
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Non-linear V/f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency (H50 and H52)

Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
(Setting 0.0 to H50 or H52 disables the non-linear V/f pattern operation.)
„ Non-linear V/f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage (H51 and H53)
Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
„ Maximum Output Voltage (F06)㩷
Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 (F03).

• If F05 (Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1) is set to "0," settings of H50 through
H53 and F06 do not take effect. (When the non-linear point is below the base
frequency, the linear V/f pattern applies; when it is above, the output voltage is
kept constant.)
• When the auto torque boost (F37) is enabled, the non-linear V/f pattern takes no
effect.

Examples:
„ Normal (linear) V/f pattern

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
„ V/f pattern with two non-linear points

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-17
F07 Acceleration Time 1 E10 (Acceleration Time 2)

F08 Deceleration Time 1 E11 (Deceleration Time 2)

F07 specifies the acceleration time, the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the
maximum frequency. F08 specifies the deceleration time, the length of time the frequency
decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz.

• If you choose S-curve acceleration/deceleration or curvilinear acceleration/

deceleration in Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern (H07), the actual
acceleration/deceleration times are longer than the specified times. Refer to the
description of H07 for details.
• Specifying an improperly short acceleration/deceleration time may activate the
current limiter, torque limiter, or anti-regenerative control, resulting in a longer
acceleration/deceleration time than the specified one.
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07/F08) and acceleration/deceleration time 2
(E10/E11) are switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital
input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05.

F09 Torque Boost 1 F37 (Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/

Auto Energy Saving Operation 1)
A05 (Torque Boost 2)

F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy saving operation for optimizing
the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load. F09 specifies the type of torque
boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque.
Data for V/f pattern Torque boost Auto energy Applicable load
F37 (F09) saving
0 Variable Variable torque load increasing in
torque V/f Torque boost proportion to square of speed
pattern specified by (General purpose fans and
F09 pumps)
Disable
1 Constant torque load
Linear V/f Constant torque load
2 pattern Auto torque
(To be selected if a motor may be
boost
over-excited at no load.)
3 Variable Variable torque load increasing in
torque V/f Torque boost proportion to square of speed
pattern specified by (General purpose fans and
F09 pumps)
Enable
4 Constant torque load
Linear V/f Constant torque load
5 pattern Auto torque
(To be selected if a motor may be
boost
over-excited at no load.)
Note: If a required "load torque + acceleration toque" is more than 50% of the rated torque, it is recommended
to select the linear V/f pattern (factory default).
9-18
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ V/f characteristics
The FRENIC-Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V/f patterns and torque boosts, which
include V/f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for
special pump load requiring high starting torque. Two types of torque boost are available:
manual and automatic.

Variable torque V/f pattern (F37 = 0) Linear V/f pattern (F37 = 1)

When the variable torque V/f pattern is selected (F37 = 0 or 3), the output voltage
may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the
motor at a low frequency zone, depending on some characteristics of the motor
itself and load. In such a case, it is recommended to increase the output voltage at
the low frequency zone using the non-linear V/f pattern.

Recommended value: H50 = 1/10 of the base frequency

H51 = 1/10 of the voltage at base frequency

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-19
 „ Torque boost
• Manual torque boost (F09)
In torque boost using F09, constant voltage is added to the basic V/f pattern, regardless of the
load, to give the output voltage. To secure a sufficient starting torque, manually adjust the
output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09. Specify an appropriate
level that guarantees smooth start-up and yet does not cause over-excitation with no or light
load.
Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant
regardless of the load fluctuation.
Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05). At factory
shipment, F09 is preset to a level that provides approx. 100% of starting torque.
Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque, but may cause
overcurrent due to over-excitation at no load. If you continue to drive the motor, it
may overheat. To avoid such a situation, adjust torque boost to an appropriate level.
When the non-linear V/f pattern and the torque boost are used together, the torque
boost takes effect below the frequency on the non-linear V/f pattern’s point.

• Auto torque boost

This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under
light load, auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from
over-excitation. Under heavy load, it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of
the motor.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency 1 (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other
pertinent motor parameters (P01 through P03 and P06 through P99) in line with
the motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning (P04).
• When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity, the
maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable.
In such cases, do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per
F09 (F37 = 0 or 1).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-20
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Auto energy saving operation

This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power
loss of motor and inverter. (Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the
motor or load characteristics. Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this
feature to your power system.)
This feature applies to constant speed operation only. During acceleration/deceleration, the
inverter will run with manual torque boost (F09) or auto torque boost, depending on the F37
data. If auto energy saving operation is enabled, the response to a change in motor speed may be
slow. Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration/
deceleration.
• Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower. If the
base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher, you may get a little or no energy saving
advantage. The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the
frequency lower than the base frequency. If the frequency becomes higher than
the base frequency, the auto energy saving operation will be invalid.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency 1 (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other
pertinent motor parameters (P01 through P03 and P06 through P99) in line with
the motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning (P04).

F10 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1

(Select motor characteristics) A06 (Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for
Motor 2, Select motor characteristics)

F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1

Chap. 9
(Overload detection level) A07 (Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for
Motor 2, Overload detection level)

F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1

FUNCTION CODES
(Thermal time constant) A08 (Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for
Motor 2, Thermal time constant)

F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal
overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter.
F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics, F11 specifies the
overload detection current, and F12 specifies the thermal time constant.
Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the
overload early warning. Even if you need only the overload early warning, set these
characteristics data to these function codes. To disable the electronic thermal
overload protection, set function code F11 to "0.00."

„ Select motor characteristics (F10)㩷

F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor--shaft-driven or separately powered cooling
fan.

Data for F10 Function

1 For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan
(The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation.)
2 For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with separately
powered cooling fan
(The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency.)

9-21
 The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection
when F10 = 1. The characteristic factors D1 through D3 as well as their corresponding output
frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor. The tables below list the factors
of the motor selected by P99 (Motor 1 Selection).

Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft-driven Cooling Fan

Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 (Motor 1 Selection) = 0 or 4

Nominal Thermal time Output current Output frequency for Characteristic factor
applied constant W for setting the motor characteristic factor (%)
motor (Factory thermal time
(HP) default) constant (Imax) f2 f3 D1 D2 D3

1/8 to 1 75 85 100
7 Hz
2 to 5 85 85 100
Rated current
7.5 to 15 5 min 5 Hz 6 Hz 90 95 100
u 150%
20 7 Hz 85 85 100
25, 30 5 Hz 92 100 100

Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 (Motor 1 Selection) = 1 or 3

Nominal Thermal time Output current Output frequency for Characteristic factor
applied constant W for setting the motor characteristic factor (%)
motor (Factory thermal time
(HP) default) constant (Imax) f2 f3 D1 D2 D3

Base Base
Rated current
1/8 to 30 5 min frequency frequency 69 90 90
u 150%
u 33% u 33%

„ Overload detection level (F11)

F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated.
In general, set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency (i.e. 1.0 to
1.1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 (P03)). To disable the electronic thermal overload
protection, set F11 to "0.00: Disable."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-22
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Thermal time constant (F12)㩷

F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor. If the current of 150% of the overload
detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12, the electronic thermal
overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload. The thermal time constant
for general-purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx. 5 minutes by factory default.
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (minutes) in increments of 0.1 (minute)

(Example) When the F12 data is set at "5.0" (5 minutes)

As shown below, the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm
condition (alarm code N ) when the output current of 150% of the overload detection level
(specified by F11) flows for 5 minutes, and 120% for approx. 12.5 minutes.
The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the
value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current
(100%) until it reaches 150% of the overload detection level.

Example of Operating Characteristics

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-23
 F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode selection)
H13 (Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Restart time)
H14 (Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Frequency
fall rate)
H16 (Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Allowable
momentary power failure time)

F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a
momentary power failure.
„ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Mode selection) (F14)
Data for F14 Mode Description
0 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
(Trip immediately) undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
failure, the inverter issues undervoltage alarm NWand
shuts down its output so that the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state.
1 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
(Trip after recovery undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
from power failure) failure, the inverter shuts down its output so that the
motor enters a coast-to-stop state, but it does not enter the
undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm NW.
The moment the power is restored, an undervoltage alarm
NW is issued, while the motor remains in a coast-to-stop
state.
4 Enable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
(Restart at the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
frequency at which failure, the inverter saves the output frequency being
the power failure applied at that time and shuts down the output so that the
occurred, for general motor enters a coast-to-stop state.
loads) If a run command has been input, restoring power restarts
the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last
power failure processing.
This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of
inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly,
such as fans, even after the motor enters a coast-to-stop
state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure.
5 Enable restart After a momentary power failure, restoring power and
(Restart at the then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the
starting frequency, starting frequency specified by function code F23.
for low-inertia load) This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as
pumps, having a small moment of inertia, in which the
motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it
enters a coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a
momentary power failure.
When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure, the auto search mode can
apply, which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without
stopping it. Refer to H09.

If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 4 or 5),
the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored. Design the
machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
Otherwise an accident could occur.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-24
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Basic operation)

The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link
bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level, while the inverter is running. If the
load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short,
the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized, and
the motor may continue to run uninterrupted.
Upon recognizing a momentary power failure, the inverter enters the restart mode (after a
recovery from momentary power failure) and prepares for restart. When power is restored, the
inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready-to-run state. When a
momentary power failure occurs, the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay
sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command off. In consideration of such a
situation, the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a
ready-to-run state. If a run command is received within 2 seconds, the inverter begins the restart
processing in accordance with the F14 data (Mode selection). If no run command has been
received within 2-second wait period, the inverter cancels the restart mode (after a recovery
from momentary power failure) and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting
frequency. Therefore, ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of
power, or install a mechanical latch relay.
When run commands are entered via the keypad, the above operation is also necessary for the
mode (F02 = 0) in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command, FWD
or REV. In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed (F02 = 2 or 3), it is retained inside
the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready-to-run state.

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

• When the power is restored, the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run
command. However, if the allowable momentary power failure time (H16)
elapses after the power failure was recognized, even within the 2 seconds, the
restart time for a run command is canceled. The inverter will start operation in
the normal starting sequence.
• If the "Coast to a stop" terminal command BX is entered during the power
failure, the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running
mode. If a run command is entered with power supply applied, the inverter will
start from the normal starting frequency.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-25
 During a momentary power failure, the motor slows down. After power is restored, the inverter
restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure. Then, the current limiting
function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases. When the
output frequency matches the motor speed, the motor accelerates up to the original output
frequency. See the figure below. In this case, the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be
enabled (H12 = 1).

„ Restart mode after momentary power failure

(Allowable momentary power failure time) (H16)
H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration (0.0 to 30.0 seconds) from an occurrence of a
momentary power failure (undervoltage) until the inverter is to be restarted. Specify the
coast-to-stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated.
If the power is restored within the specified duration, the inverter restarts in the restart mode
specified by F14. If the power is restored after the specified duration, the inverter recognizes
that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts (normal starting).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-26
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

If H16 (Allowable momentary power failure time) is set to "999," restart will take place until
the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary
power failure (50 V for 230 V class series and 100 V for 460 V class series). If the DC link bus
voltage drops below the allowable voltage, the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut
down so that it does not restart but starts (normal starting).

The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of
undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary
power failure, greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity, the presence of
options, and other factors.

„ Auto-restart after momentary power failure (Restart time) (H13)

H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter
reacts for restarting process.
If the inverter starts the motor while motor’s residual voltage is still in a high level, a large
inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary
regeneration. For safety, therefore, it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will
take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level. Note that even when power
is restored, restart will not take place until the restart time (H13) has elapsed.

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
Factory default
By factory default, H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter
capacity. Basically, you do not need to change H13 data. However, if the long restart time
causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem, you might as
well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value. In such a case, make sure that no
alarm occurs.

Inverter capacity
Factory default of H13 (Restart time in seconds)
(kW)
0.1 to 7.5 0.5
11 to 15 1.0

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-27
 „ Restart after momentary power failure (Frequency fall rate) (H14)
During restart after a momentary power failure, if the inverter output frequency and the idling
motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other, an overcurrent will flow, activating the
overcurrent limiter. If it happens, the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling
motor speed according to the reduction rate (Frequency fall rate: Hz/s) specified by H14.

Data for H14 Inverter’s action for the output frequency fall
0.00 Follow the deceleration time specified by F08
0.01 to 100.00 (Hz/s) Follow data specified by H14
Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter (of the
999 current limit control block shown in Figure 4.3.1 in Section 4.4).
(The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter.)

If the frequency fall rate is too high, regeneration may take place at the moment the
motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency, causing an overvoltage trip.
On the contrary, if the frequency fall rate is too low, the time required for the
output frequency to match the motor speed (duration of current limiting action)
may be prolonged, triggering the inverter overload prevention control.

F15 Frequency Limiter (High)

F16 Frequency Limiter (Low) H63 (Low Limiter, Mode selection)

F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency, respectively.
H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low
level specified by F16, as follows:
• If H63 = 0, the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16.
• If H63 = 1, the inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

(H63 = 0)

(H63 = 1)
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-28
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

• When you change the frequency limiter (High) (F15) in order to raise the
reference frequency, be sure to change the maximum frequency (F03/A01)
accordingly.
• Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control:
F15 > F16, F15 > F23/A12, and F15 > F25
F03/A01 > F16
where, F23/A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency.
If you specify any wrong data for these function codes, the inverter may not run
the motor at the desired speed, or cannot start it normally.

F18 Bias (Frequency command 1) C50, C32, C34, C37, C39, C42 and C44
(Bias base point, Gain, and Gain base point)

When any analog input for frequency command 1 (F01) is used, it is possible to define the
relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and
adding the bias specified by F18.

Gain Bias
Analog input Function code Data setting Function code Data setting
range (%) range (%)
Terminal [12] C32: Gain 0.00 to 200.00
C34: Gain base point 0.00 to 100.00 F18: Bias -100.00 to 100.00
Terminal [C1] C37: Gain 0.00 to 200.00

Chap. 9
(C1 function)
C39: Gain base point 0.00 to 100.00
C50: Bias base
Terminal [C1] C42: Gain 0.00 to 200.00 0.00 to 100.00
point
(V2 function)

FUNCTION CODES
C44: Gain base point 0.00 to 100.00

„ In the case of unipolar input (Terminal [12] with C35 = 1, terminal [C1] (C1 function) or
terminal [C1] (V2 function))
As shown in the graph below, the relationship between the analog input and the reference
frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points "A" and "B." Point "A" is
defined by the combination of the bias (F18) and its base point (C50); Point "B," by the
combination of the gain (C32, C37 or C42) and its base point (C34, C39 or C44).
The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal [12], that of C37 and C39, to [C1] (C1
function), and that of C42 and C44, to [C1] (V2 function).
Configure the bias (F18) and gain (C32, C37 or C42), assuming the maximum frequency as
100%, and the bias base point (C50) and gain base point (C34, C39 or C44), assuming the full
scale (10 VDC or 20 mA DC) of analog input as 100%.
• The analog input less than the bias base point (C50) is limited by the bias value
(F18).
• Specifying that the data of the bias base point (C50) is equal to or greater than
that of each gain base point (C34, C39 or C44) will be interpreted as invalid, so
the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-29
 Example: Setting the bias, gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100%
follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal [12] (in frequency command 1).

(Point A)
To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V, set the bias to 0% (F18
= 0). Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10% of 10 V (full scale), set the bias base
point to 10% (C50 = 10).
(Point B)
To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at
5 V, set the gain to 100% (C32 = 100). Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50% of
10 V (full scale), set the gain base point to 50% (C34 = 50).
The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base
points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S series, FVR-E11S series, etc.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-30
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ In the case of bipolar input (Terminal [12] with C35 = 0)

Setting C35 to "0" enables terminal [12] to be used for bipolar input (-10 V to +10 V).
When both F18 (Bias) and C50 (Bias base point) are set to "0," the negative and positive
voltage inputs produce reference frequencies symmetric about the origin point as shown below.

Configuring F18 (Bias) and C50 (Bias base point) to specify an arbitrary value (Points A1, A2,
and A3) gives the bias as shown below.

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-31
F20 DC Braking 1 (Braking starting frequency)
H95 (DC Braking, Braking response mode)
A09 (DC Braking 2, Braking starting frequency)

F21 DC Braking 1 (Braking level) A10 (DC Braking 2, Braking level)

F22 DC Braking 1 (Braking time) A11 (DC Braking 2, Braking time)

F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during
decelerate-to-stop operation.
If the motor enters a decelerate-to-stop operation by turning off the run command or by
decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency, the inverter activates the DC
braking by flowing a current at the braking level (F21) during the braking time (F22) when the
output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency (F20).
Setting the braking time to "0.0" (F22 = 0) disables the DC braking.
„ Braking starting frequency (F20)㩷
F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor
decelerate-to-stop state.
„ Braking level (F21)㩷
F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated. The
function code data should be set, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100%, in
increments of 1%.
„ Braking time (F22)㩷
F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking.
„ Braking response mode (H95)㩷
H95 specifies the DC braking response mode.
Data for H95 Characteristics Note
0 Slow response. Slows the rising edge Insufficient braking torque may result
of the current, thereby preventing at the start of DC braking.
reverse rotation at the start of DC
braking.
1 Quick response. Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result
edge of the current, thereby depending on the moment of inertia
accelerating the build-up of the of the mechanical load and the
braking torque. coupling mechanism.

9-32
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an "Enable DC braking"

terminal command DCBRK.
As long as the DCBRK command is ON, the inverter performs DC braking,
regardless of the braking time specified by F22.
Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state
activates DC braking. This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting,
resulting in smoother acceleration (quicker build-up of acceleration torque).

In general, specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip
frequency of motor. If you set it at an extremely high value, control may become
unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases.

The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.

F23 Starting Frequency 1 A12 (Starting Frequency 2)

F24 Starting Frequency 1 (Holding time)

F25 Stop Frequency F39 (Stop Frequency, Holding time)

At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1
specified by F23. The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop
frequency specified by F25.

Chap. 9
Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup.
Generally, set the motor's rated slip frequency as the starting frequency.
In addition, F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate

FUNCTION CODES
for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor. F39 specifies the
holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the motor.
If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter will not
output any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop
frequency.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-33
 F26 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency)

F27 Motor Sound (Tone)

„ Motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26)

F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or
electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the main
output (secondary) wirings.

Carrier frequency 0.75 to 15 kHz

Motor sound noise emission High l Low
Motor temperature (due to harmonics components) High l Low
Ripples in output current waveform Large l Small
Leakage current Low l High
Electromagnetic noise emission Low l High
Inverter loss Low l High

Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to
have a large amount of ripples. As a result, the motor loss increases, causing the
motor temperature to rise. Furthermore, the large amount of ripples tends to cause a
current limiting alarm. When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below,
therefore, reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80% or less
of the rated current.
When a high carrier frequency is specified, the temperature of the inverter may rise
due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load. If it happens, the
inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter
overload alarm NW . With consideration for motor noise, the automatic reduction
of carrier frequency can be disabled. Refer to the description of H98.

„ Motor sound (Tone) (F27)

F27 changes the motor running sound tone. This setting is effective when the carrier frequency
set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may reduce the high and
harsh running noise from the motor.
If the sound level is set too high, the output current may become unstable, or
mechanical vibration and noise may increase. Also, these function codes may not be
very effective for certain types of motor.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-34
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

F29 Analog Output [FM] (Mode selection)

F30 Analog Output [FM] (Voltage adjustment)

F31 Analog Output [FM] (Function)

F33 Analog Output [FM] (Pulse rate)

These function codes allow terminal [FM] to output monitored data such as the output
frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or pulse (pulse duty: approximately
50%). The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable.

„ Mode selection (F29)

F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal [FM]. You need to set switch SW6 on the
interface printed circuit board (PCB). Refer to the FRENIC-Multi Instruction Manual, Chapter
2 "Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter."
Position of slide switch SW6
Data for F29 Output form
mounted on the interface PCB
0 Voltage (0 to +10 VDC)
FMA
(FMA function)
2 Pulse (0 to 6000 p/s)
FMP
(FMP function)

„ Voltage adjustment (F30) dedicated to FMA

F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected

Chap. 9
by F31 within the range of 0 to 300%.

FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-35
 „ Function (F31)㩷
F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal [FM].

Data Function Meter scale

[FM] output
for F31 (Monitor the following) (Full scale at 100%)
Output frequency of the
Output frequency inverter Maximum frequency
0 (before slip
(Equivalent to the motor (F03/A01)
compensation)
synchronous speed)
Output frequency
Output frequency of the Maximum frequency
1 (after slip
inverter (F03/A01)
compensation)
Output current (RMS) of the
2 Output current Twice the inverter rated current
inverter
Output voltage (RMS) of 250 V for 230 V,
3 Output voltage
the inverter 500 V for 460 V
4 Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque
Load factor
5 Load factor (Equivalent to the indication Twice the rated motor load
of the load meter)
Twice the rated output of the
6 Input power Input power of the inverter
inverter
PID feedback Feedback amount under
7 100% of the feedback amount
amount (PV) PID control
Feedback value of closed
Maximum speed
8 PG feedback value loop control through the PG
(100% of the feedback value)
interface
DC link bus DC link bus voltage of the 500 V for 230 V,
9
voltage inverter 1000 V for 460 V
Command via
communications link
10 Universal AO (Refer to the RS-485 20000 as 100%
Communication User's
Manual.)
13 Motor output Motor output (kW) Twice the rated motor output
Full scale output of the This always outputs the
14 Calibration
meter calibration full-scale (100%).
PID command Command value under PID
15 100% of the feedback amount
(SV) control
Output level of the PID
Maximum frequency
16 PID output (MV) controller under PID control
(F03/A01)
(Frequency command)

If F31 = 16 (PID output), J01 = 3 (Dancer control), and J62 = 2 or 3 (Ratio

compensation enabled), the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary
reference frequency and may vary within r300% of the frequency. The monitor
displays the PID output in a converted absolute value. To indicate the value up to
the full-scale of 300%, set F30 data to "33" (%).

„ Pulse rate (F33) dedicated to FMP㩷

F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches
100%, in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-36
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

F37 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 1

F09 (Torque Boost 1)
A13 (Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 2)

Refer to the descriptions of function code F09.

F39 Stop Frequency (Holding time) F25 (Stop Frequency)

Refer to the description of function code F25.

F40 Torque Limiter 1 (Limiting level for driving)

E16 (Torque Limiter 2, Limiting level for driving)

F41 Torque Limiter 1 (Limiting level for braking)

E17 (Torque Limiter 2, Limiting level for braking)

If the inverter’s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter
(F40/E16) and the braking torque limiter (F41/E17), the inverter controls the output frequency
and limits the output torque for preventing a stall.
Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated, as the percentage of
the motor rated torque.

To switch the inverter’s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 (F40/F41)
and torque limiter 2 (E16/E17), use the terminal command TL2/TL1 assigned to a
digital input terminal. (Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05.)

Chap. 9
The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other. If both
are activated concurrently, they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the
system. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.

FUNCTION CODES
F42 Control Mode Selection 1 H68 (Slip Compensation 1, Operating conditions)
A14 (Control Mode Selection 2)

F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor.

Data for F42 Control mode

0 V/f control with slip compensation active
1 Dynamic torque vector control
2 V/f control with slip compensation active
3 V/f control with optional PG interface
4 Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface

„ V/f control㩷
In this control, the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V/f
pattern specified by function codes.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-37
 „ Slip compensation㩷
Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics,
decreasing the motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip
value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to
compensate for the decrease in motor rotation. This prevents the motor from decreasing the
rotation due to the slip.
That is, this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy.
The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 (Rated slip
frequency), P09 (Slip compensation gain for driving)) and P11 (Slip compensation gain for
braking).
H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving
conditions.

Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone

Data for
H68 Base frequency or Above the base
Accl/Decel Constant speed
below frequency
0 Enable Enable Enable Enable
1 Disable Enable Enable Enable
2 Enable Enable Enable Disable
3 Disable Enable Enable Disable

„ Dynamic torque vector control㩷

To get the maximal torque out of a motor, this control calculates the motor torque for the load
applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output.
Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation
function and disables auto energy saving operation. Using the PG feedback speed control at
same time, however, also disables the slip compensation function.
This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and
the motor speed control accuracy.

„ PG speed feedback control (PG interface)㩷

This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generator (PG) interface card.
It uses the speed feedback from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with high
accuracy.
In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control, the inverter uses the
motor parameters to control its speed. Therefore, the following conditions should
be satisfied; if not, the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor.
• A single motor should be controlled. (It is difficult to apply this control to a
group motor driving system.)
• Motor parameters P02, P03 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are
fully auto-tuned.
• The rating of the motor to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of
the inverter. If not, the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers,
causing it difficult to accurately control the motor.
• The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not
exceed 164 ft (50 m) in length. A long wiring run could not suppress the earth
leakage current since the cable's electrostatic capacitance against the earth
increases, causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-38
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

F43 Current Limiter (Mode selection)

F44 Current Limiter (Level)

When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter (F44),
the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output
current. (Refer to the description of function code H12.)
If F43 = 1, the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation. If F43 = 2, the
current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation. Choose F43
= 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output
current during constant speed operation.
„ Mode selection (F43)㩷
F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active.

Running states that enable the current limiter

Data for F43
During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration
0 Disable Disable Disable
1 Disable Enable Disable
2 Enable Enable Disable

„ Level (F44)㩷
F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated, in ratio
to the inverter rating.
• Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it

Chap. 9
may cause a delay in control. If you need a quick response, specify a current limit
operation by hardware (H12 = 1) at the same time.
• If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set

FUNCTION CODES
extremely low, the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency. This may
cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to
undershooting.
• The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other. If both
are activated concurrently, they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in
the system. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.

F50 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor

(Discharging capability)

F51 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor

(Allowable average loss)

These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking
resistor.
Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss, respectively.
Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor, as listed on the
following pages.
Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor, the
electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the
overheat protection alarm FDJ even if the actual temperature rise is not enough. If
it happens, review the relationship between the performance index of the braking
resistor and settings of related function codes.
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-39
 The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking
resistor. These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models.

„ External Braking Resistors㩷

Standard models
The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the
motor for overheat, so assign an "Enable external alarm trip" terminal command THR to any of
digital input terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] and connect that terminal and its
common terminal to braking resistor's terminals 2 and 1.
To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the
braking resistor, configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and
F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below,
respectively.
Intermittent braking
Continuous braking
Braking resistor (Period: Less than
Power (100% braking torque)
Resistance 100s)
supply Inverter type
(:) Discharging Braking Allowable
voltage Duty
Type Qty. capability time average
(%ED)
(kWs) (s) loss (kW)
FRNF12E1S-2U
90 0.037 37
FRNF25E1S-2U 9
DB0.75-2 100
FRNF50E1S-2U 0.044 22
FRN001E1S-2U 17 45 0.068 18
Three- FRN002E1S-2U 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-2 40
phase FRN003E1S-2U 33 30 0.077 7
230 V FRN005E1S-2U DB3.7-2 33 37 0.093
20
FRN007E1S-2U DB5.5-2 20 55 0.138
FRN010E1S-2U DB7.5-2 15 37 0.188 5
FRN015E1S-2U DB11-2 10 55 10 0.275
FRN020E1S-2U DB15-2 8.6 75 0.375
FRNF50E1S-4U 9 0.044 22
DB0.75-4 200
FRN001E1S-4U 17 45 0.068 18
1
FRN002E1S-4U 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-4 160
Three- FRN003E1S-4U 33 30 0.077 7
phase FRN005E1S-4U DB3.7-4 130 37 0.093
20
460 V FRN007E1S-4U DB5.5-4 80 55 0.138
FRN010E1S-4U DB7.5-4 60 38 0.188 5
FRN015E1S-4U DB11-4 40 55 10 0.275
FRN020E1S-4U DB15-4 34.4 75 0.375
FRNF12E1S-7U
90 0.037 37
Single- FRNF25E1S-7U 9
DB0.75-2 100
phase FRNF50E1S-7U 0.044 22
230 V FRN001E1S-7U 17 45 0.068 18
FRN002E1S-7U 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-2 40
FRN003E1S-7U 33 30 0.077 7
㩷

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-40
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

㩷
10% ED models

Intermittent braking
Continuous braking
Braking resistor (Period: Less than
Power (100% braking torque)
Resistance 100s)
supply Inverter type
(:) Discharging Braking Allowable
voltage Duty
Type Qty. capacity time average
(%ED)
(kWs) (s) loss (kW)
FRNF12E1S-2U 1000 100
FRNF25E1S-2U 500 75
DB0.75-2C 100 50 0.075
FRNF50E1S-2U 250 37
FRN001E1S-2U 133 20
Three- FRN002E1S-2U 73 14
DB2.2-2C 40 55 0.110
phase FRN003E1S-2U 50
230 V FRN005E1S-2U DB3.7-2C 33 140 75 0.185
FRN007E1S-2U DB5.5-2C 20 55 20 0.275
10
FRN010E1S-2U DB7.5-2C 15 37 0.375
FRN015E1S-2U DB11-2C 10 55 10 0.55
FRN020E1S-2U DB15-2C 8.6 75 0.75
FRNF50E1S-4U 250 37
DB0.75-4C 200 50 0.075
FRN001E1S-4U 133 20
1
FRN002E1S-4U 73 14
DB2.2-4C 160 55 0.110
Three- FRN003E1S-4U 50

Chap. 9
phase FRN005E1S-4U DB3.7-4C 130 140 75 0.185
460 V FRN007E1S-4U DB5.5-4C 80 55 20 0.275
10
FRN010E1S-4U DB7.5-4C 60 38 0.375

FUNCTION CODES
FRN015E1S-4U DB11-4C 40 55 10 0.55
FRN020E1S-4U DB15-4C 34.4 75 0.75
FRNF12E1S-7U 1000 100
Single- FRNF25E1S-7U 500 75
DB0.75-2C 100 50 0.075
phase FRNF50E1S-7U 250 37
230 V FRN001E1S-7U 133 20
FRN002E1S-7U 73 14
DB2.2-2C 40 55 0.110
FRN003E1S-7U 50 10

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-41
 Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking
resistor and configuring the function code data
When using a braking resistor other than the ones listed in the above table, calculate data to be
set to function codes according to the tables and expressions.

„ Discharging capability (F50)

The discharging capability refers to kWs allowable for a single braking cycle, which is obtained
by the following expressions "(1) Regeneration power during deceleration" and "(2)
Regeneration power at a constant speed," based on the braking time and motor rating.
Data for F50 Function
0 Reserved.
1 to 900 1 to 900 (kWs)
999 Disable the electronic thermal overload protection facility

During deceleration:
Discharging capacity (kWs) = Braking time (s) × Motor rating (kW) (1)
2
At a constant speed:
Discharging capacity (kWs) = Braking time (s) × Motor rating (kW) (2)

„ Allowable average loss (F51)

The allowable average loss refers to resistance allowable for motor continuous operation,
which is obtained by the following expressions "(3) Regeneration power during deceleration"
and "(4) Regeneration power at a constant speed," based on the %ED (%) and motor rating
(kW).
Data for F51 Function
0.000 Reserved.
0.001 to 50.000 0.001 to 50.000 (kW)

During deceleration:
%ED (%)
Allowable average loss (kW) = × Motor rating (kW) (3)
100
2
At a constant speed:
Allowable average loss (kW) = %ED (%) (4)
× Motor rating (kW)
100

When the motor decelerates, apply expressions (1) and (3), and when it runs at a constant speed,
expressions (2) and (4). The obtained data differs depending upon the motor’s running state.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-42
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)

E01 Terminal [X1] Function E98 (Terminal [FWD] Function)

E02 Terminal [X2] Function E99 (Terminal [REV] Function)

E03 Terminal [X3] Function

E04 Terminal [X4] Function

E05 Terminal [X5] Function

Function codes E01 to E05, E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals [X1] to
[X5], [FWD], and [REV] which are general-purpose, programmable, digital input terminals.
These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define
how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal. The default setting is
normal logic system "Active ON." So, explanations that follow are given in normal logic
system "Active ON."

In the case of digital input, you can assign commands to the switching means for the run
command and its operation and the reference frequency (e.g., SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8, Hz2/Hz1,
Hz/PID, IVS, and LE). Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start
(running) or an abrupt change in speed.
An accident or physical injury may result.

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-43
 Function code data
Terminal commands assigned Symbol
Active ON Active OFF
0 1000 SS1
1 1001 SS2
Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps)
2 1002 SS4
3 1003 SS8
4 1004 Select ACC/DEC time RT1
6 1006 Enable 3-wire operation HLD
7 1007 Coast to a stop BX
8 1008 Reset alarm RST
9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR
10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG
11 1011 Select frequency command 2/1 Hz2/Hz1
12 1012 Select motor 2 / motor 1 M2/M1
13 㧙 Enable DC braking DCBRK
14 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2/TL1
17 1017 UP (Increase output frequency) UP
18 1018 DOWN (Decrease output frequency) DOWN
19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE-KP
20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz/PID
21 1021 Switch normal/inverse operation IVS
24 1024 Enable communications link via RS-485 or field bus LE
( i )
25 1025 Universal DI U-DI
26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM
30 1030 Force to stop STOP
33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID-RST
34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID-HLD
42 1042
43 1043
Reserved
44 1044
45 1045
98 – Run forward
(Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV] terminals by FWD
E98 and E99)
99 – Run reverse
(Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV] terminals by REV
E98 and E99)

Any negative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions
marked with "–" in the "Active OFF" column.
The "Enable external alarm trip" and "Force to stop" are fail-safe terminal
commands. For example, when data = 9 in "Enable external alarm trip," "Active
OFF" (alarm is triggered when OFF); when data = 1009, "Active ON" (alarm is
triggered when ON).
9-44
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Terminal function assignment and data setting

„ Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps) -- SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8
(Function code data = 0, 1, 2, and 3)㩷
The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 selects
one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19
(Multi-frequency 0 to 15). With this, the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset
frequencies.
The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1,
SS2, SS4 and SS8. In the "Selected frequency" column, "Other than multi-frequency"
represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 (F01), frequency
command 2 (C30), or others. For details, refer to the block diagram in Section 4.2 "Drive
Frequency Command Block."

SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1 Selected frequency

OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi-frequency

OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multi-frequency 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multi-frequency 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multi-frequency 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (Multi-frequency 4)
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (Multi-frequency 5)
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multi-frequency 6)

Chap. 9
OFF ON ON ON C11 (Multi-frequency 7)
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multi-frequency 8)

FUNCTION CODES
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multi-frequency 9)
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multi-frequency 10)
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multi-frequency 11)
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multi-frequency 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multi-frequency 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 (Multi-frequency 14)
ON ON ON ON C19 (Multi-frequency 15)

„ Select ACC/DEC time -- RT1

(Function code data = 4)㩷
This terminal command switches between ACC/DEC time 1 (F07/F08) and ACC/DEC time 2
(E10/E11).
If no RT1 command is assigned, ACC/DEC time 1 (F07/F08) takes effect by default.

Input terminal command

Acceleration/deceleration time
RT1
OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07/F08)
ON Acceleration/deceleration time 2 (E10/E11)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-45
 „ Enable 3-wire operation -- HLD
(Function code data = 6)
Turning this terminal command ON self-holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command
issued with it, to enable 3-wire inverter operation.
Turning HLD ON self-holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge. Turning HLD
OFF releases the self-holding.
When HLD is not assigned, 2-wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect.

„ Coast to a stop -- BX
(Function code data = 7)㩷㩷
Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the
motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms.

„ Reset alarm -- RST

(Function code data = 8)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state--alarm output (for any fault). Turning
it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state.
When you turn the RST command ON, keep it ON for 10 ms or more. This command should be
kept OFF for the normal inverter operation.

„ Enable external alarm trip -- THR

(Function code data = 9)㩷
Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output (so that the
motor coasts to a stop), displays the alarm J, and outputs the alarm relay (for any fault)
ALM. The THR command is self-held, and is reset when an alarm reset takes place.
Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to
immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a
peripheral equipment.
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-46
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Ready for jogging -- JOG

(Function code data = 10)㩷
This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece.
Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging.
Simultaneous keying + keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command;
however, it is restricted by the run command source as listed below.
When the run command source is the keypad (F02 = 0, 2 or 3):
Input terminal command
+ keys on the keypad Inverter running state
JOG
ON  Ready for jogging
Pressing these keys toggles Normal operation
OFF between the "normal operation"
and "ready for jogging." Ready for jogging

When the run command source is digital input (F02 = 1):

Input terminal command
+ keys on the keypad Inverter running state
JOG
ON Ready for jogging
Disable
OFF Normal operation

Jogging operation
Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging.

Chap. 9
For the jogging by the keypad, the inverter jogs only when the key is held down. Releasing
the key decelerates to stop.
During jogging, the frequency specified by C20 (Jogging Frequency) and the

FUNCTION CODES
acceleration/deceleration time specified by H54 (ACC/DEC Time) apply.
• The inverter’s status transition between "ready for jogging" and "normal
operation" is possible only when the inverter is stopped.
• To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command
(e.g., FWD), the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from
that of the run command. If the delay exceeds 100 ms, the inverter does not jog
the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG.

„ Select frequency command 2/1 -- Hz2/Hz1

(Function code data = 11)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between
frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency command 2 (C30).
If no Hz2/Hz1 terminal command is assigned, the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by
default.

Input terminal command

Frequency command source
Hz2/Hz1
OFF Follow F01 (Frequency command 1)
ON Follow C30 (Frequency command 2)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-47
 „ Select motor 2 / motor 1 -- M2/M1
(Function code data = 12)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2. Switching is possible
only when the inverter is stopped. Upon completion of switching, the digital terminal output
"Switched to motor 2" SWM2 (assigned to any of terminals [Y1], [Y2] and [30A/B/C]) turns
ON.
If no M2/M1 terminal command is assigned, motor 1 is selected by default.
Input terminal command SWM2 status
Selected motor
M2/M1 after completion of switching
OFF Motor 1 OFF
ON Motor 2 ON

Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed
below. The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured.

Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2

Maximum Frequency F03 A01
Base Frequency F04 A02
Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03
Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04
Torque Boost F09 A05
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06
(Select motor characteristics)
(Overload detection level) F11 A07
(Thermal time constant) F12 A08
DC Braking (Braking starting frequency) F20 A09
(Braking level) F21 A10
(Braking time) F22 A11
Starting Frequency F23 A12
Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13
Control Mode Selection F42 A14
Motor (No. of poles) P01 A15
(Rated capacity) P02 A16
(Rated current) P03 A17
(Auto-tuning) P04 A18
(Online tuning) P05 A19
(No-load current) P06 A20
(%R1) P07 A21
(%X) P08 A22
(Slip compensation gain for driving) P09 A23
(Slip compensation response time) P10 A24
(Slip compensation gain for braking) P11 A25
(Rated slip frequency) P12 A26
Motor Selection P99 A39
Slip Compensation (Operating conditions) H68 A40
Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41
Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A45
Startup Times of Motor H44 A46

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-48
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes. Confirm the settings
of those function codes before use.

Functions Restrictions Related function codes

Non-linear V/f pattern Disabled. Linear V/f pattern only H50 to H53
Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not F24
supported.
Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not F39
supported.
Overload early warning Disabled. E34 and E35
Droop control Disabled. H28
UP/DOWN control Disabled. Fixed at default setting 0. H61
PID control Disabled. J01
Braking signal Disabled. J68 to J72
Software current limiter Disabled. F43 and F44
Rotation direction limitation Disabled. H08
Overload stop Disabled. J63 to J67

To run motor 2 with the M2/M1 terminal command and a run command (e.g.,
FWD), the input of the M2/M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of
the run command. If the delay exceeds 10 ms, motor 1 will be driven by default.

„ Enable DC braking -- DCBRK

(Function code data = 13)㩷

Chap. 9
This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter’s digital
input.
(Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking.)

FUNCTION CODES
„ Select torque limiter level -- TL2/TL1
(Function code data = 14)㩷
This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41) and torque limiter 2
(E16 and E17) as listed below.
If no TL2/TL1 terminal command is assigned, torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41) takes effect by
default.
Input terminal command
Torque limiter level
TL2/TL1
OFF Torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41)
ON Torque limiter 2 (E16 and E17)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-49
 „ UP (Increase output frequency) and DOWN (Decrease output frequency) commands --
UP and DOWN
(Function code data = 17, 18)㩷
• Frequency setting
When the UP/DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON, turning
the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease,
respectively, within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below.
UP DOWN
Function
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF Keep the current output frequency.
Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time
ON OFF
currently specified.
Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time
OFF ON
currently specified.
ON ON Keep the current output frequency.

The UP/DOWN control is available in two modes--one mode (H61 = 0) in which the initial
value of the reference frequency is fixed to "0.00" at the start of the UP/DOWN control and the
other mode (H61 = 1) in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP/DOWN
control applies as the initial value.
When H61 = 0, the reference frequency applied by the previous UP/DOWN control has been
cleared to "0," so at the next restart (including powering on), use the UP terminal command to
accelerate the speed as needed.
When H61 = 1, the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP/DOWN
control and applies the held frequency at the next restart (including powering on).
At the time of restart, if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the
internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory, the inverter
saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP/DOWN
control with the new frequency. The previous frequency held will be overwritten by
the current one.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-50
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Initial frequency for the UP/DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched
When the frequency command source is switched to the UP/DOWN control from other sources,
the initial frequency for the UP/DOWN control is as listed below:

Frequency command Initial frequency for UP/DOWN control

Switching command
source
H61 = 0 H61 = 1

Select frequency Reference frequency given by the

Other than UP/DOWN
command 2/1 (Hz2/Hz1) frequency command source used just
(F01, C30)
before switching
Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID
PID conditioner
(Hz/PID) control (PID controller output)
Select multi-frequency Reference Reference
Multi-frequency
(SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8) frequency given by frequency at the
the frequency time of previous
Enable communications command source UP/DOWN
Communications link link via RS-485 or field used just before control
bus (LE) switching

To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands, you need to set frequency
command 1 (F01) or frequency command 2 (C30) to "7" beforehand.

• Changing the PID speed command value

When the UP/DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command, turning the UP or DOWN

Chap. 9
terminal command ON with a run command being ON causes the PID speed command to
change within the range from 0 to 100%.
The PID speed command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities (such as
temperature or pressure) with the PID display coefficients (E40, E41).

FUNCTION CODES
UP DOWN
Function
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF Retain PID speed command value.
Increase PID speed command value at a rate between
ON OFF
0.1%/0.1 s and 1%/0.1 s.
Decrease PID speed command value at a rate between
OFF ON
0.1%/0.1 s and 1%/0.1 s.
ON ON Retain PID speed command value.

Selecting the PID control for process control (J01 = 1 or 2) validates the H61 data as well as
frequency commands. Selecting it for dancer control (J01 = 3) runs the motor with H61 = 1
regardless of the actual H61 data; that is, the inverter internally holds the current PID command
specified by the UP/DOWN control and applies the held PID command at the next restart
(including powering on).
To validate UP and DOWN terminal commands, it is necessary to select the PID
control (Remote command SV) (J02 = 3).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-51
„ Enable data change with keypad -- WE-KP
(Function code data = 19)㩷
Turning this terminal command OFF protects function code data from unintentionally getting
changed with the keypad.
Only when the WE-KP terminal command is ON, you can change function code data with the
keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below.
WE-KP F00 Function
OFF -- Disable changing of all function code data
0 or 2 Enable changing of all function code data
ON
1 or 3 Disable changing of all function code data except F00 data

If no WE-KP terminal command is assigned, the inverter interprets WE-KP as being ON by

default.
• If you mistakenly assign a WE-KP terminal command, you no longer edit or
modify function code data. In such a case, temporarily turn this WE-KP-assigned
terminal ON and reassign the WE-KP terminal command to a correct command.
• WE-KP is only a signal that allows you to change function code data, so it does
not protect the frequency settings or PID speed command specified by the
and keys.

„ Cancel PID control -- Hz/PID

(Function code data = 20)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON disables the PID control.
If the PID control is disabled with this command, the inverter runs the motor with the reference
frequency manually set by any of the multi-frequency, keypad, analog input, etc.

Hz/PID Function
OFF Enable PID control
ON Disable PID control/Enable manual settings

„ Switch normal/inverse operation -- IVS

(Function code data = 21)
This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal (proportional to
the input value) and inverse in PID process control and manual frequency command. To select
the inverse operation, turn the IVS ON.

The normal/inverse switching operation is useful for air-conditioners that require

switching between cooling and heating. In cooling, the speed of the fan motor
(output frequency of the inverter) is increased to lower the temperature. In heating,
it is reduced to lower the temperature. This switching is realized by this IVS
terminal command.
9-52
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

• When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources

(terminals [12] and [C1]):
Switching normal/inverse operation can apply only to the analog frequency command sources
(terminals [12] and [C1]) in frequency command 1 (F01) and does not affect frequency
command 2 (C30) or UP/DOWN control.
As listed below, the combination of the "Selection of normal/inverse operation for frequency
command 1" (C53) and the IVS terminal command determines the final operation.
Combination of C53 and IVS
Data for C53 IVS Final operation
OFF Normal
0: Normal operation
ON Inverse
OFF Inverse
1: Inverse operation
ON Normal

• When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the
inverter:
The "Cancel PID control" terminal command Hz/PID can switch the PID control between
enabled (process is to be controlled by the PID controller) and disabled (process is to be
controlled by the manual frequency setting). In either case, the combination of the "PID
control" (J01) or "Selection of normal/inverse operation for frequency command 1" (C53) and
the IVS command determines the final operation as listed below.
When the PID control is enabled:
The normal/inverse operation selection for the PID controller output (reference frequency) is as

Chap. 9
follows.
PID control (Mode selection) (J01) IVS Final operation
OFF Normal

FUNCTION CODES
1: Enable (normal operation)
ON Inverse
OFF Inverse
2: Enable (inverse operation)
ON Normal

When the PID control is disabled:

The normal/inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency is as follows.
Selection of normal/inverse operation
IVS Final operation
for frequency command 1 (C53)
0: Normal operation – Normal
1: Inverse operation – Inverse

When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the
inverter, the IVS terminal command is used to switch the PID controller output
(reference frequency) between normal and inverse, and has no effect on any
normal/inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-53
 „ Enable communications link via RS-485 or field bus (option) -- LE
(Function code data = 24)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run
commands received via the RS-485 communications link (H30) or the field bus option (y98).
No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON. (Refer to H30
(Communications link function) and y98 (Bus link function.)

„ Universal DI -- U-DI
(Function code data = 25)㩷
Using U-DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment
via an RS-485 communications link or a field bus option by feeding those signals to the digital
input terminals. Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate
the inverter.

For an access to universal DI via the RS-485 or field bus communications link, refer to
their respective Instruction Manuals.

„ Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting -- STM

(Function code data = 26)㩷
This digital terminal command determines, at the start of operation, whether or not to search for
idling motor speed and follow it. Refer to H09 (Starting mode).

„ Force to stop -- STOP

(Function code data = 30)㩷
Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with
the H56 data (Deceleration time for forced stop). After the motor stops, the inverter enters the
alarm state with the alarm GT displayed.

„ Reset PID integral and differential components -- PID-RST

(Function code data = 33)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID
processor.

„ Hold PID integral component -- PID-HLD

(Function code data = 34)㩷
Turning this terminal command ON holds the integral components of the PID processor.

„ Run forward -- FWD㩷

(Function code data = 98)
Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction; turning it OFF
decelerates it to stop.

This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99.

„ Run reverse -- REV㩷

(Function code data = 99)
Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction; turning it OFF
decelerates it to stop.

This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-54
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

E10 Acceleration Time 2 F07 (Acceleration Time 1)

E11 Deceleration Time 2 F08 (Deceleration Time 1)

Refer to the descriptions of function codes F07 and F08.

E16 Torque Limiter 2 (Limiting level for driving)

F40 (Torque Limiter 1, Limiting level for driving)

E17 Torque Limiter 2 (Limiting level for braking)

F41 (Torque Limiter 1, Limiting level for braking)

Refer to the descriptions of function codes F40 and F41.

E20 Terminal [Y1] Function

E21 Terminal [Y2] Function

E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] Function (Relay output)

E20, E21, and E27 assign output signals (listed on the next page) to general-purpose,

Chap. 9
programmable output terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C]. These function codes can also
switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output
terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as
active. The factory default settings are "Active ON."

FUNCTION CODES
Terminals [Y1] and [Y2] are transistor outputs and terminals [30A/B/C] are relay contact
outputs. In normal logic, if an alarm occurs, the relay will be energized so that [30A] and [30C]
will be closed, and [30B] and [30C] opened. In negative logic, the relay will be deenergized so
that [30A] and [30C] will be opened, and [30B] and [30C] closed. This may be useful for the
implementation of failsafe power systems.
• When a negative logic is employed, all output signals are active (e.g. an alarm
would be recognized) while the inverter is powered OFF. To avoid causing
system malfunctions by this, interlock these signals to keep them ON using an
external power supply. Furthermore, the validity of these output signals is not
guaranteed for approximately 1.5 seconds after power-on, so introduce such a
mechanism that masks them during the transient period.
• Terminals [30A/B/C] use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent
ON/OFF switching. Where frequent ON/OFF switching is anticipated (for
example, limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit
control such as switching to commercial power line), use transistor outputs [Y1]
and [Y2] instead. The service life of a relay is approximately 200,000 times if it
is switched on and off at one-second intervals.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-55
 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C].
To make the explanations simpler, the examples shown below are all written for the normal
logic (Active ON.)

Function code data

Functions assigned Symbol
Active ON Active OFF
0 1000 Inverter running RUN
1 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR
2 1002 Frequency detected FDT
3 1003 Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) LU
4 1004 Torque polarity detected B/D
5 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL
6 1006 Auto-restarting after momentary power failure IPF
7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL
10 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY
21 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2
22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2
26 1026 Auto-resetting TRY
28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH
30 1030 Service lifetime alarm LIFE
33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF
35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2
36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP
37 1037 Current detected ID
38 1038 Current detected 2 ID2
42 1042 PID alarm PID-ALM
49 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2
57 1057 Brake signal BRKS
80 1080
81 1081 Reserved (for particular manufacturers)
82 1082
99 1099 Alarm output (for any alarm) ALM

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-56
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Inverter running -- RUN㩷

(Function code data = 0)
This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting
frequency or higher. It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency,
and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency. It is also OFF when the DC braking is in
operation.
If this signal is assigned in negative logic (Active OFF), it can be used as a signal indicating
"Inverter being stopped."

„ Frequency arrival signal -- FAR㩷

(Function code data = 1)
This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference
frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30. (Refer to the
descriptions of E29 and E30.)

„ Frequency detected -- FDT㩷

(Function code data = 2)
This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level
specified by E31, and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the "Frequency
detection level (E31) - Hysteresis width (E32)."

„ Undervoltage detected -- LU㩷

(Function code data = 3)
This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the
specified undervoltage level, and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level.
This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor

Chap. 9
is in an abnormal stop state (e.g., tripped).
When this signal is ON, a run command is disabled if given.

FUNCTION CODES
„ Torque polarity detected -- B/D㩷
(Function code data = 4)
The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or
braking polarity signal to this digital output. This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque
is the driving one, and it goes ON when it is the braking one.

„ Inverter output limiting -- IOL㩷

(Function code data = 5)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating
any of the following actions (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms).
• Torque limiting (F40, F41, E16 and E17)
• Current limiting by software (F43 and F44)
• Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware (H12 = 1)
• Automatic deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (H69 = 2 or 4)
• Overload stop (Hit mechanical stop) (J65 = 3)
When the IOL signal is ON, it may mean that the output frequency may have
 deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this
limiting function.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-57
 „ Auto-restarting after momentary power failure -- IPF㩷
(Function code data = 6)
This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or
during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down
the output until restart has been completed (the output has reached the reference frequency).
To enable this IPF signal, set F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure) to "4: Enable
restart (Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred)" or "5: Enable restart
(Restart at the starting frequency)" beforehand.

„ Motor overload early warning -- OL㩷

(Function code data = 7)
This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an
corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm N and shuts down its
output. (Refer to the description of E34.)

■ Inverter ready to run -- RDY

(Function code data = 10)㩷
This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware
preparation (such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control
circuit) and no protective functions are activated.

■ Frequency arrival signal 2 -- FAR2

(Function code data = 21)㩷
This output signal comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the torque
limiting and the reference frequency comes to within the frequency arrival hysteresis width
(E30) and then the frequency arrival delay time (E29) has elapsed. (Refer to the descriptions of
E29 and E30.)

■ Inverter output limiting with delay -- IOL2

(Function code data = 22)㩷
If the inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting, output current
limiting, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), or overload stop (hit mechanical
stop), it automatically activates the stall-free facility and shifts the output frequency. When
such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more, this output signal comes ON.
This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the
monitor.

„ Auto-resetting -- TRY
(Function code data = 26)㩷
This output signal comes ON when auto-resetting is in progress. The auto-resetting is specified
by H04 and H05 (Auto-reset). Refer to the descriptions of H04 and H05 for details about the
number of resetting times and reset interval.

„ Heat sink overheat early warning -- OH

(Function code data = 28)㩷
This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a
corrective action before an overheat trip Jactually happens.
This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the "overheat trip J
temperature minus 5°C (41°F)," and it goes OFF when it drops down to the "overheat trip J
temperature minus 8°C (46°F)."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-58
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Service life alarm -- LIFE

(Function code data = 30)㩷
This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors (DC
link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board) and cooling fan has
expired.
This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan. If this
signal comes ON, use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these
parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not.

„ Reference loss detected -- REF OFF

(Function code data = 33)㩷
This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a
reference loss state (as specified by E65) due to a wire break or a weak connection. This signal
goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed. (Refer to the description of
E65.)

„ Inverter output on -- RUN2

(Function code data = 35)㩷
This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or
the DC braking is in operation.

„ Overload prevention control -- OLP

(Function code data = 36)㩷
This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated. The minimum
ON-duration is 100 ms. (Refer to the description of H70.)

„ Current detected and Current detected 2 -- ID and ID2

Chap. 9
(Function code data = 37, 38)㩷
The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level
specified by E34 (Current detection (Level)) or E37 (Current detection 2 (Level)) for the time
longer than the one specified by E35 (Current detection (Timer)) or E38 (Current detection 2

FUNCTION CODES
(Timer)), respectively. The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.
The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90% of the rated operation level.
These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals
independently if necessary.
Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL,
 but also for the operation level of the current detection ID. (Refer to the description
of E34.)

„ PID alarm -- PID-ALM

(Function code data = 42)㩷
Assigning this output signal enables PID control specified by J11 through J13 to output
absolute-value alarm and deviation alarm.

„ Switched to motor 2 -- SWM2

(Function code data = 49)㩷
This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2/M1 terminal command
assigned to a digital input terminal. For details, refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05
(Function code data = 12).

„ Brake signal -- BRKS

(Function code data = 57)㩷
This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake. Refer to the
descriptions of J68 through J72.
9-59
 „ Alarm output (for any alarm) -- ALM
(Function code data = 99)㩷
This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter
enters Alarm mode.

E29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time (for FAR2)

E30 Frequency Arrival (Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2)

The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by "Reference frequency r
Hysteresis width specified by E30," the "Frequency arrival signal" FAR comes ON.
After the delay time specified by E29, the "Frequency arrival signal 2" FAR2 comes ON.
For the FAR and FAR2, refer to the descriptions of E20, E21, and E27.
For details about the operation timings, refer to the graph below.

E31 Frequency Detection (Detection level for FDT)


E32 Frequency Detection (Hysteresis width for FDT)

When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31, the FDT
signal comes ON; when it drops below the "Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width
specified by E32," it goes OFF.
You need to assign the "Frequency detected" output signal FDT (function code data = 2) to one
of digital output terminals.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 (Hz)

9-60
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

E34 Overload Early Warning/Current Detection (Level)

E35 Overload Early Warning/Current Detection (Timer)

E37 Current Detection 2 (Level)

E38 Current Detection 2 (Timer)

These function codes define the detection level and time for the "Motor overload early
warning" OL, "Current detected" ID, and "Current detected 2" ID2 output signals.

„ Motor overload early warning signal -- OL

The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code N) of the
motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens.
The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by
E34. In typical cases, set E34 data to 80 to 90% against F11 data (Electronic thermal overload
protection for motor 1, Overload detection level). Specify also the thermal characteristics of the
motor with F10 (Select motor characteristics) and F12 (Thermal time constant). To utilize this
feature, you need to assign OL (data = 7) to any of the digital output terminals.

„ Current detected and Current detected 2 signals -- ID and ID2

When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it
continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38, the ID or ID2 signal turns ON,
respectively. When the output current drops below 90% of the rated operation level, the ID or
ID2 turns OFF. (Minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms)
To utilize this feature, you need to assign ID (data = 37) or ID2 (data = 38) to any of digital

Chap. 9
output terminals.


FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-61
 E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time
E50 (Coefficient for Speed Indication)

E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time, load shaft
speed, and line speed, as well as for displaying the output status monitored.
Calculation expression
Constant feeding rate time (min) = Coefficient for speed indication (E50)
Frequency × Coefficient for constant feeding rate time (E39)
Load shaft speed = Coefficient for speed indication (E50) × Frequency (Hz)

Line speed = Coefficient for speed indication (E50) × Frequency (Hz)

Where, the "frequency" refers to the "reference frequency" to be applied for settings (constant
feeding rate time, load shaft speed, or line speed), or to the "output frequency before slip
compensation" to be applied for monitor.
If the constant feeding rate time is 999.9 min. or more or the denominator of the right-hand side
is zero (0), "999.9" appears.

E40 PID Display Coefficient A

E41 PID Display Coefficient B

These function codes specify PID display coefficients A and B to convert a PID command and
its feedback into mnemonic physical quantities to display.
- Data setting range: -999 to 0.00 to 9990 for PID display coefficients A and B.

„ Display coefficients for PID process command and its feedback (J01 = 1 or 2)
E40 specifies coefficient A that determines the display value at 100% of the PID process
command or its feedback, and E41 specifies coefficient B that determines the display value at
0%.
The display value is determined as follows:
Display value = (PID process command or its feedback (%))/100 u (Display coefficient A - B)
+B

Example
Maintaining the pressure around 16 kPa (sensor voltage 3.13 V) while the pressure sensor can
detect 0 to 30 kPa over the output voltage range of 1 to 5 V:
Select terminal [12] as a feedback terminal and set the gain to 200% so that 5 V corresponds to
100%.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-62
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

The following E40 and E41 settings allow you to monitor or specify the values of the PID
process command and its feedback on the keypad as pressure.
E40 = 30.0, that determines the display value at 100% of PID process command or its feedback
E41 = -7.5, that determines the display value at 0% of PID process command or its feedback

To control the pressure at 16 kPa on the keypad, set the value to 16.0.

„ Display coefficients for PID dancer positioning command and its feedback (J01 = 3)
Under the PID dancer control, the PID dancer positioning command and its feedback operate
the range within r100%, so specify the value at +100% of the PID command or its feedback as
coefficient A with E40, and the value at -100% as coefficient B with E41.

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
If the sensor output is unipolar, the PID dancer control operates within the range from 0 to
+100%, so virtually specify the value at -100% as coefficient B.
That is, suppose "b" = "Display value at 0%," then:
Display coefficient B = 2b - A

For details about the PID control, refer to the description of J01 and later.

For the display method of the PID command and its feedback, refer to the description of
E43.

E42 LED Display Filter

E42 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output frequency, output
current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad. If it is difficult
to read data displayed on the monitor due to load fluctuation or other causes, increase this filter
time constant.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-63
 E43 LED Monitor (Item selection) E48 (LED Monitor, Item selection)

E43 specifies the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor.

Data for E43 Function Description

(Displays the following.)
0 Speed monitor Selected by the sub item of function code E48
3 Output current Inverter output current expressed in RMS (A)
4 Output voltage Inverter output voltage expressed in RMS (V)
8 Calculated torque Output torque of the motor (%)
9 Input power Inverter's input power (kW)

10 PID command value Refer to E40 and E41.

(frequency) *
12 PID feedback amount * Refer to E40 and E41.

13 Timer value (for timer Remaining time of timer operation specified (s)
operation)
14 PID output value * 100% at maximum frequency
15 Load factor Inverter's load factor (%)
16 Motor output Motor output (kW)
* If 0 (Disable) is set for function code J01, "- - - -" appears on the LED monitor.

Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed-monitoring formats
selectable with E48 (LED Monitor).
Define the speed-monitoring format on the LED monitor as listed below.
Data for E48 Display format of the sub item

0 Output frequency
(before slip compensation) Expressed in Hz

1 Output frequency Expressed in Hz

(after slip compensation)
2 Reference frequency Expressed in Hz
3 Motor speed in r/min 120 y Number of poles (P01) u Frequency (Hz)

4 Load shaft speed in r/min Coefficient for speed indication (E50) u Frequency
(Hz)

5 Line speed in m/min Coefficient for speed indication (E50) u Frequency

(Hz)

6 Constant feeding rate time Coefficient for speed indication (E50) y (Frequency
(min) (Hz) u Coefficient for constant feeding rate time (E39))


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-64
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

E45 LCD Monitor (Item selection)


E45 specifies the LCD monitor display mode to be applied when the inverter using the
multi-function keypad is in Running mode.
Data for E45 Function
0 Running status, rotational direction and operation guide
1 Bar charts for output frequency, current and calculated torque

Example of display for E45 = 0 (during running)

Example of display for E45 = 1 (during running)

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
Full-scale values on bar charts
Item displayed Full scale
Output frequency Maximum frequency (F03/A01)
Output current Inverter rated current u 200%
Calculated torque Motor rated torque u 200%

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-65
 E46 LCD Monitor (Language selection)

E46 specifies the language to display on the multi-function keypad as follows:
Data for E46 Language
0 Japanese
1 English
2 German
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Italian

E47 LCD Monitor (Contrast control)


E47 adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor on the multi-function keypad as follows:
Data for E47 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Contrast Low High

E48 LED Monitor (Speed monitor item) E43 (LED Monitor, Item selection)

Refer to the description of E43.

E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication

E39 (Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time)

Refer to the description of E39.

E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt-hour Data


E51 specifies a display coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour
data (A) in a part of maintenance information on the keypad.
Input watt-hour data = Display coefficient (E51 data) u Input watt-hour (kWh)
Setting E51 data to 0.000 clears the input watt-hour and its data to "0." After
 clearing, be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value; otherwise, input
watt-hour data will not be accumulated.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-66
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

E52 Keypad (Menu display mode)


E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the standard keypad as listed below.
Data for E52 Menu display mode Menus to be displayed
0 Function code data editing mode Menus #0 and #1
1 Function code data check mode Menu #2
2 Full-menu mode Menus #0 through #6

The multi-function keypad always displays all the menu items (including additional
 menu items) regardless of the E52 data.

The menus available on the standard keypad are described below.

LED
Menu Menu monitor Main functions
shows:
Displays only basic function codes to customize the
#0 "Quick Setup" HP inverter operation.
F codes
HAA (Fundamental functions)
E codes
GAA (Extension terminal
functions)
C codes
EAA (Control functions)

Chap. 9
P codes Selecting each of
RAA (Motor 1 parameters) these function codes
#1 "Data Setting"
H codes enables its data to be
JAA (High performance displayed/changed.

FUNCTION CODES
functions)
A codes
CAA (Motor 2 parameters)
J codes
LAA (Application functions)
[AA y codes (Link functions)
QAA o codes (Optional function)
Displays only function codes that have been changed
"Data
#2
Checking"
TGR from their factory defaults. You can refer to or
change those function code data.
"Drive Displays the running information required for
#3
Monitoring"
QRG maintenance or test running.
#4 "I/O Checking" KAQ Displays external interface information.
"Maintenance Displays maintenance information including
#5
Information"
EJG accumulated run time.
Displays the latest four alarm codes. You can refer to
"Alarm
#6
Information"
CN the running information at the time when the alarm
occurred.

For details of each menu item, refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE
KEYPAD."

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-67
 E59 Terminal [C1] Signal Definition (C1/V2 function)

E59 defines the property of terminal [C1] for either a current input +4 to +20 mA DC (C1
function) or a voltage input 0 to +10 VDC (V2 function). In addition to this setting, you need to
turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed below.
Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position
0 Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC (C1 function) C1
1 Voltage input: 0 to +10 VDC (V2 function) V2

To use terminal [C1] for the PTC thermistor input, set E59 data to 0.


E61 Terminal [12] Extended Function

E62 Terminal [C1] Extended Function (C1 function)

E63 Terminal [C1] Extended Function (V2 function)

E61, E62, and E63 define the property of terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), and [C1] (V2
function), respectively.
There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources.

Data for E61, Function Description

E62, or E63
0 None --
This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be
Auxiliary frequency added to frequency command 1 (F01). It is never
1 command 1 added to frequency command 2, multi-frequency
command or other frequency commands.
This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be
Auxiliary frequency added to all frequency commands including
2 command 2 frequency command 1, frequency command 2 and
multi-frequency commands.
This input includes temperature, pressure or other
3 PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control.
Function code J02 should be also configured.
5 PID feedback amount This input includes the feedback of the
temperature or pressure under the PID control.

If these terminals have been set up to have the same data, the operation priority is
 given in the following order:
E61 > E62 > E63
Selecting the UP/DOWN control (F01, C30 = 7) ignores auxiliary frequency
command 1 and 2.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-68
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

E65 Reference Loss Detection (Continuous running frequency)

When the analog frequency command (entered through terminals [12] and [C1] (C1/V2
function)) has dropped below 10% of the expected frequency command within 400 ms, the
inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its
operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency.
When the frequency command level (in voltage or current) returns to a level higher than that
specified by E65, the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run
following the frequency command.

In the diagram above, f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given
time. The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection
of the analog frequency command.

Chap. 9
Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command. The
abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break.
Setting E65 data at "999" (Disable) allows the "Reference loss detected" signal

FUNCTION CODES
REF OFF to be issued, but does not allow the reference frequency to change (the
inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified).
When E65 = "0" or "999," the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is
recognized as fixed is "f1 u 0.2."
When E65 = "100" (%) or higher, the reference frequency level at which the broken
wire is recognized as fixed is "f1 u 1."
The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment
(filter time constants: C33, C38, and C43).

E98 Terminal [FWD] Function E01 to E05 (Terminal [X1] to [X5] Function)

E99 Terminal [REV] Function E01 to E05 (Terminal [X1] to [X5] Function)

For details about command assignment to terminals [FWD] and [REV], refer to the descriptions
of E01 to E05.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-69
 9.2.3 C codes (Control functions)
C01 to C03 Jump Frequency 1, 2 and 3

C04 Jump Frequency (Hysteresis width)


These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output
frequency in order to skip resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the
driven machinery.
- While you are increasing the reference frequency, the moment the reference frequency
reaches the bottom of the jump frequency band, the inverter keeps the output at that bottom
frequency. When the reference frequency exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency band,
the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference frequency. When you are
decreasing the reference frequency, the situation will be reversed.
- When more than two jump frequency bands overlap, the inverter actually takes the lowest
frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper
limit. Refer to the figure on the lower right.



„ Jump frequencies 1, 2 and 3 (C01, C02 and C03)
Specify the center of the jump frequency band.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump frequency band.)
„ Jump frequency hysteresis width (C04)
Specify the jump frequency hysteresis width.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump frequency band.)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-70
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

C05 to C19 Multi-frequency 1 to 15


„ These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at
frequencies 1 to 15.
Turning terminal commands SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 ON/OFF selectively switches the
reference frequency of the inverter in 15 steps. For details of the terminal function assignment,
refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E05 "Terminal [X1] to [X5] Function."
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)
The combination of SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 and the selected frequencies are as follows.

SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1 Selected frequency command

OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi-frequency *

OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (multi-frequency 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (multi-frequency 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (multi-frequency 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (multi-frequency 4)
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (multi-frequency 5)
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (multi-frequency 6)
OFF ON ON ON C11 (multi-frequency 7)
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (multi-frequency 8)

Chap. 9
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (multi-frequency 9)
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (multi-frequency 10)
ON OFF ON ON C15 (multi-frequency 11)

FUNCTION CODES
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (multi-frequency 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (multi-frequency 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 (multi-frequency 14)
ON ON ON ON C19 (multi-frequency 15)
* "Other than multi-frequency" includes frequency command 1 (F01), frequency command 2 (C30) and other
command sources except multi-frequency commands.
To use these features, you need to assign multi-frequency selections SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8
(data = 0, 1, 2, and 3) to the digital input terminals.

For the relationship between multi-frequency operation and other frequency commands,
refer to Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Block."


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-71
 „ When enabling PID control (J01 = 1, 2, or 3)
Under the PID control, a multi-frequency command can be specified as a preset value (3
different frequencies). It can also be used for a manual speed command even with the PID
control being canceled (Hz/PID = ON) or for a primary reference frequency under the PID
dancer control.
• PID command

SS8 SS4 SS1, SS2 Command

OFF OFF – Command specified by J02

OFF ON – Multi-frequency by C08
ON OFF – Multi-frequency by C12
ON ON – Multi-frequency by C16

C08, C12, and C16 can be specified in increments of 1 Hz. The following gives the conversion
formula between the PID command value and the data to be specified.

Data to be specified = PID command (%) u Maximum frequency (F03) y 100

Data to be specified (C08/C12/C16)
PID command (%) = x 100
Maximum frequency (F03)

• Manual speed command

SS8, SS4 SS2 SS1 Selected frequency

– OFF OFF Other than multi-frequency

– OFF ON C05 (Multi-frequency 1)
– ON OFF C06 (Multi-frequency 2)
– ON ON C07 (Multi-frequency 3)

For PID commands, refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 4, Section 4.5 "PID Process
Control Block" and Section 4.6 "PID Dancer Control Block."


C20 Jogging Frequency


C20 specifies the frequency to apply in jogging operation.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)
For details about jogging (inching) operation, refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05
"Terminal [X1] to [X5] Function."


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-72
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

C21 Timer Operation

C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for
the timer count previously specified with the / keys. The operating procedure for the
timer operation is given below.

Data for C21 Function

0 Disable timer operation
1 Enable timer operation

• Pressing the key during timer countdown quits the timer operation.

• Even if C21 = 1, setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the
key.
• Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also
start the timer operation.

Operating procedure for timer operation (example)

Preparation
• Set E43 data to "13" (LED monitor) to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set
C21 to "1" (Enable timer operation).
• Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation. When the keypad is selected as a
frequency command source, press the key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the
desired reference frequency.

Chap. 9
Triggering the timer operation with the key
(1) While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor, press the / key to set
the timer for the desired count in seconds. Note that the timer count on the LED monitor
appears as an integral number without a decimal point.

FUNCTION CODES
(2) Press the key. The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down. If the timer
counts down, the motor stops without pressing the key. (Even if the LED monitor
displays any item except the timer count, the timer operation is possible.)

After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such
as FWD, the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor
displays GPF and any LED monitor item (for the timer count) alternately.
Turning FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item.



C30 Frequency Command 2 F01 (Frequency Command 1)


For details of frequency command 2, refer to the description of F01.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-73
 C31 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Offset)
C33 (Analog Input Adjustment for [12], Filter time constant)
C36 (Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function), Offset)
C38 (Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function), Filter time constant)
C41 (Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function), Offset)
C43 (Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function), Filter time constant)

C31, C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage/current input at terminal [12], [C1]
(C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function), respectively. The table below summarizes their
interrelation. The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment.

Analog input Offset control Input filter time constant

Terminal [12] C31 C33
Terminal [C1] (C1 function) C36 C38
Terminal [C1] (V2 function) C41 C43

C33, C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage/current input at terminal
[12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function), respectively. The larger the time constant, the
slower the response. Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response
speed of the machine (load). If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises, increase the time
constant.

C32 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Gain) F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

Refer to the description of F18.

C33 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Filter time constant)

C31 (Analog Input Adjustment for [12], Offset)

Refer to the description of C31.

C34 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Gain base point)

F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

Refer to the description of F18.

C35 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Polarity)

To use terminal [12] with an input -10 to +10 VDC, set this function code data to "0." If C35 =
1, a minus component of the input will be regarded as 0 VDC inside the inverter.

Data for C35 Polarity Input range allowable to terminal [12]

0 Bipolar -10 to +10 VDC
1 Unipolar 0 to +10 VDC

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-74
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

C36 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function) (Offset)

C31 (Analog Input Adjustment for [12], Offset)

Refer to the description of C31.

C37 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function) (Gain)

F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

Refer to the description of F18.

C38 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function) (Filter time constant)
C31 (Analog Input Adjustment for [12], Offset)

Refer to the description of C31.

C39 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function) (Gain base point)
F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

Refer to the description of F18.

C41 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function) (Offset)

C31 (Analog Input Adjustment for [12], Offset)

Chap. 9
Refer to the description of C31.


C42 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function) (Gain)

FUNCTION CODES
F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

Refer to the description of F18.

C43 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function) (Filter time constant)
C31 (Analog Input Adjustment for [12], Offset)

Refer to the description of C31.

C44 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function) (Gain base point)
F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

Refer to the description of F18.

C50 Bias (Frequency command 1) (Bias base point)

F18 (Bias, Frequency command 1)

For details about bias base point setting for frequency command 1, refer to the description of
F18.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-75
 C51 Bias (PID command 1) (Bias value)

C52 Bias (PID command 1) (Bias base point)

These function codes specify the bias and bias base point of the analog PID command 1,
enabling it to define arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID commands.
The actual setting is the same as that of function code F18. For details, refer to the
description of F18.
Note that function codes C32, C34, C37, C39, C42, and C44 are shared by
frequency commands.
„ Bias value (C51)
- Data setting range: -100.00 to 100.00 (%)
„ Bias base point (C52)
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (%)

C53 Selection of Normal/Inverse Operation (Frequency command 1)


C53 switches the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 (F01) between normal
and inverse.
For details, refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05, "Switch normal/inverse
operation" terminal command IVS (function code data = 21).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-76
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

9.2.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters)

P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles) A15 (Motor 2, No. of poles)

P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor. Enter the value given on the nameplate of the
motor. This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor (refer to E43). The
following expression is used for the conversion.

Motor speed (r/min) 120 × Frequency (Hz)

No. of poles

P02 Motor 1 (Rated capacity) A16 (Motor 2, Rated capacity)


P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of
the motor.

Data for P02 Unit Remarks

kW When P99 = 0, 3 or 4
0.01 to 30.00
HP When P99 = 1


P03 Motor 1 (Rated current) A17 (Motor 2, Rated current)


P03 specifies the rated current of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the
motor.

Chap. 9


P04 Motor 1 (Auto-tuning) A18 (Motor 2, Auto-tuning)



FUNCTION CODES
The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory.
Basically, it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a
standard connection with the inverter.
In any of the following cases, perform auto-tuning since the motor parameters are different
from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of these
controls--auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto energy saving operation,
torque limiter, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), auto search for idling motor
speed, slip compensation, torque vector, droop control, or overload stop.
• The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non-standard motor.
• Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long.
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.

For details of auto-tuning, refer to the FRENIC-Multi Instruction Manual, Section 4.1.3
"Preparation before running the motor for a test -- Setting function code data."

P05 Motor 1 (Online tuning) A19 (Motor 2, Online turning)


The primary and secondary % resistances (%R1) and (%R2) will change as the motor
temperature rises. P05 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation (online).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-77
 P06 Motor 1 (No-load current) P12 (Motor 1, Rated slip frequency)
A20 (Motor 2, No-load current)

P07 Motor 1 (%R1) A21 (Motor 2, %R1)

P08 Motor 1 (%X) A22 (Motor 2, %X)

P06 through P08 and P12 specify no-load current, %R1, %X, and rated slip frequency,
respectively. Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the
manufacturer of the motor.
Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these parameters.

„ No-load current (P06)

Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer.

„ %R1 (P07)
Enter the value calculated by the following expression.

R1  Cable R1
%R1 × 100 (%)
V / ( 3× I )

where,
R1: Primary resistance of the motor (:)
Cable R1: Resistance of the output cable (:)
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)

„ %X (P08)
Enter the value calculated by the following expression.

X1  X2 × XM / (X2  XM)  Cable X

%X × 100 (%)
V / ( 3× I )

where,
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor (:)
X2: Secondary leakage reactance of the motor (converted to primary) (:)
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor (:)
Cable X: Reactance of the output cable (:)
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)

„ Rated slip frequency (P12)

Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression
and enter the converted value. (Note: The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes
shows a larger value.)
(Synchronous speed - Rated speed)
Rated slip frequency (Hz) = x Base frequency
Synchronous speed

For reactance, choose the value at the base frequency 1 (F04).



CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-78
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

P09 Motor 1 (Slip compensation gain for driving)

A23 (Motor 2, Slip compensation gain for driving)

P10 Motor 1 (Slip compensation response time)
A24 (Motor 2, Slip compensation response time)

P11 Motor 1 (Slip compensation gain for braking)
A25 (Motor 2, Slip compensation gain for braking)

P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in % for driving and braking individually.
Specification of 100% fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor. Excessive
compensation (P09, P11 ! 100%) may cause a system oscillation, so carefully check the
operation on the actual machine.
P10 determines the response time for slip compensation. Basically, there is no need to modify
the default setting. If you need to modify it, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.

P12 Motor 1 (Rated slip frequency) P06 (Motor 1, No-load current)

P07 (Motor 1, %R1)
P08 (Motor 1, %X)
A26 (Motor 2, Rated slip frequency)

For details about setting of the rated slip frequency of motor 1, refer to the descriptions of P06
to P08.


P99 Motor 1 Selection A39 (Motor 2 Selection)

Chap. 9

P99 specifies the motor to be used.

Data for P99 Motor type

FUNCTION CODES
0 Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series)
1 Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors)
3 Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
4 Other motors

Automatic control (such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving) or electronic thermal
overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics. To match the
property of a control system with that of the motor, select characteristics of the motor and set
H03 data (Data Initialization) to "2" to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter.
When initialization is complete, P03, P06, P07, and P08 data and the old related internal data
are automatically updated.
For P99, enter the following data according to the motor type.
• P99 = 0 (Motor characteristics 0): Fuji standard 8-series motors (Current standard)
• P99 = 3 (Motor characteristics 3): Fuji standard 6-series motors (Conventional standard)
• P99 = 4 (Other motors): Other manufacturer’s or unknown motors
• If P99 = 4 (Other motors), the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of
Fuji standard 8-series.
• The inverter also supports motors rated by HP (horse power: typical in North
America, P99 = 1).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-79
 9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions)
H03 Data Initialization

H03 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor
parameters.
To change the H03 data, it is necessary to press the + keys or + keys
(simultaneous keying).

Data for H03 Function

Disable initialization
0
(Settings manually made by the user will be retained.)
1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 (Rated capacity) and P99
(Motor 1 selection)
Function codes subject to initialization: P01, P03, P06 to P12 and constants for
2
internal control
(These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.)
Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 (Rated capacity) and
A39 (Motor 2 selection)
Function codes subject to initialization: A15, A17, A20 to A26 and constants
3
for internal control
(These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.)

• To initialize the motor parameters, set the related function codes as follows.
1) P02/A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW.
Motor (Rated capacity)
2) P99/A39 Select the characteristics of the motor.
Motor Selection
3) H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters. (H03 = 2 or 3)
4) P03/A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set
Motor (Rated current) data differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate
of the motor.

• Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data reverts to "0" (factory default).
• If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating, data
initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent
nominal applied motor rating (see the tables on the following pages).
• If initialized, motor parameters revert to the default data specified for each of the V/f settings
listed below. To use motors whose base frequency, rated voltage or number of poles is
different, non-Fuji motors, or other series of motors, change the data to the rated current
printed on the nameplate.
P99 = 0 or 4 : Fuji standard, 8 series motor (4 poles, 200 V/50 Hz or 400 V/50 Hz)
P99 = 3 : Fuji standard, 6 series motor (4 poles, 200 V/50 Hz or 400 V/50 Hz)
P99 = 1 : HP rating motor (4 poles, 230 V/60 Hz or 460 V/60 Hz)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-80
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ When Fuji standard 8-series motors (P99 = 0 or A39 = 0) or other motors (P99 = 4 or A39
= 4) are selected, the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables.

230 V (Example for FRN_ _ _E1†-2U)

Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip

Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
P02/A16 (kW) P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.30 1.06 12.95 12.92 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.30 1.66 10.20 13.66 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.60 2.30 8.67 10.76 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 6.10 3.01 6.55 11.21 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 9.20 4.85 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 15.0 7.67 5.79 11.25 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 22.5 11.0 5.28 14.31 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 29.0 12.5 4.50 14.68 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 42.0 17.7 3.78 15.09 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 55.0 20.0 3.25 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 67.0 21.4 2.92 16.58 0.87

Chap. 9
22.00 to 30.00 22 78.0 25.1 2.70 16.00 0.90

460 V (Example for FRN_ _ _E1†-4U)

FUNCTION CODES
Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip
Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
P02/A16 (kW) P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.10 0.35 0.27 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.20 0.65 0.53 12.95 12.92 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.15 0.83 10.20 13.66 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.80 1.15 8.67 10.76 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.51 6.55 11.21 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.60 2.43 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.50 3.84 5.79 11.25 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.5 5.50 5.28 14.31 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.5 6.25 4.50 14.68 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.0 8.85 3.78 15.09 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 27.5 10.0 3.25 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 34.0 10.7 2.92 16.58 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 39.0 12.6 2.70 16.00 0.90
9-81
„ When Fuji standard 6-series motors (P99 = 3, or A39 = 3) are selected, the motor
parameters are as listed in the following tables.

230 V (Example for FRN_ _ _E1†-2U)

Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip

Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.30 1.00 12.61 13.63 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.30 1.56 10.20 14.91 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.60 2.35 8.67 10.66 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 6.10 3.00 6.55 11.26 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 9.20 4.85 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 15.0 7.70 5.79 11.22 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 22.2 10.7 5.09 13.66 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 29.0 12.5 4.50 14.70 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 42.0 17.6 3.78 15.12 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 55.0 20.0 3.24 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 67.0 21.9 2.90 17.00 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 78.0 25.1 2.70 16.05 0.90

460 V (Example for FRN_ _ _E1†-4U)

Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip

Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(kW) (%) (%
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.10 0.35 0.27 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.20 0.65 0.50 12.61 13.63 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.20 0.78 10.20 14.91 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.80 1.18 8.67 10.66 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.50 6.55 11.26 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.60 2.43 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.50 3.85 5.79 11.22 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.0 5.35 5.09 13.66 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.5 6.25 4.50 14.70 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.0 8.80 3.78 15.12 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 27.5 10.0 3.24 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 34.0 11.0 2.90 17.00 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 39.0 12.6 2.70 16.05 0.90

9-82
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ When HP rating motors (P99 = 1 or A39 = 1) are selected, the motor parameters are as
listed in the following tables.
(HP stands for "horsepower," which is a unit for motor power mainly used in US.)
230 V

Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip

Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(HP) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(HP)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.11 1.10 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 2.50
0.12 to 0.24 0.12 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 2.50
0.25 to 0.49 0.25 1.40 1.12 11.02 13.84 2.50
0.50 to 0.99 0.5 2.00 1.22 6.15 8.80 2.50
1.00 to 1.99 1 3.00 1.54 3.96 8.86 2.50
2.00 to 2.99 2 5.80 2.80 4.29 7.74 2.50
3.00 to 4.99 3 7.90 3.57 3.15 20.81 1.17
5.00 to 7.49 5 12.6 4.78 3.34 23.57 1.50
7.50 to 9.99 7.5 18.6 6.23 2.65 28.91 1.17
10.00 to 14.99 10 25.3 8.75 2.43 30.78 1.17
15.00 to 19.99 15 37.3 12.7 2.07 29.13 1.00
20.00 to 24.99 20 49.1 9.20 2.09 29.53 1.00

Chap. 9
25.00 to 29.99 25 60.0 16.7 1.75 31.49 1.00
30.00 to 39.99 30 72.4 19.8 1.90 32.55 1.00

460 V

FUNCTION CODES
Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip
Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(HP) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(HP)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.11 1.10 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 2.50
0.12 to 0.24 0.12 0.34 0.27 12.96 12.67 2.50
0.25 to 0.49 0.25 0.70 0.56 11.02 13.84 2.50
0.50 to 0.99 0.5 1.00 0.61 6.15 8.80 2.50
1.00 to 1.99 1 1.50 0.77 3.96 8.86 2.50
2.00 to 2.99 2 2.90 1.40 4.29 7.74 2.50
3.00 to 4.99 3 4.00 1.79 3.15 20.81 1.17
5.00 to 7.49 5 6.30 2.39 3.34 23.57 1.50
7.50 to 9.99 7.5 9.30 3.12 2.65 28.91 1.17
10.00 to 14.99 10 12.7 4.37 2.43 30.78 1.17
15.00 to 19.99 15 18.7 6.36 2.07 29.13 1.00
20.00 to 24.99 20 24.6 4.60 2.09 29.53 1.00
25.00 to 29.99 25 30.0 8.33 1.75 31.49 1.00
30.00 to 39.99 30 36.2 9.88 1.90 32.55 1.00
9-83
 H04 Auto-reset (Times)

H05 Auto-reset (Reset interval)

H04 and H05 specify the auto-reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to
reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm (for any faults) even if any protective
function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced-to-stop state (tripped
state).
If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04, the inverter will issue
an alarm (for any faults) and not attempt to auto-reset the tripped state.
Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried.
Alarm status LED monitor displays: Alarm status LED monitor displays:
Overcurrent protection E, E or E Motor overheated J
Overvoltage protection W, W or W Motor overloaded N or N
Heat sink overheated J Inverter overloaded NW

„ Number of reset times (H04)

H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state. When H04
= 0, the auto-reset function will not be activated.

If the "auto-reset" function has been specified, the inverter may automatically restart and run
the motor stopped due to a trip fault, depending on the cause of the tripping.
Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even
when the auto-resetting succeeds.
Otherwise an accident could occur.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-84
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Reset interval (H05)

After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state, it issues
a reset command to auto-reset the tripped state. Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below.
<Operation timing scheme>

<Timing scheme for failed retry (No. of reset times: 3)>

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
- The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter’s digital
output terminal [Y1], [Y2], or [30A/B/C] to which the TRY is assigned by setting "26" with
function code E20, E21, or E27.

H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control


To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running, the cooling fan stops
when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops.
However, since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life, the cooling fan is kept
running for 10 minutes once it is started.
H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON/OFF.

Data for H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF

0 Disable (Always in operation)

1 Enable (ON/OFF controllable)

9-85
 
H07 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern

H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration Data for H07 Accl./Decel. pattern
patterns (patterns to control output frequency).
0 Linear (Default)
1 S-curve (Weak)
2 S-curve (Strong)
3 Curvilinear

Linear acceleration/deceleration
The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
To reduce an impact that acceleration/deceleration would make on the machine, the inverter
gradually accelerates/decelerates the motor in both the acceleration/deceleration starting and
ending zones. Two types of S-curve acceleration/deceleration are available; 5% (weak) and
10% (strong) of the maximum frequency, which are shared by the four inflection points.
The acceleration/deceleration time command determines the duration of
acceleration/deceleration in the linear period; hence, the actual acceleration/deceleration time is
longer than the reference acceleration/deceleration time.

Acceleration/deceleration time
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (weak): when the frequency change is 10% or more of the
maximum frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s): (2 u 5/100 + 90/100+ 2 u 5/100) u (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.1 u (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (strong): when the frequency change is 20% or more of the
maximum frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s): (2 u 10/100 + 80/100 + 2 u 10/100) u (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.2 u (reference acceleration or deceleration time)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-86
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Curvilinear acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration is linear below the base frequency (constant torque) but it slows
down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor (constant output).
This acceleration/deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the
maximum performance of the motor.

The figures at left show the

acceleration characteristics.
Similar characteristics apply
to the deceleration.

Choose an appropriate acceleration/deceleration time, taking into account the

machinery’s load torque.

Chap. 9
H08 Rotational Direction Limitation

H08 inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to

FUNCTION CODES
miss-operation of run commands, miss-polarization of frequency commands, or other mistakes.

Data for H08 Function

0 Disable

1 Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited)

2 Enable (Forward rotation inhibited)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-87
 H09 Starting Mode (Auto search)
H49 (Starting Mode, Delay time)

H09 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without
stopping it.
The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and
every normal startup.
The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command ("Enable auto
search for idling motor speed at starting") to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05
(function code data = 26). If no STM is assigned, the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by
default.
Auto search for idling motor speed
Starting the inverter (with a run command ON, BX OFF, auto-reset, etc.) with STM being ON
searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1.2 seconds to run the idling motor
without stopping it. After completion of the auto search, the inverter accelerates the motor up to
the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time.

Auto search for idling motor speed to follow

„ H09 and STM terminal command ("Enable auto search for idling motor speed at
starting")
The combination of H09 data and the STM state determines whether to perform the auto search
as listed below.
Auto search for idling motor speed at starting
Data for H09 STM For restart after momentary
For normal startup
power failure (F14 = 4 or 5)
0: Disable OFF Disable Disable
1: Enable OFF Enable Disable
2: Enable OFF Enable Enable
-- ON Enable Enable

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-88
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Auto search delay time (H49)

Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor
retains residual voltage. It is, therefore, necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for
residual voltage to disappear. H49 specifies that time (0.0 to 10.0 sec.).
At the startup triggered by a run command ON, auto search starts with the delay specified by
H49. When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately, coast to stop it, and
perform auto search every switching, H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing
control.
The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data (Restart Mode after Momentary Power
Failure, Restart time). At the restart after a momentary power failure, at the start by turning the
terminal command BX ("Coast to a stop") OFF and ON, or at the restart by auto-reset, the
inverter applies the delay time specified by H13. The inverter will not start unless the time
specified by H13 has elapsed, even if the starting conditions are satisfied.

Chap. 9
• Be sure to auto-tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling
motor speed.
• When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit
frequency, the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode.

FUNCTION CODES
• In auto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled (F14 = 4 or
5) and the allowable momentary power failure time specified (H16), turning a
run command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has
elapsed.
• During auto search, if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs, the inverter
restarts the suspended auto search.
• Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below.
• Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected/designed performance
depending on conditions including the load, motor parameters, power cable
length, and other externally determined events.
• When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL-†††-2
and -4 in the secondary lines, it cannot perform auto search. Use the filter
OFL-†††-†A instead.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-89
 H11 Deceleration Mode

H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF.

Data for H11 Function

0 Normal deceleration
The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration
commands specified by H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern), F08
(Deceleration time 1), and E11 (Deceleration time 2).
1 Coast-to-stop
The inverter immediately shuts down its output, so the motor stops according
to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy losses.

When reducing the reference frequency, the inverter decelerates the motor
according to the deceleration commands even if H11 = 1 (Coast-to-stop).

H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting (Mode selection)


H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent
trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level. Under the
current limit processing, the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to suppress the
further current increase and continues to control the output frequency.

Data for H12 Function

Disable
0
An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.
Enable
1
The current limiting operation is effective.

If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting
processing, it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip (H12 = 0) and actuate a mechanical brake
at the same time.
The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44. The current
 limiter (F43/F44) implements the current control by software, so an operation delay
occurs. When you have enabled the current limiter (F43/F44), also enable the
instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current
limiting.
Depending on the load, extremely short acceleration time may activate the current

W


limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency, causing the
system oscillation (hunting) or activating the inverter overvoltage trip (alarm ).
When specifying the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into account
machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-90
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Restart time)

F14 (Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Mode selection)

H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Frequency fall rate)
F14

H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Allowable momentary power
failure time) F14

For configuring these function codes (restart time, frequency fall rate and allowable momentary
power failure time), refer to the description of F14.

H26 Thermistor (Mode selection)

H27 Thermistor (Level)


These function codes specify the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor embedded
in the motor. The thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or output an alarm
signal.

„ Thermistor (Mode selection) (H26)

H26 selects the operation mode (protection or alarm) for the PTC thermistor as listed below.
Data for H26 Action
0 Disable

Chap. 9
1 Enable
When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level,
the motor protective function (alarm J ) is triggered, causing the inverter to
enter an alarm stop state.

FUNCTION CODES

„ Thermistor (Level) (H27)
H27 specifies the detection level (expressed in voltage) for the temperature sensed by the PTC
thermistor.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V)
The temperature at which the overheating protection becomes activated depends on the
characteristics of the PTC thermistor. The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly
change at the alarm temperature. The detection level (voltage) is specified based on the change
of the internal resistance.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-91
 Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp, the
detection level (voltage) Vv2 is calculated by the expression below. Set the result Vv2 to function
code H27.
250× R p
250 + R p
VV2 = ×10 (V)
250× R p
1000 +
250 + R p

Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below. The voltage obtained by dividing the input
voltage on terminal [C1] with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection level
voltage specified by H27.

To use analog input terminal [C1] for the PTC thermistor input, turn switches SW7
 and SW8 on the interface printed circuit board to the specified positions and set E59
data to "0" (C1 function). For details, refer to "Setting up the slide switches" on
page 8-17.

H28 Droop Control


In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery, any speed gap between
inverter-driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors. The droop control
allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its
load, eliminating such kind of load unbalance.

To use droop control, be sure to auto-tune the inverter for the motor.


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-92
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes


H30 Communications Link Function (Mode selection)
y98 (Bus Link Function, Mode selection)

Using the RS-485 communications link (standard/option) or field bus (option) allows you to
issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location, as
well as monitoring the inverter running information and the function code data.
H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands--"inverter itself" and "computers or PLCs
via the RS-485 communications link or field bus." H30 is for the RS-485 communications link;
y98 for the field bus.

Command sources selectable

Command sources Description
Inverter itself Sources except RS-485 communications link and field bus
Frequency command source: Specified by F01/C30, or
multi-frequency command
Run command source: Via the keypad or digital input

Chap. 9
terminals selected by F02
Via RS-485 communications link Via the standard RJ-45 port used for connecting a keypad
(standard)

FUNCTION CODES
Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link (option card)
(option card)
Via field bus (option) Via field bus (option) using FA protocol such as DeviceNet
or PROFIBUS-DP

Command sources specified by H30 (Mode selection)

Data for H30 Frequency command Run command
0 Inverter itself (F01/C30) Inverter itself (F02)
1 Via RS-485 communications link
Inverter itself (F02)
(standard)
2 Via RS-485 communications link
Inverter itself (F01/C30)
(standard)
3 Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link
(standard) (standard)
4 Via RS-485 communications link
Inverter itself (F02)
(option card)
5 Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link
(option card) (standard)
6 Via RS-485 communications link
Inverter itself (F01/C30)
(option card)
7 Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link
(standard) (option card)
8 Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link
(option card) (option card)
9-93
 Command sources specified by y98
Data for y98 Frequency command Run command
0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data
1 Via field bus (option) Follow H30 data
2 Follow H30 data Via field bus (option)
3 Via field bus (option) Via field bus (option)

Combination of command sources

Frequency command
Via RS-485 Via RS-485
Via field bus
Inverter itself communications communications
(option)
link (standard) link (option card)
H30 = 0 H30 = 1 H30=4 H30=0 (1 or 4)
Inverter itself
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98=0 y98=1
Run command source

Via RS-485 H30 = 2 H30 = 3 H30=5 H30=2 (3 or 5)

communications y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98=0 y98=1
link (standard)
Via RS-485 H30 = 6 H30 = 7 H30=8 H30=6 (7 or 8)
communications y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98=0 y98=1
link (option card)
Via field bus H30 = 0 (2 or 6) H30 = 1 (3 or 7) H30 = 4 (5 or 8) H30 = 0 (1 to 8)
(option) y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 3

For details, refer to Chapter 4 "BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC" and the
RS-485 Communication User's Manual or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual.

• When an LE terminal command ("Enable communications link via RS-485 or field bus") is
assigned to a digital input terminal, turning LE ON makes the settings of H30 and y98
effective. When LE is OFF, those settings are ineffective so that both frequency commands
and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control.

H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor


H42 displays the measured capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor.

H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan


H43 displays the cumulative run time of the cooling fan.

H44 Startup Times of Motor 1 A46 (Startup Times of Motor 2)


H44 displays the startup times of motor 1.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-94
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

H45 Mock Alarm H97 (Clear Alarm Data)


H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences
function correctly at the time of machine setup.
Setting the H45 data to "1" displays mock alarm GTT on the LED monitor and issues alarm
output ALM to the digital output terminal specified (see E20, E21 and E27). (Accessing the
H45 data requires simultaneous keying of " key + key.") After that, the H45 data
automatically reverts to "0," allowing you to reset the alarm.
Just as for data (alarm history and relevant information) of those alarms that could occur in
running of the inverter, the inverter saves mock alarm data, enabling you to confirm the mock
alarm status.
To clear the mock alarm data, use H97. (Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying
of " key + key.") For details, refer to the description of H97.

H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor


H47 displays the initial value of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor.

H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards


H48 displays the cumulative run time of the capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards.

H49 Starting Mode (Delay time)

H09 (Starting Mode, Auto search)

Chap. 9

For details about the auto search delay time, refer to the description of H09.

H50 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 (Frequency)

FUNCTION CODES
F04 (Base Frequency 1)
F05 (Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1)
F06 (Maximum Output Voltage 1)

H51 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 (Voltage) F04 to F06

H52 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 (Frequency) F04 to F06

H53 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 (Voltage) F04 to F06

For details about the setting of the non-linear V/f pattern, refer to the descriptions of F04 to F06.

H54 ACC/DEC Time (Jogging operation)


H54 specifies the common acceleration and deceleration time for jogging operation.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600 (s)
For details about the jogging operation (JOG), refer to E01 to E05 that assign terminal
commands to digital input terminals [X1] to [X5].

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-95
 H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop

Assigning the "Force to stop" command STOP to a digital input terminal (data = 30) and
turning it ON decelerates the inverter output to stop in accordance with the H56 data. When the
output has stopped, the inverter enters an alarm stop state with alarm GT displayed.

H61 UP/DOWN Control (Initial frequency setting)


H61 specifies the initial reference frequency to be applied at startup of UP/DOWN control that
increases or decreases the reference frequency with the UP/DOWN terminal command.
For details, refer to function codes E01 to E05 that assign terminal commands to digital
input terminals [X1] to [X5].

H63 Low Limiter (Mode selection) F15 (Frequency Limiter, High)

F16 (Frequency Limiter, Low)

For how to set up this function code data, refer to the descriptions of F15 and F16.

H64 Low Limiter (Lower limiting frequency)


H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter, torque limiter,
automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), or overload prevention control is activated.
Normally, it is not necessary to change the lower limit of frequency.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz)

H68 Slip Compensation 1 (Operating conditions)

F42 (Control Mode Selection 1)
A40 (Slip Compensation 2, Operating conditions)

For details about the setting of slip compensation 1, refer to the description of F42.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-96
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes


H69 Automatic Deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (Mode selection)
H76 (Torque Limiter, Frequency increment limit for braking)

H69 enables or disables the anti-regenerative control.
In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or brake unit, if regenerative energy
returned exceeds the inverter's braking capability, an overvoltage trip occurs.
To avoid such an overvoltage trip, enable the anti-regenerative control with this function code,
and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 Nm in both
the acceleration/deceleration and constant speed running phases.
Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti-regenerative control is dangerous,
the inverter has a torque limiter (Frequency increment limit for braking) that can be specified by
H76. The torque limiter limits the inverter's output frequency to less than "Reference frequency
+ H76 setting."
Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti-regenerative control, resulting in a trip
with an overvoltage alarm in some cases. Increasing the H76 data (0.0 to 400.0 Hz) makes the
anti-regenerative control capability high.
In addition, during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF, the
anti-regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the
load depending on the load state (huge moment of inertia, for example). To avoid that, H69
provides a choice of cancellation of the anti-regenerative control to apply when three times the
specified deceleration time is elapsed, thus decelerating the motor.

Data for H69 Function

0 Disable

Chap. 9
2 Enable
(Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified
by F08/E11
4 Enable

FUNCTION CODES
(Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one
specified by F08/E11.)

Enabling the anti-regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration

time.
When a brake unit is connected, disable the anti-regenerative control.


H70 Overload Prevention Control

H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due
to an overload. This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter
trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload (with an alarm indication of J or NW,
respectively). It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency
leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the
output frequency drops.

Data for H70 Function

0.00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 (F08) or 2 (E11)
0.01 to 100.0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0.01 to 100.0 (Hz/s)
999 Disable overload prevention control

In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in
the load, the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled.
9-97
 
H71 Deceleration Characteristics

Setting the H71 data to "1" (ON) enables forced brake control. If regenerative energy produced
during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter’s braking
capability, an overvoltage trip will occur. The forced brake control increases the motor energy
loss during deceleration, increasing the deceleration torque.

This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration; it has no effect
if there is braking load.
Enabling the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control, H69 = 2 or 4)
disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71.


H76 Torque Limiter (Frequency increment limit for braking)

H69 (Automatic Deceleration, Mode selection)

For details about the function of H76, refer to the description of H69.

H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1

A41 (Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2)

The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics
and/or backlash in the machine. Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to
suppress such fluctuation. However, as incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current
fluctuation, do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 0.40

H89 Reserved*

H90 Reserved*

H91 Reserved*

* These are reserved for particular manufacturers. Do not access them.

H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 A45 (Cumulative Motor Run Time 2)

Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1. This feature is useful for
management and maintenance of the mechanical system. H94 allows you to set the cumulative
run time of the motor to the desired value. For example, specifying "0" clears the cumulative
run time of the motor.
The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation. It appears in decimal notation on the
keypad.


H95 DC Braking (Braking response mode)

F20 to F22 (DC Braking 1,
Braking staring frequency, Braking level, and Braking time)
A09 to A11 (DC Braking 2,
Braking staring frequency, Braking level, and Braking time)

For setting of DC braking, refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-98
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes


H96 STOP Key Priority/Start Check Function

H96 specifies a functional combination of "STOP key priority" and "Start check function" as
listed below.

Data for H96 STOP key priority Start check function

0 Disable Disable
1 Enable Disable
2 Disable Enable
3 Enable Enable

„ STOP key priority
Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS-485
communications link (link operation), pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and
stop the motor. After that, "GT " appears on the LED monitor.
„ Start check function
For safety, this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of
the following situations. If it has been turned ON, the inverter does not start up with alarm code
"GT " displayed on the LED monitor.
• When the power to the inverter is turned ON.
• When the key is pressed to release the alarm status or when the "Reset alarm" terminal
command RST (digital input) is turned ON.
• When the run command source is switched by the "Enable communications link via RS-485

Chap. 9
or field bus" terminal command LE (digital input).

FUNCTION CODES
H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 (Mock Alarm)

H97 clears all alarm data (alarm history and relevant information) of alarms that have occurred
in running of the inverter and mock alarms that have been caused by H45 at the time of machine
setup, both of which are saved in the inverter memory.
Setting the H97 data to "1" clears the saved alarm data. (Accessing the H97 data requires
simultaneous keying of " key + key.") After that, the H97 data automatically reverts to
"0."

H98 Protection/Maintenance Function (Mode selection)


H98 specifies whether to enable or disable (a) automatic lowering of carrier frequency, (b)
input phase loss protection, (c) output phase loss protection, and (d) judgment on the life of the
DC link bus capacitor, as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link
bus capacitor, in a style of combination (Bit 0 to Bit 4).
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency (Bit 0)
This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter
running.
Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load, abnormal ambient
temperature, or cooling system failure, enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to
avoid tripping (J or NWX). Note that enabling this function results in increased motor
noise.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-99
 Input phase loss protection (NKP) (Bit 1)
Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit
due to phase loss or line-to-line voltage unbalance in the three-phase power supplied to the
inverter, this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm NKP.
In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected,
phase loss or line-to-line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the
relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit.

Output phase loss protection (RN ) (Bit 2)

Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running, this feature stops the
inverter and displays an alarm RN. Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter
output circuit, if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation, all the phases will be lost.
In such a case, this protection feature does not work.

Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3)

Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between
factory default setting and your own choice.

Before specifying the threshold of your own choice, measure and confirm the
reference level in advance.

Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 4)

Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of
time for discharging after power off. The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of
the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter. Therefore, if the load inside the
inverter fluctuates significantly, the discharging time cannot be accurately measured, and as a
result, it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached. To avoid such an error,
you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor.
Since load may vary significantly in the following cases, disable the judgment on the life during
operation. Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate
conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating
conditions matching the actual ones.
• An option card or multi-function keypad is used.
• Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the
DC link bus.
To set data of H98, assign functions to each bit (total 5 bits) and set it in decimal format. The
table below lists functions assigned to each bit.

Bit number Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Select life
Lower the
Judge the life judgment
Detect output Detect input carrier
Function of DC link bus threshold of
phase loss phase loss frequency
capacitor DC link bus
automatically
capacitor
Data = 0 Disable Use the Disable Disable Disable
factory default
Data = 1 Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable
setting
Example of Enable (1) Use the Disable (0) Enable (1) Enable (1)
decimal factory default
expression (0)
(19)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-100
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Conversion table (Decimal to/from binary)

Binary Binary
Decimal Decimal
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 0 1 0 18 1 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 0 1 1 19 1 0 0 1 1
4 0 0 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 0
5 0 0 1 0 1 21 1 0 1 0 1
6 0 0 1 1 0 22 1 0 1 1 0
7 0 0 1 1 1 23 1 0 1 1 1
8 0 1 0 0 0 24 1 1 0 0 0
9 0 1 0 0 1 25 1 1 0 0 1
10 0 1 0 1 0 26 1 1 0 1 0
11 0 1 0 1 1 27 1 1 0 1 1
12 0 1 1 0 0 28 1 1 1 0 0
13 0 1 1 0 1 29 1 1 1 0 1
14 0 1 1 1 0 30 1 1 1 1 0
15 0 1 1 1 1 31 1 1 1 1 1

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-101
 9.2.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters)
A01 Maximum Frequency 2 F03 (Maximum Frequency 1)

A02 Base Frequency 2 F04 (Base Frequency 1)

A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 F05 (Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1)

A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 F06 (Maximum Output Voltage 1)

A05 Torque Boost 2 F09 (Torque Boost 1)

A06 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2

(Select motor characteristics) F10 (Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for
Motor 1, Select motor characteristics)

A07 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2

(Overload detection level) F11 (Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for
Motor 1, Overload detection level)

A08 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2

(Thermal time constant) F12 (Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for
Motor 1, Thermal time constant)

A09 DC Braking 2 (Braking starting frequency)

F20 (DC Braking 1, Braking starting frequency)

A10 DC Braking 2 (Braking level) F21 (DC Braking 1, Braking level)

A11 DC Braking 2 (Braking time) F22 (DC Braking 1, Braking time)

A12 Starting Frequency 2 F23 (Starting Frequency 1)

A13 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 2

F37 (Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 1)

A14 Control Mode Selection 2 F42 (Control Mode Selection 1)

A15 Motor 2 (No. of poles) P01 (Motor 1, No. of poles)

A16 Motor 2 (Rated capacity) P02 (Motor 1, Rated capacity)

A17 Motor 2 (Rated current) P03 (Motor 1, Rated current)

A18 Motor 2 (Auto-tuning) P04 (Motor 1, Auto-tuning)

A19 Motor 2 (Online turning) P05 (Motor 1, Online tuning)

A20 Motor 2 (No-load current) P06 (Motor 1, No-load current)

A21 Motor 2 (%R1) P07 (Motor 1, %R1)

A22 Motor 2 (%X) P08 (Motor 1, %X)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-102
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

A23 Motor 2 (Slip compensation gain for driving)

P09 (Motor 1, Slip compensation gain for driving)

A24 Motor 2 (Slip compensation response time)

P10 (Motor 1, Slip compensation response time)

A25 Motor 2 (Slip compensation gain for braking)

P11 (Motor 1, Slip compensation gain for braking)

A26 Motor 2 (Rated slip frequency) P12 (Motor 1, Rated slip frequency)

A39 Motor 2 Selection P99 (Motor 1 Selection)

A40 Slip Compensation 2 (Operating conditions)

H68 (Slip Compensation 1, Operating conditions)

A41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2

H80 (Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1)

A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 H94 (Cumulative Motor Run Time 1)

A46 Startup Times of Motor 2 H44 (Startup Times of Motor 1)

Function codes in this section apply to motor 2. For details about motor 1 and motor 2, refer to the
descriptions of E1 to E05, "Select motor 2 / motor 1-- M2/M1."

Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-103
 9.2.7 J codes (Application functions)
J01 PID Control (Mode selection)

J02 PID Control (Remote command SV)

J03 PID Control P (Gain)

J04 PID Control I (Integral time)

J05 PID Control D (Differential time)

J06 PID Control (Feedback filter)

In PID control, the state of control object is detected by a sensor or similar device and is
compared with the commanded value (e.g. temperature control command). If there is any
deviation between them, the PID control operates so as to minimize it. Namely, it is a closed
loop feedback system that matches controlled variable (feedback amount). PID control expands
the application area of the inverter to process control such as flow control, pressure control,
temperature control, and speed control such as dancer control.
If PID control is enabled (J01 = 1, 2 or 3), the frequency control of the inverter is switched from
the drive frequency command generator block to the PID frequency command generator block.
PID process control block diagram

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-104
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Dancer control block diagram

Chap. 9

Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 4, Section 4.5 "PID Process Control Block" and
Section 4.6 "PID Dancer Control Block."


FUNCTION CODES
„ Mode Selection (J01)
J01 selects the PID control mode. Data for J01 Function
0 Disable
Enable
1
(Process control, normal operation)
Enable
2
(Process control, inverse operation)
3 Enable (Dancer control)
- Using J01 enables switching between normal and inverse operations against the PID control
output, so you can specify an increase/decrease of the motor rotating speed to the difference
(error component) between the commanded (input) and feedback amounts, making it
possible to apply the inverter to air conditioners. The IVS terminal command can also switch
operation between normal and inverse.
For details of switching between normal and inverse operations, refer to the descriptions
of E01 to E05.

Selecting Feedback Terminals
For feedback control, determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor
output.
• If the sensor is a current output type, use the current input terminal [C1] of the inverter.
• If the sensor is a voltage output type, use the voltage input terminal [12] of the inverter, or
switch over the terminal [C1] to the voltage input terminal and use it.
For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 through E63.
9-105
 Application example: Process control
The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0% through 100%. For
the given feedback input, determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain
adjustment.
When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V:
• Use terminal [12] since the connection terminal is for voltage input.
• Example
Set the gain (C32 for analog input adjustment) at 200% in order to make the maximum value
(5 V) of the external sensor's output correspond to 100%. Note that the input specification for
terminal [12] is 0 to 10 V corresponding to 0 to 100%; thus, a gain factor of 200% (= 10 V y
5 u 100) should be specified. Note also that any bias setting must not apply to feedback
control.

Application examples: Dancer control

Example 1. When the output level of the external sensor is r7 VDC:
• Use terminal [12] since the voltage input is of bipolar.
• Example
When the external sensor's output is of bipolar, the inverter controls the speed within the
range of r100%. To convert the output r7 VDC to r100%, set the gain (C32 for analog input
adjustment) at 143% as calculated below.
10 V
7V
| 143%

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-106
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Example 2. When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC:

• Use terminal [12] or [C1] (V2 function) since the voltage input is of unipolar.
• Example
When the external sensor's output is of unipolar, the inverter controls the speed within the
range of 0 to 100%.

This example sets the dancer reference position around the + 5 V (50%) point.

„ Remote command SV (J02)

J02 sets the source that specifies the command value (SV) under PID control.
Data for J02 Function
Keypad
Using the / keys on the keypad in conjunction with PID display
coefficients (specified by E40 and E41), you can specify 0 to 100% of the PID
0
command (r 100% for PID dancer control) in an easy-to-understand converted
command format. For details of operation, refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION

Chap. 9
USING THE KEYPAD."
PID command 1 (Terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2 function))
In addition to J02 setting, it is necessary to select PID command 1 for analog
1

FUNCTION CODES
input (specified by any of E61 to E63, function code data = 3). For details,
refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63.
Terminal command UP/DOWN
Using the UP or DOWN command in conjunction with PID display
coefficients (specified by E40 and E41), you can specify 0 to 100% of the PID
command (r 100% for PID dancer control) in an easy-to-understand converted
3 command format.
In addition to J02 setting, it is necessary to assign UP and DOWN commands
to any of terminals [X1] through [X5] with E01 through E05 (function code
data = 17, 18). For details of UP/DOWN operation, refer to the assignment of
the UP and DOWN commands.
Command via communications link
Use function code S13 that specifies the communications-linked PID
command. The transmission data of 20000 (decimal) is equal to 100%
4
(maximum frequency) of the PID command. For details of the
communications format, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448b).

• Other than the remote command selection by J02, the multi-frequency (C08 = 4)
specified by SS4 and SS8 terminal commands can also be selected as a preset
value for the PID command.
Calculate the setting data of the PID command using the expression below.
PID command data (%) = (Preset multi-frequency) y (Maximum frequency)
u 100
• In dancer control (J01 = 3), the setting from the keypad interlocks with data of
J57 (PID control: Dancer reference position), and is saved as function code data.
9-107
 Data Setting Range of PID Command (Only applicable to an analog input)
To select an analog input as a PID command, define the setting range of the PID command. As
with frequency setting, you can arbitrary map the relationship between the command and the
analog input value by adjusting the gain and bias.
For details, refer to the descriptions of C32, C34, C37, C39, C42, C44, C51, and C52.
(Example) Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at terminal [12] to 0 through 100%


PID display coefficient and monitoring
To monitor PID commands and feedback amounts, define the display factor for converting
them to numeric control values such as temperature for display.
Refer to the descriptions of E40 and E41 for details on display coefficients, and to E43 for
details on monitoring.

„ Gain (J03)
J03 specifies the gain for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.000 to 30.000 (multiple)

P (Proportional) action
An operation in which an MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the
deviation is called P action, which outputs a manipulated value in proportion to deviation.
However, the manipulated variable alone cannot eliminate deviation.
Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in P action. An
increase in gain speeds up response, but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output. A
decrease in gain delays response, but it stabilizes the inverter output.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-108
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Integral time (J04)

J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 3600.0 (s)
0.0 means that the integral component is ineffective.
I (Integral) action
An operation that the change rate of an MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is
proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I action, which outputs the manipulated
value that integrates the deviation. Therefore, I action is effective in bringing the feedback
amount close to the commanded value. For the system whose deviation rapidly changes,
however, this action cannot make it react quickly.
The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter, that is J04 data. The
longer the integral time, the slower the response. The reaction to the external disturbance also
becomes slow. The shorter the integral time, the faster the response. Setting too short integral
time, however, makes the inverter output tend to oscillate against the external disturbance.

Chap. 9
„ Differential time (J05)
J05 specifies the differential time for the PID processor.

FUNCTION CODES
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 600.00 (s)
0.00 means that the differential component is ineffective.

D (Differential) action
An operation that the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the
differential value of the deviation is called D action, that outputs the manipulated value that
differentiates the deviation. D action makes the inverter quickly react to a rapid change of
deviation.
The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter, that is J05 data.
Setting a long differential time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a
deviation occurs. Too long differential time makes the inverter output oscillation more. Setting
short differential time will weakens the suppression effect when the deviation occurs.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-109
 The combined use of P, I, and D actions are described below.
(1) PI control
PI control, which is a combination of P and I actions, is generally used to minimize the
remaining deviation caused by P action. PI control acts to always minimize the deviation even
if a commanded value changes or external disturbance steadily occurs. However, the longer the
integral time, the slower the system response to quick-changed control.
P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components.
(2) PD control
In PD control, the moment that a deviation occurs, the control rapidly generates much
manipulated value than that generated by D action alone, to suppress the deviation increase.
When the deviation becomes small, the behavior of P action becomes small.
A load including the integral component in the controlled system may oscillate due to the action
of the integral component if P action alone is applied. In such a case, use PD control to reduce
the oscillation caused by P action, for keeping the system stable. That is, PD control is applied
to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process.
(3) PID control
PID control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action
and the oscillation suppression of D action. PID control features minimal control deviation,
high precision and high stability.
In particular, PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence
of deviation.

Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes.
It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system
response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent. Repeat the following procedure to
determine the optimal solution for each system.
- Increase the data of J03 (PID control P (Gain)) within the range where the feedback signal
does not oscillate.
- Decrease the data of J04 (PID control I (Integral time)) within the range where the feedback
signal does not oscillate.
- Increase the data of J05 (PID control D (Differential time)) within the range where the
feedback signal does not oscillate.
Refining the system response waveforms is shown below.
1) Suppressing overshoot
Increase the data of J04 (Integral time) and decrease the data of J05 (Differential time.)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-110
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

2) Quick stabilizing (moderate overshoot allowable)

Decrease the data of J03 (Gain) and increase that of J05 (Differential time).

3) Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the integral time specified by J04
Increase the data of J04 (Integral time).

4) Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by
J05 (Differential time)
Decrease the data of J05 (Differential time).
Decrease the data of J03 (Gain), when the oscillation cannot be suppressed even if the

Chap. 9
differential time is set at 0 sec.

FUNCTION CODES
„ Feedback filter (J06)
J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 900.0 (s)
- This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop. Setting too long a time constant makes
the system response slow.
To specify the filter for feedback signals in detail under PID dancer control, apply
filter time constants for analog input (C33, C38 and C43).

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-111
 J10 PID Control (Anti reset windup)

J10 suppresses overshoot in control with PID processor. As long as the deviation between the
feedback and the PID command is beyond the preset range, the integrator holds its value and
does not perform integration operation.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 200 (%)

J11 PID Control (Select alarm output)


J12 PID Control (Upper level alarm (AH))

J13 PID Control (Lower level alarm (AL))

Two types of alarm signals can be output associated with PID control: absolute-value alarm and
deviation alarm. You need to assign the PID alarm output PID-ALM to one of the digital output
terminals (function code data = 42).

„ Select alarm output (J11)

J11 specifies the alarm type. The table below lists all the alarms available in the system.
Data for J11 Alarm Description
0 Absolute-value While PV < AL or AH < PV, PID-ALM is ON.
alarm

1 Absolute-value Same as above (with Hold)

alarm (with Hold)
2 Absolute-value Same as above (with Latch)
alarm (with Latch)
3 Absolute-value Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
alarm (with Hold
and Latch)
4 Deviation alarm While PV < SV - AL or SV + AH < PV, PID-ALM is
ON.

9-112
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

Data for J11 Alarm Description

5 Deviation alarm Same as above (with Hold)
(with Hold)
6 Deviation alarm Same as above (with Latch)
(with Latch)
7 Deviation alarm Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
(with Hold and
Latch)

Hold: During the power-on sequence, the alarm output is kept OFF (disabled) even when the
monitored quantity is within the alarm range. Once it goes out of the alarm range, and
comes into the alarm range again, the alarm is enabled.
Latch: Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON,
the alarm will remain ON even if it goes out of the alarm range. To release the latch,
perform a reset by using the key or turning the RST terminal command ON, etc.
Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm.

„ Upper level alarm (AH) (J12)

J12 specifies the upper limit of the alarm (AH) in percentage (%) of the feedback amount.

„ Lower level alarm (AL) (J13)

J13 specifies the lower limit of the alarm (AL) in percentage (%) of the feedback amount.
The value displayed (%) is the ratio of the upper/lower limit to the full scale (10 V

Chap. 9
or 20 mA) of the feedback amount (in the case of a gain of 100%).
Upper level alarm (AH) and lower level alarm (AL) also apply to the following alarms.

How to handle the alarm:

FUNCTION CODES
Alarm Description Select alarm output
Parameter setting
(J11)
Upper limit ON when AH < PV Absolute-value J13 (AL) = 0
(absolute) alarm
Lower limit ON when PV < AL J12 (AH) = 100%
(absolute)
Upper limit ON when SV + AH < PV Deviation alarm J13 (AL) = 100%
(deviation)
Lower limit ON when PV < SV - AL J12 (AH) = 100%
(deviation)
Upper/lower limit ON when |SV - PV| > AL J13 (AL) = J12 (AH)
(deviation)
Upper/lower range ON when SV - AL < PV < Deviation alarm DO inversed
limit (deviation) SV + AL
Upper/lower range ON when AL < PV < AH Absolute-value DO inversed
limit (absolute) alarm
Upper/lower range ON when SV - AL < PV < Deviation alarm DO inversed
limit (deviation) SV + AH

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-113
 J18 PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output)

J19 PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output)

The upper and lower limiter can be specified to the PID output, exclusively used for PID control.
The settings are ignored when PID cancel is enabled and the inverter is operated at the reference
frequency previously specified.

„ PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output) (J18)

J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in %. If you specify "999," the
setting of the frequency limiter (High) (F15) will serve as the upper limit.

„ PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output) (J19)

J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in %. If you specify "999," the
setting of the frequency limiter (Low) (F16) will serve as the lower limit.

J56 PID Control (Speed command filter)


Not used.

J57 PID Control (Dancer reference position)


J57 specifies the dancer reference position in -100% to +100% for dancer control. The
reference position can be specified as the function code from the keypad by this function code if
J02 = 0 (keypad), or as typical operation of the PID command.
For the setting procedure of the PID command, refer to Chapter 3.

J58 PID Control (Detection width of dancer position deviation)


J59 PID Control P (Gain) 2

J60 PID Control I (Integral time) 2

J61 PID Control D (Differential time) 2

The moment the feedback value of dancer roll position comes into the range of "the dancer
reference position r the dancer reference position detection bandwidth (J58)," the inverter
switches PID constants from the combination of J03, J04 and J05 to that of J59, J60 and J61,
respectively in its PID processor. Giving a boost to the system response by raising the P gain
may improve the system performance in the dancer roll positioning accuracy.
„ Detection width of dancer position deviation (J58)
J58 specifies the bandwidth in 1 to 100%. Specification of 0 does not switch PID constants.

„ P (Gain) 2 (J59)

„ I (Integral time) 2 (J60)

„ D (Differential time) 2 (J61)

Descriptions for J59, J60, and J61 are the same as those of PID control P (Gain) (J03), I
(Integral time) (J04), and D (Differential time) (J05), respectively.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-114
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

J62 PID Control (PID control block selection)


This function code allows you to select either adding or subtracting the PID dancer control
processor output to the primary speed command, and the PID processor output for the primary
speed command either controls by the ratio (%) or compensates by the absolute value (Hz).

Data for J62 Control function

Decimal Bit 1 Bit 0 Control value type Operation for the primary
speed command
0 0 0 Absolute value (Hz) Addition
1 0 1 Absolute value (Hz) Subtraction
2 1 0 Ratio (%) Addition
3 1 1 Ratio (%) Subtraction

J63 Overload Stop (Detection value)


J64 Overload Stop (Detection level)

J65 Overload Stop (Mode selection)

J66 Overload Stop (Operation condition)

J67 Overload Stop (Timer)

Chap. 9

When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the detection level specified by J64 for the
period specified by J67, the inverter activates the overload stop function according to operation

FUNCTION CODES
specified by J65. Use this function for such as system protection from applying a load that
cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design or system in
which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper.

„ Detection value (J63)

J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored.

Data for J63 Detection value Description
To improve the accuracy of torque calculation, be sure to
0 Output torque auto-tune the inverter for the applied motor.
This setting covers the driving torque only.
The no-load current to the motor always flows. Specify J64
1 Output current (Detection level) correctly considering the no-load current
of the applied motor.


„ Detection level (J64)

J64 specifies the detection level putting the rated torque and current of the motor as 100%.


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-115
 „ Mode selection (J65)

J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64.
Data for J65 Mode Description
0 Disable The inverter cancels the overload stop function.
The inverter decelerate-to-stops the motor by the
1 Decelerate to stop
specified deceleration time.
The inverter shuts down the output immediately, and the
2 Coast to a stop
motor coast-to-stops.
The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit
operation, and is controlling the output current to keep the
hold toque until the run command turned OFF. Make the
Mechanical mechanical brake turn on before turning the run
3
stopper command OFF.
The inverter issues an alarm IOL or IOL2 during the
mechanical stopper operation.
• Once the overload stop function is activated, the inverter holds it and cannot
accelerate the motor again. To reaccelerate the motor, turn the run command OFF
and ON again.
• If J65 = 3, the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified.

Configuration examples
Operation Selection J65 = 1 or 2

Operation selection J65 = 3

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-116
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Operation condition (J66)

J66 specifies the inverter’s operation Data for J66 Applicable operation mode
state to apply the overload stop
function. Takes effect in the constant
0 speed or deceleration operation
Note that carefully specify it so as not mode.
to induce a malfunction by any setting
that is not needed. Takes effect in the constant
1
speed operation mode.
Takes effect in all the operation
2
modes.

„ Timer (J67)
J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop function by any
unexpected momentary load fluctuation.
If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the
timer J67, the inverter activate it in case of J65 = 1 or 2.
If J65 = 3, the timer setting is ignored. In this case, the inverter decelerates the
motor instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is
to interfere running of this function.


J68 Braking Signal (Brake OFF current)


J69 Braking Signal (Brake OFF frequency)

Chap. 9

J70 Braking Signal (Brake OFF timer)

J71 Braking Signal (Brake ON frequency)

FUNCTION CODES

J72 Braking Signal (Brake ON timer)

These function codes are for the brake releasing/turning-on signals of hoisting/elevating
machines.
Releasing the Brake
The inverter releases the brake (Terminal command BRKS: ON) after checking torque
generation of the motor, monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency to
the motor, which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough.
Function code Name Data setting range
0 to 200%:
J68 Brake OFF current
Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100%.
J69 Brake OFF frequency 0.0 to 25.0 Hz
J70 Brake OFF timer 0.0 to 5.0 s

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-117
 Turning-on the brake
To assure the service life of brake body, the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough
less than one specified, monitoring that the run command turns OFF and the output frequency
lowers than one specified for the time long enough, and turn-on the brake (terminal command
BRKS: OFF).
Function code Name Data setting range
J71 Brake ON frequency 0.0 to 25.0 Hz
J72 Brake ON timer 0.0 to 5.0 s

• The braking signal control is only applicable to motor 1. If the motor switching
function selects motor 2, the braking signal always remains at state of turning-on.
• When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast-to-stop
terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter, the braking signal turns-on
immediately.

J73 to J86 Reserved*


* These are reserved for particular manufacturers. Do not access them.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-118
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

9.2.8 y codes (Link functions)

y01 to y20 RS-485 Communication (Standard and option)

Up to two ports of RS-485 communications link are available, including the terminal block
option as shown below.

Port Route Function code Applicable equipment

Port 1 Standard RS-485 y01 through y10 Standard keypad
Communications (for Multi-function keypad
connection with keypad) FRENIC Loader
via RJ-45 port Host equipment
Port 2 Optional RS-485 y11 through y20 Host equipment
communications card via No FRENIC Loader supported
the terminal port on the
card

To connect any of the applicable devices, follow the procedures shown below.

(1) Standard keypad and optional multi-function keypad

The standard keypad and optional multi-function keypad allow you to run and monitor the
inverter.
There is no need to set the y codes.

(2) FRENIC Loader

Using your PC running FRENIC Loader, you can monitor the inverter’s running status

Chap. 9
information, edit function codes, and test-run the inverters.

For the setting of y codes, refer to function codes y01 to y10. For details, refer to the
FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.

FUNCTION CODES
(3) Host equipment
The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting host equipment such as a PC and
PLC to the inverter. Modbus RTU* and Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol are available for
communications protocols.
*Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon, Inc.

For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-119
 „ Station address (y01 for standard port and y11 for option port)
y01 and y11 specify the station address for the RS-485 communications link. The table below
lists the protocols and the station address setting ranges.

Protocol Station address Broadcast address

Modbus RTU protocol 1 to 247 0
FRENIC Loader protocol 1 to 255 None
FUJI general-purpose inverter protocol 1 to 31 99

- If any wrong address beyond the above range is specified, no response is returned since the
inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries except the broadcast message.
- To use FRENIC Loader, set the station address that matches the connected PC.

„ Communications error processing (y02 for standard port and y12 for option port)
y02 and y12 specify the operation performed when an RS-485 communications error has
occurred.
RS-485 communications errors contain logical errors such as address error, parity error,
framing error, and transmission protocol error, and physical errors such as communications
disconnection error set by y08 and y18. In each case, these are judged as an error only when the
inverter is running while the operation command or frequency command has been set to the
configuration specified through RS-485 communications. When neither the operation
command nor frequency command is issued through RS-485 communications, or the inverter is
not running, error occurrence is not recognized.
Data for y02
Function
and y12
Immediately trip after showing an RS-485 communications error (GT for
0
y02 and GTR for y12). (The inverter stops with alarm issue.)
Run during the time set on the error processing timer (y03, y13), display an
1 RS-485 communications error (GT for y02 and GTR for y12), and then stop
operation. (The inverter stops with alarm issue.)
Retry transmission during the time set on the error processing timer (y03,
y13). If communications link is recovered, continue operation. Otherwise,
2
display an RS-485 communications error (GT for y02 and GTR for y12) and
stop operation. (The inverter stops with alarm issue.)
3 Continue to run even when a communications error occurs.

For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.

„ Timer (y03 and y13)

y03 or y13 specifies an error processing timer.
When the set timer count has elapsed because of no response on other end etc., if a response
request was issued, the inverter interprets that an error occurs. See the section of "No-response
error detection time (y08, y18)."
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (s)


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-120
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

„ Baud rate (y04 and y14)

y04 and y14 specify the transmission speed Data for y04
for RS-485 communications. Transmission speed (bps)
and y14
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: Set the 0 2400
same transmission speed as that
specified by the connected PC. 1 4800
2 9600
3 19200
4 38400


„ Data length (y05 and y15)
y05 and y15 specify the character length Data for y05
for transmission. Data length
and y15
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: 0 8 bits
Loader sets the length in 8 bits
automatically. (The same applies to the 1 7 bits
Modbus RTU protocol.)


„ Parity check (y06 and y16)

y06 and y16 specify the property of the Data for y06
Parity
parity bit. and y16
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: None
0

Chap. 9
Loader sets it to the even parity (2 stop bits for Modbus RTU)
automatically. Even parity
1
(1 stop bit for Modbus RTU)

FUNCTION CODES
Odd parity
2
(1 stop bit for Modbus RTU)
None
3
(1 stop bit for Modbus RTU)


„ Stop bits (y07 and y17)

y07 and y17 specify the number of stop bits. Data for y07
Stop bit(s)
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: and y17
Loader sets it to 1 bit automatically. 0 2 bits
For the Modbus RTU protocol, the stop 1 1 bit
bits are automatically determined
associated with the property of parity
bits. So no setting is required.




CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-121
 „ No-response error detection time (y08 and y18)
y08 and y18 specify the time interval from Data for y08
the inverter detecting no access until it Function
and y18
enters communications error alarm mode
due to network failure and processes the 0 Disable
communications error. This applies to a 1 to 60 1 to 60 s
mechanical system that always accesses its
station within a predetermined interval
during communications using the RS-485
communications link.
For the processing of communications
errors, refer to y02 and y12.

„ Response interval (y09 and y19)

y09 and y19 specify the latency time after the end of receiving a query sent from the host
equipment (such as a PC or PLC) to the start of sending the response. This function allows
using equipment whose response time is slow while a network requires quick response,
enabling the inverter to send a response timely by the latency time setting.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 (s)

T1 = Latency time + D
where D is the processing time inside the inverter. This time may vary depending on the
processing status and the command processed in the inverter.
For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.
When setting the inverter with FRENIC Loader, pay sufficient attention to the
performance and/or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as
RS-485RS-232C communications level converter. Note that some protocol
converters monitor the communications status and switch the send/receive of
transmission data by a timer.


„ Protocol selection (y10)
y10 specifies the communications protocol Data for y10 Protocol
for the standard RS-485 port.
0 Modbus RTU protocol
- Specifying FRENIC loader to connect to
the inverter can only be made by y10. 1 FRENIC Loader protocol
Select FRENIC Loader (y10 = 1). Fuji general-purpose
2
inverter protocol


„ Protocol selection (y20)
y20 specifies the communications protocol Data for y20 Protocol
for the optional communications port.
0 Modbus RTU protocol
Fuji general-purpose
2
inverter protocol

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-122
 9.2 Overview of Function Codes

y98 Bus Link Function (Mode selection)

H30 (Communications Link Function, Mode selection)

For setting data for y98 bus link function (Mode selection), refer to the description of function
code H30.

y99 Loader Link Function (Mode selection)


This is a link switching function for FRENIC Loader. Rewriting the data of y99 to enable
RS-485 communications from Loader helps Loader send the inverter the frequency and/or run
commands. Since the data to be set in the function code of the inverter is automatically set by
Loader, no keypad operation is required. While Loader is selected as the source of the run
command, if the PC runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop command sent from
Loader, disconnect the RS-485 communications cable from the standard port (Keypad),
connect a keypad instead, and reset the y99 to "0." This setting "0" in y99 means that the run
and frequency command source specified by function code H30 takes place.
Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99. When power is turned off, the data in y99
is lost (y99 is reset to "0").

Function
Data for y99
Frequency command Run command
0 Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data
Via RS-485 communications link
1 Follow H30 and y98 data
(FRENIC Loader, S01 and S05)
Via RS-485 communications link
2 Follow H30 and y98 data

Chap. 9
(FRENIC Loader, S06)
Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link
3
(FRENIC Loader, S01 and S05) (FRENIC Loader, S06)


FUNCTION CODES

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
9-123
 Appendices
Contents

App.A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ............................................................... A-1

A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices .................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Noise .................................................................................................................................................. A-2
A.3 Noise prevention ................................................................................................................................ A-4
App.B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters ...................... A-12
B.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ......................................................................................... A-12
B.2 Effect of surge voltages .................................................................................................................... A-13
B.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages .......................................................................................... A-13
B.4 Regarding existing equipment.......................................................................................................... A-14
App.C Inverter Generating Loss.................................................................................................................. A-15
App.D Conversion from SI Units ................................................................................................................ A-16
App.E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires.............................................................................................. A-18
App.F Replacement Information................................................................................................................. A-20
F.1 External dimensions comparison tables ........................................................................................... A-20
F.2 Terminal arrangements and symbols ................................................................................................ A-23
F.3 Function codes.................................................................................................................................. A-26

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)

App.A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical

noise)
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical
Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (April 1994). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. -

A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices

Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields. This paper describes the effect
that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as
inverters, as well as introducing noise prevention measures. (Refer to Section A.3 [3], "Noise
prevention examples" for details.)
[1] Effect on AM radios
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter.
(An inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets.)
Probable cause Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter.
Measures Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective.
[2] Effect on telephones
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the
inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear.
Probable cause A high-frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters
shielded telephone cables, causing noise.
Measures It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and
return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter.
[3] Effect on proximity switches

App.
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, proximity switches (capacitance-type) may malfunction.
Probable cause The capacitance-type proximity switches may provide inferior noise immunity.
Measures It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change the
power supply treatment of the proximity switches. The proximity switches can be
replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic types.
[4] Effect on pressure sensors
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, pressure sensors may malfunction.
Probable cause Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line.
Measures It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or to
change the wiring.
[5] Effect on position detectors (pulse encoders)
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift the
stop position of a machine.
Probable cause Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power
lines are bundled together.
Measure The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by separating
the PG signal lines and power lines. Providing noise filters at the input and output
terminals is also an effective measure.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-1
 A.2 Noise
This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to
noise.

[1] Inverter noise

Figure A.1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration. The inverter converts AC to DC
(rectification) in a converter unit, and converts DC to AC (inversion) with 3-phase variable voltage
and variable frequency. The conversion (inversion) is performed by PWM implemented by switching
six transistors (IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, etc), and is used for variable speed motor
control.
Switching noise is generated by high-speed on/off switching of the six transistors. Noise current (i) is
emitted and at each high-speed on/off switching, the noise current flows through stray capacitance (C)
of the inverter, cable and motor to the ground. The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows:
i = C·dv/dt
It is related to the stray capacitance (C) and dv/dt (switching speed of the transistors). Further, this
noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors
are switched on or off.
In addition to the main circuit of the inverter, the DC-to-DC switching power regulator (DC/DC
converter), which is the power source for the control circuit of the inverter, may be a noise source in
the same principles as stated above.
The frequency band of this noise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz. Therefore, the noise will
affect devices such as AM radios using low frequency band, but will not virtually affect FM radios and
television sets using higher frequency than this frequency band.

Figure A.1 Outline of Inverter Configuration

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-2
 App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)

[2] Types of noise

Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and
the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the motor.
The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A.2. According to those routes, noises are roughly
classified into three types--conduction noise, induction noise, and radiation noise.

Figure A.2 Noise Propagation Routes

(1) Conduction noise

Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect
peripheral devices of the inverter (Figure A.3). This noise is called "conduction noise." Some
conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit c. If the ground wires are connected to a
common ground, conduction noise will propagate through route d. As shown in route e, some
conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires.

App.
Figure A.3 Conduction Noise

(2) Induction noise

When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and
output sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing, noise will be induced into
those wires and signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction (Figure A.4) or
electrostatic induction (Figure A.5). This is called "induction noise" f.

Figure A.4 Electromagnetic Induced Noise

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-3
 Figure A.5 Electrostatic Induced Noise

(3) Radiation noise

Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires (that act as antennas) at the
input and output sides of the inverter so as to affect peripheral devices. This noise is called "radiation
noise" as shown below. Not only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing
inverters may also act as antennas.

Figure A.6 Radiation Noise

A.3 Noise prevention

The more noise prevention is strengthened, the more effective. However, with the use of appropriate
measures, noise problems may be resolved easily. It is necessary to implement economical noise
prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions.
[1] Noise prevention prior to installation
Before installing an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel, you need to consider
noise prevention. Once noise problems occur, it will cost additional materials and time for solving
them.
Noise prevention prior to installation includes:
1) Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits
2) Putting main circuit wiring into a metal conduit pipe
3) Using shielded wires or twisted shielded wires for control circuits.
4) Implementing appropriate grounding work and grounding wiring.
These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-4
 App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)

[2] Implementation of noise prevention measures

There are two types of noise prevention measures--one for noise propagation routes and the other for
noise receiving sides (that are affected by noise).
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include:
Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring, avoiding noise effect.
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include:
1) Inserting a noise filter that reduces the noise level.
2) Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal control panel that will confine noise, and
3) Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route.
Table A.1 lists the noise prevention measures, their goals, and propagation routes.
Table A.1 Noise Prevention Measures

Goal of noise prevention

Conduction route
measures
Make it
Noise prevention method more Cutoff
Reduce Conduc- Induc- Radia-
difficult noise Confine
noise tion tion tion
to conduc- noise
level noise noise noise
receive tion
noise
Separate main circuit
Y Y
from control circuit
Minimize wiring distance Y Y Y Y
Avoid parallel and
Y Y
bundled wiring
Wiring and Use appropriate
installation Y Y Y Y
grounding
Use shielded wire and
Y Y Y
twisted shielded wire

App.
Use shielded cable in
Y Y Y
main circuit
Use metal conduit pipe Y Y Y
Appropriate arrangement
Control Y Y Y
of devices in panel
panel
Metal control panel Y Y Y

Anti-noise Line filter Y Y Y Y

device Insulation transformer Y Y Y
Use a passive capacitor
Y Y Y
Measures at for control circuit
noise Use ferrite core for
receiving Y Y Y Y
control circuit
sides
Line filter Y Y Y
Separate power supply
Y Y
systems
Others
Lower the carrier
Y* Y Y Y
frequency
Y: Effective, Y*: Effective conditionally, Blank: Not effective

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-5
 What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration.
(1) Wiring and grounding
As shown in Figure A.7, separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible
regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter. Use
shielded wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises, and minimize the
wiring distance. Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring.

Figure A.7 Separate Wiring

For the main circuit wiring, use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent
noise propagation (refer to Figure A.8).
The shield (braided wire) of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base (common) side
of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi-point connection
(refer to Figure A.9).
The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current, but
also to block noise penetration and radiation. Corresponding to the main circuit voltage, the grounding
work should be Class D (300 VAC or less, grounding resistance: 100: or less) and Class C (300 to
600 VAC, grounding resistance: 10: or less). Each ground wire is to be provided with its own ground
or separately wired to a grounding point.

Figure A.8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe Figure A.9 Treatment of Braided Wire of
Shielded Wire

(2) Control panel

The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal, which can shield noise
radiated from the inverter itself.
When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control
panel, be careful with the layout of each device. If necessary, arrange shield plates between the
inverter and peripheral devices.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-6
 App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)

(3) Anti-noise devices

To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main
circuit wiring to the air, a line filter and power supply transformer should be used (refer to Figure
A.10).
Line filters are available in these types--the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected
in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power supply
line and the orthodox type such as an LC filter to meet radio noise regulations. Use them according to
the targeted effect for reducing noise.
Power supply transformers include common insulated transformers, shielded transformers, and
noise-cutting transformers. These transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise
propagation.

(a) Capacitive filter (b) Inductive filter (c) LC filter

(zero-phase reactor)
Figure A.10 Various Filters and their Connection

(4) Noise prevention measures at the receiving side

It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same
control panel as the inverter or located near an inverter. Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded
wires are used to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices. The following
treatments are also implemented.

App.
1) Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals
of the signal circuit in parallel.
2) Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or
passing signal lines through ferrite core beads. It is also effective to widen the signal base lines (0
V line) or grounding lines.
(5) Other
The level of generating/propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter. The
higher the carrier frequency, the higher the noise level.
In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed, lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the
generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under
driving conditions.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-7
 [3] Noise prevention examples
Table A.2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter.
Table A.2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures

Target
No. Phenomena Noise prevention measures
device Notes
1 AM When operating an inverter, 1) Install an LC filter at the 1) The radiation
radio noise enters into an AM power supply side of the noise of the
radio broadcast (500 to 1500 inverter. (In some cases, a wiring can be
kHz). capacitive filter may be reduced.
used as a simple method.)
2) Install a metal conduit
wiring between the
motor and inverter.
2) The conduction
noise to the
power supply
side can be
reduced.

<Possible cause> Note: Sufficient

The AM radio may receive improvement may
noise radiated from wires at not be expected in
the power supply and output narrow regions
sides of the inverter. such as between
Note: Minimize the distance between mountains.
the LC filter and inverter as short as
possible (within 3.3ft (1m)).

2 AM When operating an inverter, 1) Install inductive filters at 1) The radiation

radio noise enters into an AM the input and output sides noise of the
radio broadcast (500 to 1500 of the inverter. wiring can be
kHz). reduced.

The number of turns of

<Possible cause> the zero-phase reactor (or
The AM radio may receive ferrite ring) should be as
noise radiated from the large as possible. In
power line at the power addition, wiring between
supply side of the inverter. the inverter and the
zero-phase reactor (or
ferrite ring) should be as
short as possible. (within
1m)
2) When further
improvement is
necessary, install LC
filters.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-8
 App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)

Table A.2 Continued

Target
No. Phenomena Noise prevention measures
device Notes
3 Tele- When driving a ventilation 1) Connect the ground 1) The effect of the
phone fan with an inverter, noise terminals of the motors inductive filter
(in a enters a telephone in a in a common connection. and LC filter
common private residence at a Return to the inverter may not be
private distance of 131ft (40m). panel, and insert a 1 PF expected
residence capacitor between the because of sound
at a input terminal of the frequency
distance inverter and ground. component.
of 131ft 2) In the case of a
(40m)) V-connection
power supply
transformer in a
230V system, it
is necessary to
connect
capacitors as
shown in the
<Possible cause> following figure,
A high-frequency leakage because of
current from the inverter and different
motor flowed to grounded potentials to
part of the telephone cable ground.㩷
shield. During the current's 㩷 
㩷
return trip, it flowed through
a grounded pole transformer,
and noise entered the
telephone by electrostatic
induction.

4 Photo- A photoelectric relay 1) As a temporary measure, 1) The wiring is

App.
electric malfunctioned when the Insert a 0.1PF capacitor separated by
relay inverter runs the motor. between the 0 V terminal more than
[The inverter and motor are of the power supply 11.81inch (30
installed in the same place circuit in the detection cm).㩷
(for overhead traveling)]㩷 unit of the overhead 2) When separation
photoelectric relay and a is impossible,
frame of the overhead signals can be
panel. received and sent
㩷 with dry contacts
etc.
3) Do not wire
low-current
signal lines and
<Possible cause> 㩷 power lines in
It is considered that 2) As a permanent measure, parallel.
induction noise entered the move the 24 V power 㩷
photoelectric relay since the supply from the ground
inverter's input power supply to the overhead unit so
line and the photoelectric that signals are sent to the
relay's wiring are in parallel ground side with relay
separated by approximately contacts in the ceiling
0.98inch (25mm) over a part.
distance of 98 to 131ft (30 to 㩷
40m). Due to conditions of
the installation, these lines
cannot be separated.

A-9
 Table A.2 Continued

Target
No. Phenomena Noise prevention measures
device Notes
5 Photo- A photoelectric relay 1) Insert a 0.1 PF capacitor 1) If a low-current
electric malfunctioned when the between the output circuit at the
relay inverter was operated. common terminal of the malfunctioning
amplifier of the side is observed,
photoelectric relay and the measures
the frame. may be simple
and economical.

<Possible cause>
Although the inverter and
photoelectric relay are
separated by a sufficient
distance but the power
supplies share a common
connection, it is considered
that conduction noise entered
through the power supply
line into the photoelectric
relay.
6 Prox- A proximity switch 1) Install an LC filter at the 1) Noise generated
imity malfunctioned. output side of the in the inverter
switch inverter. can be reduced.
(capaci- 2) Install a capacitive filter 2) The switch is
tance at the input side of the superseded by a
type) inverter. proximity switch
3) Ground the 0 V of superior noise
(common) line of the DC immunity (such
power supply of the as a magnetic
<Possible cause> proximity switch type).
It is considered that the through a capacitor to
capacitance type proximity the box body of the
switch is susceptible to machine.
conduction and radiation
noise because of its low
noise immunity.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-10
 App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)

Table A.2 Continued

Target
No. Phenomena Noise prevention measures
device Notes
7 Pressure A pressure sensor 1) Install an LC filter on 1) The shielded
sensor malfunctioned. the input side of the parts of shield
inverter. wires for sensor
2) Connect the shield of signals are
the shielded wire of the connected to a
pressure sensor to the 0 common point in
V line (common) of the the system.
pressure sensor, 2) Conduction
changing the original noise from the
connection. inverter can be
<Possible cause> reduced.
The pressure sensor may
malfunction due to noise that
came from the box body
through the shielded wire.

8 Position Erroneous-pulse outputs 1) Install an LC filter and a 1) This is an

detector from a pulse converter capacitive filter at the example of a
(pulse caused a shift in the stop input side of the inverter. measure where
encoder) position of a crane. 2) Install an LC filter at the the power line
output side of the and signal line
inverter. cannot be
separated.
2) Induction noise
and radiation
noise at the
output side of the

App.
inverter can be
<Possible cause> reduced.
Erroneous pulses may be
outputted by induction noise
since the power line of the
motor and the signal line of
the PG are bundled together.
9 Program The PLC program sometimes 1) Install a capacitive filter 1) Total conduction
mable malfunctions. and an LC filter on the noise and
logic input side of the inverter. induction noise
controller 2) Install an LC filter on the in the electric
(PLC) output side of the line can be
inverter. reduced.
3) Lower the carrier
frequency of the inverter.
<Possible cause>
Since the power supply
system is the same for the
PLC and inverter, it is
considered that noise enters
the PLC through the power
supply.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-11
 App.B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors
Driven with 460 V Class Inverters
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical
Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (March, 1995). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. -

Preface
When an inverter drives a motor, surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are
superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals. If the surge voltages
are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage.
For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages and
countermeasures against them.
Refer to A.2 [1] "Inverter noise" for details of the principle of inverter operation.

B.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages

As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage, the
magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes about 2 times that of the source voltage (about 620 V in
case of an input voltage of 440 VAC). The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC
voltage value.
But, as there exists inductance (L) and stray capacitance (C) in wiring between the inverter and the
motor, the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating
in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals. (Refer to Figure
C.1)
This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage (620 V x 2 =
approximately 1,200 V) depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring
conditions.

Figure C.1 Voltage Waveform of Individual Portions

A measured example in Figure C.2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage
with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor.
From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring
length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage.
The shorter a pulse rise time becomes, the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a
short wiring length.
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-12
 App. B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters

Figure C.2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage

B.2 Effect of surge voltages

The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor terminals and
depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation.
When the motor is driven with a 230 V class inverter, the dielectric strength of the insulation is no
problem since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages
(the DC voltage is only about 300 V).
But in case of a 460 V class inverter, the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the
wiring length, the surge voltages may greatly increase and sometimes result in damage to the
insulation.

App.
B.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages
When driving a motor with a 460 V class inverter, the following methods are countermeasures against
damage to the motor insulation by the surge voltages.

[1] Method using motors with enhanced insulation

Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge withstanding to be improved.
[2] Method to suppress surge voltages
There are two methods for suppressing the surge voltages, one is to reduce the voltage rise time and
another is to reduce the voltage peak value.
(1) Output reactor
If wiring length is relatively short, the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise
time (dv/dt) with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter. (Refer to Figure
C.3 (1).)

However, if the wiring length becomes long, suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be
difficult.
(2) Output filter
Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to
be reduced. (Refer to Figure C.3 (2).)
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-13
 (1) Output reactor (2) Output filter
Figure C.3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage

B.4 Regarding existing equipment

[1] In case of a motor being driven with 460 V class inverter
A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating
from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0.013% under the surge
voltage condition of over 1,100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after commissioning
the inverter. Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage
after a lapse of several months of commissioning.
[2] In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 460 V class inverter
We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the method of Section C.3.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-14
 App. C Inverter Generating Loss

App.C Inverter Generating Loss

The table below lists the inverter generating loss.

Generating loss (W)

Nominal
Power supply
applied motor Inverter type Low carrier High carrier
voltage
(HP) frequency frequency
(2 kHz) (15 kHz)
1/8 FRNF12E1S-2U 16 18
1/4 FRNF25E1S-2U 23 27
1/2 FRNF50E1S-2U 35 39
1 FRN001E1S-2U 54 58
2 FRN002E1S-2U 74 95
Three-phase
3 FRN003E1S-2U 98 128
230 V
5 FRN005E1S-2U 166 231
7.5 FRN007E1S-2U 179 232
10 FRN010E1S-2U 287 364
15 FRN015E1S-2U 444 545
20 FRN020E1S-2U 527 700
1/2 FRNF50E1S-4U 30 52
1 FRN001E1S-4U 40 72
2 FRN002E1S-4U 57 104
3 FRN003E1S-4U 79 147
Three-phase
5 FRN005E1S-4U 121 219
460 V
7.5 FRN007E1S-4U 151 283

App.
10 FRN010E1S-4U 227 399
15 FRN015E1S-4U 302 499
20 FRN020E1S-4U 332 602
1/8 FRNF12E1S-7U 16 18
1/4 FRNF25E1S-7U 23 27
Single-phase 1/2 FRNF50E1S-7U 36 40
230 V 1 FRN001E1S-7U 55 59
2 FRN002E1S-7U 78 100
3 FRN003E1S-7U 105 135

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-15
 App.D Conversion from SI Units
All expressions given in Chapter 7, "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER
CAPACITIES" are based on SI units (The International System of Units). This section explains how to
convert expressions to other units.

[1] Conversion of units

(1) Force (6) Inertia constant
• 1 (kgf) | 9.8 (N) J (kg·m2) : moment of inertia
• 1 (N) | 0.102 (kgf) GD2 (kg·m2) : flywheel effect

(2) Torque • GD2 = 4 J

• 1 (kgf·m) | 9.8 (N·m) 2
• J GD
• 1 (N·m) | 0.102 (kgf·m) 4
(7) Pressure and stress
(3) Work and energy
• 1 (mmAq) | 9.8 (Pa) | 9.8 (N/m2)
• 1 (kgf·m) | 9.8 (N·m) = 9.8(J)
= 9.8 (W·s) • 1(Pa) | 1(N/m2) | 0.102 (mmAq)
• 1 (bar) | 100000 (Pa) | 1.02 (kg·cm2)
(4) Power • 1 (kg·cm2) | 98000 (Pa) | 980 (mbar)
• 1 (kgf·m/s) | 9.8 (N·m/s) = 9.8 (J/s) = • 1 atmospheric pressure = 1013 (mbar)
9.8(W) = 760 (mmHg) = 101300 (Pa)
• 1 (N·m/s) | 1 (J/s) = 1 (W) | 1.033 (kg/cm2)
| 0.102 (kgf·m/s) 
(5) Rotation speed 

2S
• 1 (r/min) (rad / s) | 0.1047 (rad/s) 
60
60 
• 1 (rad / s) (r/min) | 9.549 (r/min)
2S

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-16
 App. D Conversion from SI Units

[2] Calculation formula

(1) Torque, power, and rotation speed (4) Acceleration torque
2S Driving mode
• P (W) | x N (r/min) x W (N x m) 
60 J (kg x m2) 'N (r / min)
• W (N x m) | x 
• P ( W ) | 1.026 x N (r/min) x T (kgf x m) 9.55 't (s) x KG
2 ( kg x 2) 'N ( r / min)
P (W) • T (kgf x m) | GD m x 
• W (N x m) | 9.55 x  375 't (s) x KG
N (r/min)
Braking mode
P (W)
• T (kgf x m) | 0.974 x  J (kg x m2) 'N ( r / min) x KG
N (r/min) • W (N x m) | x 
9.55 't (s)
(2) Kinetic energy 2 ( kg x 2) 'N ( r / min) x K
1
• T (kgf x m) | GD m x G

• E (J) | 2
x J ( kg x m2 ) x N 2 [(r/min) ]
375 't (s)
182.4
(5) Acceleration time
1 2
• E (J ) | x GD2 ( kg x m2) x N 2 [(r/min) ] 
J1  J 2 / KG ( kg x m2) 'N (r / min)
730 • t ACC (s) | x 
W M  W L / KG ( N x m) 9.55
(3) Torque of linear moving load
GD12  GD 2 2 / KG (kg x m2) 'N (r / min)
Driving mode • t ACC (s) | x 
T M  T L / KG (kgf x m) 375
V (m / min)
• W (N x m) | 0.159 x x F ( N) 
N M (r/min) x KG (6) Deceleration time
V ( m / min) J1  J 2 x KG (kg x m2) 'N (r / min)
• T (kgf x m) | 0.159 x x F ( kgf )  • t DEC (s) | x 
N M (r/min) x KG WM  WL x KG ( N x m) 9.55

Braking mode GD12  GD 2 2 x KG ( kg x m2) 'N ( r / min)

• t DEC (s) | x 
V (m / min) T M  T L x KG (kgf x m) 375
• W (N x m) | 0.159 x x F ( N)  㩷
N M (r/min) / KG
V ( m / min) 㩷
• T (kgf x m) | 0.159 x x F (kgf ) 
N M (r/min) / KG
㩷
㩷

App.
㩷

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-17
 App.E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires, HIV wires, and 600 V cross-linked
polyethylene insulated wires.
„ IV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 60qC (140qF))
Table F.1 (a) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Allowable current Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
Wire size reference value 35°C[95°F] 40°C[104°F] 45°C[113°F] 50°C[122°F) 55°C[131°F] 35°C[95°F] 40°C[104°F] 45°C[113°] 50°C[122°F]
2
(mm ) (up to 30qC) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 27 24 22 19 15 11 17 15 13 10
3.5 37 33 30 26 21 15 23 21 18 14
5.5 49 44 40 34 28 20 30 27 24 19
8.0 61 55 50 43 35 25 38 34 29 24
14 88 80 72 62 51 36 55 50 43 35
22 115 104 94 81 66 47 72 65 56 46
38 162 147 132 115 93 66 102 92 79 64
60 217 197 177 154 125 88 136 123 106 86
100 298 271 244 211 172 122 187 169 146 119
150 395 359 323 280 229 161 248 225 193 158
200 469 426 384 332 272 192 295 267 229 187
250 556 505 455 394 322 227 350 316 272 222
325 650 591 533 461 377 266 409 370 318 260
400 745 677 610 528 432 305 469 424 365 298
500 842 766 690 597 488 345 530 479 412 336
2 x 100 497 452 407 352 288 203 313 283 243 198
2 x 150 658 598 539 467 381 269 414 375 322 263
2 x 200 782 711 641 555 453 320 492 445 383 312
2 x 250 927 843 760 658 537 380 584 528 454 370
2 x 325 1083 985 888 768 628 444 682 617 530 433
2 x 400 1242 1130 1018 881 720 509 782 707 608 496
2 x 500 1403 1276 1150 996 813 575 883 799 687 561

„ HIV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 75qC (167qF))

Table F.1 (b) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Allowable current Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
Wire size reference value 35°C[95°F] 40°C[104°F] 45°C[113°F] 50°C[122°F) 55°C[131°F] 35°C[95°F] 40°C[104°F] 45°C[113°] 50°C[122°F]
2
(mm ) (up to 30qC) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 32 31 29 27 24 22 21 20 18 17
3.5 45 42 39 37 33 30 29 27 25 23
5.5 59 56 52 49 44 40 39 36 34 30
8.0 74 70 65 61 55 50 48 45 42 38
14 107 101 95 88 80 72 70 66 61 55
22 140 132 124 115 104 94 92 86 80 72
38 197 186 174 162 147 132 129 121 113 102
60 264 249 234 217 197 177 173 162 151 136
100 363 342 321 298 271 244 238 223 208 187
150 481 454 426 395 359 323 316 296 276 248
200 572 539 506 469 426 384 375 351 328 295
250 678 639 600 556 505 455 444 417 389 350
325 793 747 702 650 591 533 520 487 455 409
400 908 856 804 745 677 610 596 558 521 469
500 1027 968 909 842 766 690 673 631 589 530
2 x 100 606 571 536 497 452 407 397 372 347 313
2 x 150 802 756 710 658 598 539 526 493 460 414
2 x 200 954 899 844 782 711 641 625 586 547 492
2 x 250 1130 1066 1001 927 843 760 741 695 648 584
2 x 325 1321 1245 1169 1083 985 888 866 812 758 682
2 x 400 1515 1428 1341 1242 1130 1018 993 931 869 782
2 x 500 1711 1613 1515 1403 1276 1150 1122 1052 982 883

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-18
 App. E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires

„ 600 V Cross-linked Polyethylene Insulated wires

(Maximum allowable temperature: 90qC (194qF))

Table F.1 (c) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires

Allowable current Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
Wire size reference value 35°C[95°F] 40°C[104°F] 45°C[113°F] 50°C[122°F) 55°C[131°F] 35°C[95°F] 40°C[104°F] 45°C[113°] 50°C[122°F]
2
(mm ) (up to 30qC) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 38 36 34 32 31 29 25 24 22 21
3.5 52 49 47 45 42 39 34 33 31 29
5.5 69 66 63 59 56 52 46 44 41 39
8.0 86 82 78 74 70 65 57 54 51 48
14 124 118 113 107 101 95 82 79 74 70
22 162 155 148 140 132 124 108 103 97 92
38 228 218 208 197 186 174 152 145 137 129
60 305 292 279 264 249 234 203 195 184 173
100 420 402 384 363 342 321 280 268 253 238
150 556 533 509 481 454 426 371 355 335 316
200 661 633 605 572 539 506 440 422 398 375
250 783 750 717 678 639 600 522 500 472 444
325 916 877 838 793 747 702 611 585 552 520
400 1050 1005 961 908 856 804 700 670 633 596
500 1187 1136 1086 1027 968 909 791 757 715 673
2 x 100 700 670 641 606 571 536 467 447 422 397
2 x 150 927 888 848 802 756 710 618 592 559 526
2 x 200 1102 1055 1008 954 899 844 735 703 664 625
2 x 250 1307 1251 1195 1130 1066 1001 871 834 787 741
2 x 325 1527 1462 1397 1321 1245 1169 1018 974 920 866
2 x 400 1751 1676 1602 1515 1428 1341 1167 1117 1055 993
2 x 500 1978 1894 1809 1711 1613 1515 1318 1262 1192 1122

App.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-19
 App.F Replacement Information
When replacing Fuji conventional inverter series (FVR-E9S, FVR-E11S) with the FRENIC-Multi
series, refer to the replacement information given in this section.

F.1 External dimensions comparison tables

Below is a guide that helps in using the comparison tables on the following pages.
- Mounting area Allows comparing the mounting area required for the FRENIC-Multi series
/Multi (%) with that for the conventional inverter series in percentage, assuming the
area for the FRENIC-Multi series to be 100%. If this value is greater than
100%, it means that the mounting area required for the FRENIC-Multi
series is smaller than that of other series.

- Volume/Multi (%) Allows comparing the volume of the FRENIC-Multi series with that of the
conventional inverter series in percentage, assuming the volume of the
FRENIC-Multi series to be 100%. If this value is greater than 100%, it
means that the volume of the FRENIC-Multi is smaller than that of other
series.

- In the FRENIC-Multi columns, dimensions in shaded boxes ( ) denote that they are smaller
than those of FVR-E9S and FVR-E11S series.
- In the FVR-E9S and FVR-E11S columns, underlined and bolded dimensions denote that they are
smaller than those of the FRENIC-Multi series.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-20
 App. F Replacement Information

F.1.1 Standard models

FVR-E9S vs. FRENIC-Multi
FVR-E9S (IP20) FRENIC-Multi (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50qC) (Ambient temperature: 50qC)
Nominal Mount-
Power External dimensions (mm) Mounting area Volume External dimensions (mm) Volume
applied ing area
supply 2 3 2 3
motor m /Multi m /Multi m m
voltage W H D D1 D2 -2 -3 W H D D1 D2 -2 -3
(kW) (x10 ) (%) (x10 ) (%) (x10 ) (x10 )
0.1 105 150 72 63 9 1.6 164.1 1.1 128.4 80 120 92 82 10 1.0 0.9

0.2 105 150 80 63 17 1.6 164.1 1.3 142.7 80 120 92 82 10 1.0 0.9

0.4 105 150 90 63 27 1.6 164.1 1.4 138.0 80 120 107 82 25 1.0 1.0

0.75 105 150 119 63 56 1.6 164.1 1.9 147.9 80 120 132 82 50 1.0 1.3

1.5 140 150 119 63 56 2.1 146.9 2.5 116.5 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1
Three-
phase 2.2 200 150 134 63 71 3.0 209.8 4.0 187.4 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1
200 V
3.7 200 150 149 63 86 3.0 119.0 4.5 117.5 140 180 151 87 64 2.5 3.8

5.5 - - - - - - - - - 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

7.5 - - - - - - - - - 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

11 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

15 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

0.4 - - - - - - - - - 110 130 126 86 40 1.4 1.8

0.75 - - - - - - - - - 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1

1.5 - - - - - - - - - 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1

2.2 - - - - - - - - - 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1

Three-
phase 3.7 - - - - - - - - - 140 180 151 87 64 2.5 3.8
400 V
5.5 - - - - - - - - - 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

7.5 - - - - - - - - - 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

11 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

App.
15 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

0.1 105 150 72 63 9 1.6 164.1 1.1 105.5 80 120 112 102 10 1.0 1.1
0.2 105 150 80 63 17 1.6 164.1 1.3 117.2 80 120 112 102 10 1.0 1.1
Single- 0.4 140 150 109 63 46 2.1 218.8 2.3 187.7 80 120 127 102 25 1.0 1.2
phase
0.75 140 150 109 63 46 2.1 218.8 2.3 156.9 80 120 152 102 50 1.0 1.5
200 V
1.5 200 150 134 63 71 3.0 209.8 4.0 175.7 110 130 160 96 64 1.4 2.3
2.2 200 150 134 63 71 3.0 119.0 4.0 105.6 140 180 151 87 64 2.5 3.8

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-21
 FVR-E11S vs. FRENIC-Multi
FVR-E11S (IP20) FRENIC-Multi (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50qC) (Ambient temperature: 50qC)
Nominal Mount-
Power External dimensions (mm) Mounting area Volume External dimensions (mm) Volume
applied ing area
supply
motor m2 /Multi m3 /Multi m2 m3
voltage W H D D1 D2 W H D D1 D2
(kW) (x10-2) (%) (x10-3) (%) (x10-2) (x10-3)
0.1 70 130 96 86 10 0.9 94.8 0.9 98.9 80 120 92 82 10 1.0 0.9

0.2 70 130 101 86 15 0.9 94.8 0.9 104.1 80 120 92 82 10 1.0 0.9

0.4 70 130 118 86 32 0.9 94.8 1.1 104.5 80 120 107 82 25 1.0 1.0

0.75 70 130 144 86 58 0.9 94.8 1.3 103.4 80 120 132 82 50 1.0 1.3

1.5 106 130 150 86 64 1.4 96.4 2.1 96.4 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1
Three-
phase 2.2 106 130 150 86 64 1.4 96.4 2.1 96.4 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1
200 V
3.7 170 130 158 86 72 2.2 87.7 3.5 91.8 140 180 151 87 64 2.5 3.8

5.5 180 220 158 - - 4.0 100.0 6.3 100.0 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

7.5 180 220 158 - - 4.0 100.0 6.3 100.0 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

11 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

15 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

0.4 106 130 126 86 40 1.4 96.4 1.7 96.4 110 130 126 86 40 1.4 1.8

0.75 106 130 150 86 64 1.4 96.4 2.1 96.4 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1

1.5 106 130 170 106 64 1.4 96.4 2.3 109.2 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1

2.2 106 130 170 106 64 1.4 96.4 2.3 109.2 110 130 150 86 64 1.4 2.1
Three-
phase 3.7 170 130 158 86 72 2.2 87.7 3.5 91.8 140 180 151 87 64 2.5 3.8
400 V
5.5 180 220 158 - - 4.0 100.0 6.3 100.0 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

7.5 180 220 158 - - 4.0 100.0 6.3 100.0 180 220 158 81 77 4.0 6.3

11 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

15 - - - - - - - - - 220 260 195 98.5 96.5 5.7 11.2

0.1 70 130 96 86 10 0.9 94.8 0.9 81.3 80 120 112 102 10 1.0 1.1
0.2 70 130 101 86 15 0.9 94.8 0.9 85.5 80 120 112 102 10 1.0 1.1
Single- 0.4 70 130 118 86 32 0.9 94.8 1.1 88.1 80 120 127 102 25 1.0 1.2
phase
0.75 106 130 126 86 40 1.4 143.5 1.7 119.0 80 120 152 102 50 1.0 1.5
200 V
1.5 170 130 158 86 72 2.2 154.5 3.5 152.6 110 130 160 96 64 1.4 2.3
2.2 170 130 158 86 72 2.2 87.7 3.5 91.8 140 180 151 87 64 2.5 3.8

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-22
 App. F Replacement Information

F.2 Terminal arrangements and symbols

This section shows the difference in the terminal arrangements and their symbols between the
FRENIC-Multi series and the replaceable inverter series.
FVR-E9S vs. FRENIC-Multi
FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Three-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1/4 HP Three-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1 HP

Three-phase 230 V, 1/2 to 5 HP Three-phase 230 V, 2 to 5 HP

Three-phase 460 V, 1/2 to 5 HP Three-phase 460 V, 1/2 to 5 HP

App.
Single-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1 HP Single-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1 HP

Single-phase 230 V, 2 to 3 HP Single-phase 230 V, 2 to 3 HP

: Direction of wire guide

A-23
FVR-E11S vs. FRENIC-Multi
FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Three-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1 HP Three-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1 HP

Single-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1/2 HP Single-phase 230 V, 1/8 to 1/2 HP

Three-phase 230 V, 2 to 3 HP Three-phase 230 V, 2 to 3 HP

Three-phase 460 V, 1/2 to 3 HP Three-phase 460 V, 1/2 to 3 HP

Single-phase 230 V, 1 HP Single-phase 230 V, 1 HP

A-24
 App. F Replacement Information

Three-phase 230 V, 5 HP Three-phase 230 V, 5 HP

Three-phase 460 V, 5 HP Three-phase 460 V, 5 HP

Single-phase 230 V, 2 to 3 HP Single-phase 230 V, 2 to 3 HP

Three-phase 230 V, 7.5 to 10 HP Three-phase 230 V, 7.5 to 10 HP

Three-phase 460 V, 7.5 to 10 HP Three-phase 460 V, 7.5 to 10 HP

App.

: Direction of wire guide

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-25
 F.3 Function codes
This section describes the replacement information related to function codes that are required when
replacing the conventional inverter series (e.g., FVR-E9S and FVR-E11S) with the FRENIC-Multi
series. It also provides the conversion table for the torque boost setting.

FVR-E9S vs. FRENIC-Multi

F: Fundamental functions
FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E9S)
code code
Data 0: The data can be changed. Data protection 0: Disable data protection and digital
protection 1: The data cannot be changed. reference protection
F00 F00
1: Enable data protection and disable digital
reference protection
Frequency 0: Setting by keypad panel operation Frequency 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad
F01
command 1 command 1
F01
1: Setting by voltage and current input Frequency 3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to
F01
command 1 terminals [12] and [C1] (C1 function)
Operation 0: Keypad operation Operation 0: RUN/STOP keys on keypad
method (Motor rotational direction specified by method (Motor rotational direction specified by
F02 terminal command FWD/REV) F02 terminal command FWD/REV)
1: Operation by external input 1: Terminal command FWD or REV
(digital input)
Maximum 50 to 400 Hz Maximum 50.0 to 400.0 Hz
F03 F03
frequency 1 frequency 1
Base frequency 50 to 400 Hz Base frequency 50.0 to 400.0 Hz
F04 F04
1 1
Rated voltage 1 0V: The output 230 V: Rated voltage 80 to 240 V for
0 V: Output a voltage
voltage in 0, 80 to 240 V at base 230 V
F05 in proportion to input
proportion to the frequency 1 160 to 480 V for
voltage
power supply 460 V
F05 voltage is set.
460 V: Maximum 80 to 240 V for If F05 z 0, set the
0, 320 to 480 V output voltage 1 230 V same voltage as
F06 F05 data. If F05 =
160 to 480 V for 0, you can set an
460 V arbitrary value.
Acceleration Acceleration
F06 0.01 to 3600 s F07 0.01 to 3600s
time 1 time 1
Deceleration Deceleration
F07 0.01 to 3600 s F08 0.01 to 3600s
time 1 time 1
Torque boost 1 0: Automatic torque boost Load selection/ 1: Constant torque load
Auto torque
boost/
F37
Auto energy
saving
operation 1
1: Variable torque load F09 Torque boost 1 0%
Load selection/ 0: Variable torque load
Auto torque
boost/
F37
F08 Auto energy
saving
operation 1
2: Proportional torque load - - -
3 to 31: Constant torque load F09 Torque boost 1 Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table
on the last page of this appendix for setting
Non-linear V/f
torque boost.
H50 pattern 1
(Frequency)
Non-linear V/f
H51 pattern 1
(Voltage)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-26
 App. F Replacement Information

FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E9S)
code code
FMA voltage 0 to 99 Analog output 65 to 103%
F09 output F30 [FM] (Voltage (= 65 + (103 - 65) / 99 x FVR-E9S's data)
adjustment adjustment)
No. of poles of 2 to 12 (even) Motor 1 2 to 22 (even)
F10 P01
motor (No. of poles)
Coefficient for 0.01 to 200.0 Coefficient for 0.01 to 200.00
F11 speed E50 speed
indication indication
Motor sound 0, 1 to 15 kHz Motor sound 0.75, 1 to 15 kHz
adjustment (Carrier
F12 F26
(Carrier frequency)
frequency)
Times of 0 to 10 Auto- 0 to 10
F13 auto-reset H04 reset
(Times)
Restart mode 0: Inactive (Trip and alarm when power Restart mode 0: Disable restart (Trip immediately)
after failure occurs) after 1: Disable restart (Trip after a recovery from
momentary 1: Inactive (Trip, and alarm when power momentary power failure)
power failure recovers.) power failure 4: Enable restart (Restart at the frequency
F14 F14
2: Active (Restarts at output frequency of (Mode at which the power failure occurred, for
before power failure. selection) general loads)
3: Active (Restarts at starting frequency.) 5: Enable restart (Restart at the starting
frequency, for low-inertia load)
Electronic 0: Inactive Electronic 0.00
thermal thermal
overload relay overload
for motor 1 F11 protection for
(Select) motor 1
(Overload
detection level)
F15
1: Active (for 4-pole standard motor) Electronic 1: For general-purpose motors with shaft
thermal driven fan
2: Active (for 4-pole inverter motor) overload 2: For inverter-driven motors,
F10 protection
non-ventilated motors, or motors with
for motor 1 forced-cooling fan
(Select motor
characteristics)
Electronic Electronic 0.00: Disable
thermal thermal 1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable

App.
overload relay overload continuous drive current) of the motor
0.01 to 99.9
F16 for motor 1 F11 protection
(Level) for motor 1
(Overload
detection level)
DC brake 0: Disable DC braking 1 0.00: Disable
F17 F22
(Mode) 1: Enable (Braking time) 0.01 to 30.00 s
DC brake 0 to 60 Hz DC braking 1 0.0 to 60.0 Hz
Starting (Braking
F18 F20
frequency starting
frequency)
DC brake 0 to 100% DC braking 1 0 to 100%
F19 F21
(Braking level) (Braking level)
DC brake 0.00 to 30.00 s DC braking 1 0.00 to 30.00 s
F20 F22
(Braking time) (Braking time)
Multi- 0.00 to 400.0 Hz Multi- 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
F21 frequency C05 frequency
1 1
F22 2 C06 2
F23 3 C07 3
F24 4 C08 4
F25 5 C09 5
F26 6 C10 6
F27 7 C11 7
S-curve Acceleration/ 0: Liner
0: Liner
acceleration/ deceleration 1: S-curve (Weak)
F28 1: S-curve (Weak) H07
deceleration pattern 2: S-curve (Strong)
2: S-curve (Strong)
pattern

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-27
 FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E9S)
code code
Protective Display alarm history of last four alarms Refer to "Menu #6."
F29 - -
action history
Starting 0,1 to 15 Hz Starting 0.2, 1.0 to 15.0 Hz
F30 frequency F23 frequency 1

Torque limiter 0: No limit Torque limiter 1 20 to 180%

(During Active: 20 to 180% F40 (Limiting level 999: Disable
acceleration/ for driving)
deceleration) Torque limiter 1 20 to 180%
F41 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for braking)
Terminal [X5] 14: Select torque limiter level (TL2/TL1)
E05
function
F31 Torque limiter 2 20 to 200%
E16 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for driving)
Torque limiter 2 20 to 200%
E17 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for braking)
Terminal [Y2] 21: Frequency arrival signal 2 (FAR2)
E21 function Note: Short-circuit between terminals [X5]
and [Y2] and between CM and CME.
Torque limiter 0: No limit Torque limiter 1 20 to 180%
(During Active: 20 to 180% F40 (Limiting level 999: Disable
constant speed) for driving)
Torque limiter 1 20 to 180%
F41 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for braking)
Terminal [X5] 14: Select torque limiter level (TL2/TL1)
E05
function
F32 Torque limiter 2 20 to 200%
E16 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for driving)
Torque limiter 2 20 to 200%
E17 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for braking)
Terminal [Y2] 21: Frequency arrival signal 2 (FAR2)
E21 function Note: Short-circuit between terminals [X5]
and [Y2] and between CM and CME.
Braking torque 0: Braking torque (Low)
F33 - - -
1: Braking torque (High)
Bias frequency -400 to 400 Hz Bias -100.0 to 100.0%
F34 F18 (Frequency (FVR-E9S's data x 100 / Maximum
command 1) frequency 1 (F03))
Gain 0.00 to 250% Analog input 0.00 to 200.00 %
F35 (For frequency C32 adjustment for
setting signal) [12] (Gain)
Frequency 0 to 400 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
F36 limiter F15 limiter
(High) (High)
Frequency 0 to 400 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
F37 limiter F16 limiter
(Low) (Low)
Motor 0 to 10 Output current 0.00 to 0.40
characteristics fluctuation (Usually, no change is necessary.)
F38 H80
damping gain
for motor 1
Data 0: Disable initialization Data 0: Disable initialization
F39 initialization 1: Initialize all function code data to the H03 initialization 1: Initialize all function code data to the
factory defaults factory defaults
FMA and FMP 0: Analog output (FMA) Analog output 0: Output in voltage (0 to 10 VDC)
F40 terminals 1: Pulse output (FMP) F29 [FM] (FMA)
(Select) (Mode selection) 2: Output in pulse (FMP)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-28
 App. F Replacement Information

FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E9S)
code code
FMA terminal 0: Output frequency Analog output 0: Output frequency 1
(Function) 1: Output current [FM] (before slip compensation)
F41 2: Output torque F31 (Function) 2: Output current
3: Load factor 4: Output torque
5: Load factor
FMP terminal 10 to 100 Analog output 25 to 6000 p/s (Pulse rate at 100% output)
F42 (Pulse rate F33 [FM] (Maximum frequency setting x FVR-E9S's
amplifier) (Pulse rate) data)
Terminal X4 0: RT1 function Terminal [X4] 4: Select ACC/DEC time (RT1)
(Function) 1: Terminal X4 function function 3: Select multi-frequency (SS8)
F43 E04
2: VF2 function 12: Select motor 2/motor 1 (M2/M1)
3: HLD function 6: Enable 3-wire operation (HLD)
F44 Multi-frequency 0.00 to 400 Hz C12 Multi-frequency 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
F45 8 to 15 C13 8 to 15
F46 C14
F47 C15
F48 C16
F49 C17
F50 C18
F51 C19
Frequency 0.02 to 5.00 s Analog Input 0.02 to 5.00 s
command filter adjustment for
C33
[12]
(Filter time
constant)
F52
Analog Input 0.02 to 5.00 s
adjustment for
C38 [C1]
(Filter time
constant)
Timer 0: Disable Timer 0: Disable
operation 1: 0.01 to 3600 s operation 1: Enable
F53 time C21 (The time can be specified within the range
from 1 to 3600 s in units of 1 s with the
and keys on the keypad.)
Terminal Y1 0: Inverter running (RUN) Terminal [Y1] 0: Inverter running (RUN)
1: Frequency level detection (FDT) function 2: Frequency detected (FDT)

App.
2: Frequency equivalence signal (FAR) 1: Frequency arrival signal (FAR)
3: Undervoltage detection signal (LU) 3: Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped)
F54 E20
4: Torque limiting (TL) (LU)
5: Auto-restarting 5: Inverter output limiting (IOL)
6: Auto-restarting after momentary power
failure (IPF)
FDT function 0 to 400.0 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
signal Detection
F55 (Level) E31 (FDT)
(Detection
level)
FDT function 0 to 30 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
signal Arrival
E30
(Hysteresis) (Hysteresis
width)
F56 Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Detection
E32 (FDT)
(Hysteresis
width)
Terminal THR 0: THR function Terminal [X5] 9: (1009) Enable external alarm trip (THR)
F57 (Function) 1: Write enable for keypad E05 function 19: (1019) Enable data change with keypad
(WE-KP)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-29
 FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E9S)
code code
Jump 0 to 30 Hz Jump 0.0 to 30.0 Hz
F58 frequency C04 frequency
(Hysteresis) (Hysteresis)
Jump 0 to 400 Hz Jump 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
F59 C01
frequency 1 frequency 1
Jump 0 to 400 Hz Jump 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
F60 C02
frequency 2 frequency 2
Jump 0 to 400 Hz Jump 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
F61 C03
frequency 3 frequency 3
Base 50 to 400 Hz Base 50.0 to 400.0 Hz
F62 A02
frequency 2 frequency 2
Acceleration 0.01 to 3600 s Acceleration 0.01 to 3600 s
F63 E10
time 2 time 2
Deceleration 0.01 to 3600 s Deceleration 0.01 to 3600 s
F64 E11
time 2 time 2
Torque Boost 2 1: Variable torque load Torque boost 1 0.0 to 20.0%
F09

Load selection/ 0: Variable torque load

Auto torque
boost/
F65 A13
Auto energy
saving
operation 2
2: Proportional torque load - - -
3 to 31: Constant torque load F09 Torque boost 1 Refer to the "Torque Boost Conversion
Table" on the last page of this appendix.
Electronic 0: Inactive Electronic 0.00
thermal thermal
overload overload
relay 2 A07 protection
(Select) for motor 2
(Overload
detection level)
F66
1: Active (for 4-pole standard motor) Electronic 1: For general-purpose motors with shaft
thermal driven fan
2: Active (for 4-pole inverter motor) overload 2: For inverter-driven motors, non-ventilated
A06 protection
motors, or motors with forced-cooling fan
for motor 2
(Select motor
characteristics)
Electronic 0.01 to 99.9 Electronic 0.00: Disable
thermal thermal 1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable
overload overload continuous drive current) of the motor
F67 relay 2 A07 protection
(Level) for motor 2
(Overload
detection level)
Slip 0.0 to 5.0 Hz Motor 1 100.0%
compensation (Slip
P09
compensation
gain for driving)
Motor 1 100.0%
F68 (Slip
P11
compensation
gain for braking)
Motor 1 0.00 to 5.00 Hz
P12 (Rated slip
frequency)
Torque vector 0: Inactive Control mode 0: Disable (V/f operation with slip
F69 control 1: Active F42 selection 1 compensation inactive㧕
1: Enable (Dynamic torque vector operation)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-30
 App. F Replacement Information

FVR-E9S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E9S)
code code
Motor capacity 0: With 1 rank higher capacity Motor 1 0.01 to 11.00 kW
1: With same rank (Rated
F70 P02
2: With 1 rank lower capacity capacity)
3: With 2 ranks lower capacity
Motor 1 0.00 to 99.9 A Motor 1 0.00 to 100.0 A
F71 P03
Rated current (Rated current)
Motor 1 0.00 to 99.9 A Motor 1 0.00 to 50.00 A
F72 No -load P06 (No-load
current current)
Motor 2 0.00 to 99.9 A Motor 2 0.00 to 100.0 A
F73 A17
Rated current (Rated current)
Tuning 0: Inactive Motor 2 0: Disable
1: Active (Auto-tuning) 1: Enable
F74 A18
(Tune %R1 and %X while the motor is
stopped.)
Motor 1 0.00 to 50.00% Motor 1
F75 P07 0.00 to 50.00%
%R1 (%R1)
Motor 1 0.00 to 50.00% Motor 1
F76 P08 0.00 to 50.00%
%X (%X)
Torque limit 0 to 999
response
F77 - - -
(At constant
speed)
Torque limit 0 to 999
response
F78 (At - - -
acceleration/
deceleration)

App.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-31
FVR-E11S vs. FRENIC-Multi
F: Fundamental functions
FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Data 0: Data change enable Data 0: Disable data protection and digital
protection 1: Data protection protection reference protection
F00 F00
1: Enable data protection and disable digital
reference protection
Frequency 0: Keypad operation (UP/DOWN keys) Frequency 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad
F01
command 1 command 1
1: Voltage input (Terminal [12]) Frequency 1: Voltage input to terminal [12]
F01 command 1
Analog Input 1: Unipolar
adjustment for
C35
[12]
(Polarity)
2: Current input (Terminal [C1]) Frequency 2: Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function)
F01
command 1
3: Voltage and current input Frequency 3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to
F01
command 1 terminals [12] and [C1] (C1 function)
4: Reversible operation with polarity Frequency 1: Voltage input to terminal [12]
F01
(Terminal [12]) command 1
Analog Input 0: Bipolar
adjustment for
C35
[12]
(Polarity)
5: Inverse mode operation with polarity Frequency 1: Voltage input to terminal [12]
F01
(Terminal [12]) command 1
F01 Selection of 1: Inverse operation
C53 normal/inverse
operation
6: Inverse mode operation (Terminal [C1]) Frequency 2: Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function)
F01
command 1
Selection of 1: Inverse operation
C53 normal/inverse
operation
7: UP/DOWN control 1 Frequency 7: Terminal command UP/DOWN control
F01
command 1
UP/DOWN 0: 0.00
control
H61 (Initial
frequency
setting)
8: UP/DOWN control 2 Frequency 7: Terminal command UP/DOWN control
F01
command 1
UP/DOWN 1: Last UP/DOWM command value on
control releasing run command
H61 (Initial
frequency
setting)
Operation 0: Keypad operation Operation 0: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (Motor
method (Motor rotational direction specified by method rotational direction specified by terminal
terminals [FWD] / [REV]) command FWD/REV)
F02 1: External signal input (digital input) F02 1: Terminal command FWD or REV
2: Keypad operation (Run to forward) 2: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (forward)
3: Keypad operation (Run to reverse) 3: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (reverse)
Maximum 50 to 400 Hz Maximum 50.0 to 400.0 Hz
F03 F03
frequency 1 frequency
Base 25 to 400 Hz Base 25.0 to 400.0 Hz
F04 F04
frequency 1 frequency 1
0 V: The output voltage 230 V: Rated voltage 80 to 240 V for
0 V: Output a voltage
in proportion to the 80 to 240 V at base 230 V
F05 Rated voltage 1 F05 in proportion to
power supply 460 V: frequency 1 160 to 480 V for
input voltage
voltage is set. 160 to 480 V 460 V
230 V: 80 to 240 V Maximum 80 to 240 V for 230 V
Maximum
F06 F06 output voltage
voltage 1 460 V: 160 to 480 V 160 to 480 V for 460 V
1
Acceleration Acceleration
F07 0.01 to 3600 s F07 0.01 to 3600 s
time 1 time 1
Deceleration Deceleration
F08 0.01 to 3600 s F08 0.01 to 3600 s
time 1 time 1

A-32
 App. F Replacement Information

FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Torque boost 1 0: Automatic torque boost Load 1: Constant torque load
selection/
Auto torque
F37 boost/
Auto energy
saving
operation 1
1: Variable torque characteristics F09 Torque boost 1 0%
Load 0: Variable torque load
selection/
Auto torque
F37 boost/
F09 Auto energy
saving
operation 1
2: Proportional torque There is no pattern equivalent to the FVR-E11S's proportional
torque.
Selecting the constant torque is recommended.
3 to 31: Constant torque F09 Torque boost 1 Refer to the "Torque Boost Conversion
Non-linear V/f Table" on the last page of this appendix.
H50 pattern
(Frequency)
Non-linear V/f
H51 pattern
(Voltage)
Electronic 0: Inactive Electronic 0.00
thermal O/L thermal
relay for motor overload
1 F11 protection
(Select) for motor 1
(Overload
detection level)
F10
1: Active (for standard motor) Electronic 1: For a general-purpose motor with shaft
2: Active (for inverter motor) thermal driven fan
overload 2: For an inverter-driven motor,
F10 protection non-ventilated motor, or motor with
for motor 1 forced-cooling fan
(Select motor
characteristics)
Electronic 20 to 135% of the rated current of the Electronic 20 to 135%
thermal O/L inverter. thermal

App.
relay for motor overload
F11 1 F11 protection
(Level) for motor 1
(Overload
detection level)
Electronic 0.5 to 10 min Electronic 0.5 to 10.0 min
thermal O/L thermal
relay for motor overload
F12 1 F12 protection
(Thermal time for motor 1
constant) (Thermal time
constant)
Electronic Data 230 V 460 V Electronic 999: Disable
thermal O/L thermal overload
relay protection
(for braking F50 for braking
resistor) 0 Inactive Inactive resistor
(Discharging
capability)
Electronic Functionally equivalent to the FVR-E11S's
Active Active thermal overload function code. However, the setting
(External braking (External braking protection procedure is different, so make the setting
1
resistor: resistor: for braking appropriate for the applied braking resistor.
F13 DB††-2C) DB††-4C)
resistor
Active (Discharging
capability)
3.7 kW or

External braking F50

(Allowable
less

resistor: F51
Active average loss)
TK80W
(External braking
2
resistor:
5.5/7.5 kW

External braking DB††-4C)

resistor:
DB††-2C

A-33
 FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Restart mode 0: Inactive (immediate inverter trip) Restart mode 0: Disable restart (Trip immediately)
after 1: Inactive (inverter trip at recovery) after 1: Disable restart (Trip after a recovery from
momentary 3: Active (Restart at the frequency at which momentary power failure)
power failure the power failure occurred) power failure 4: Enable restart (Restart at the frequency at
F14 F14
(Select) 4: Active (Restart at the starting frequency) which the power failure occurred, for
general loads)
5: Enable restart (Restart at the starting
frequency, for low-inertia load)
Frequency 0 to 400 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
F15 limiter F15 limiter
(High) (High)
F16 (Low) F16 (Low)
Gain 0.0 to 200.0% Analog input 0.00 to 200.00%
(for frequency adjustment for
setting signal) [12]
C32 (Gain)
F17
C37 Analog input
adjustment for
[C1]
(Gain)
Bias frequency -400 to +400 Hz Bias Bias frequency x 100 / maximum frequency
F18 F18 (Frequency
command 1)
0.0 to 60.0 Hz DC braking 1 0.0 to 60.0 Hz
DC break
F20 F20 (Braking starting
(Starting freq.)
frequency)
F21 (Braking level) 0 to 100% F21 (Braking level) 0 to 100%
(Braking time) 0.0 s (DC brake inactive) (Braking time) 0.00: Disable
F22 F22
0.1 to 30.0 s 0.1 to 30.00 s
Starting Starting 0.1 to 60.0 Hz
F23 frequency 0.1 to 60.0 Hz F23 frequency 1
(Freq.)
F24 (Holding time) 0.0 to 10.0 s F24 (Holding time) 0.00 to 10.00 s
F25 Stop frequency 0.1 to 6.0 Hz F25 Stop frequency 0.1 to 60.0 Hz
0.75,1 to 15 kHz Motor Sound 0.75, 1 to 15 kHz
Motor sound
F26 F26 (Carrier
(Carrier freq.)
frequency)
F27 (Sound tone) 0 to 3 F27 (Tone) 0 to 3
FMA and FMP 0: Analog output (FMA function) Analog output 0: Output in voltage (0 to 10 VDC) (FMA)
terminals 1: Pulse output (FMP function) [FM] 2: Output in pulse (0 to 6000 p/s)
F29 F29
(Select) (Mode (FMP)
selection)
0 to 200% Analog output 0 to 200% (FMA)
FMA
[FM]
F30 (Voltage F30
(Voltage
adjust)
adjustment)
(Function) 0: Output frequency 1 (Function) 0: Output frequency 1
(before slip compensation) (before slip compensation)
1: Output frequency 2 1: Output frequency 2
(after slip compensation) (after slip compensation)
2: Output current 2: Output current
F31 3: Output voltage F31 3: Output voltage
4: Output torque 4: Output torque
5: Load factor 5: Load factor
6: Input power 6: Input power
7: PID feedback value 7: PID feedback amount (PV)
8: DC link circuit voltage 9: DC link bus voltage
300 to 6000 p/s (at full scale) Analog output 300 to 6000 p/s (FMP, Pulse rate at 100%
FMP terminal
F33 F33 [FM] output)
(Pulse rate)
(Pulse rate)
(Voltage 0% Analog output 2: Output in pulse (0 to 6000 p/s) (FMP)
adjust) F29 [FM]
(Mode selection)
1 to 200% Analog output 0: Output in voltage (0 to 10 VDC)
F29 [FM] (FMA)
F34
(Mode selection)
Analog output 1 to 200% (FMA)
[FM]
F30
(Voltage
adjustment)
F35 (Function) 0 to 8 (as same as those of F31) F31 (Function) 0 to 9

A-34
 App. F Replacement Information

FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
30Ry 0: The relay (30) excites on trip mode Terminal 99: Alarm output (for any alarm)
operation 1: The relay (30) excites on normal mode [30A/B/C] (Active ON)
F36 E27
mode function 1099: Alarm output (for any alarm)
(Active OFF)
Torque limiter 1 20 to 200% Torque limiter 1 20 to 200%
F40 (Driving) 999: No limit F40 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for driving)
(Braking) 0%: Automatic deceleration control (Limiting level 20 to 200%
F41 20 to 200% F41 for braking) 999: Disable
999: No limit
Torque vector 0: Inactive Control mode 0: Disable
control 1 1: Active selection 1 (V/f operation with slip compensation
F42 F42 inactive)
1: Enable
(Dynamic torque vector operation)

App.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-35
 E: Extension terminal functions
FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
X1 terminal 0: Multistep freq. select (SS1) Terminal [X1] 0: Select multi-frequency (SS1)
function 1: Multistep freq. select (SS2) function 1: Select multi-frequency (SS2)
E01 2: Multistep freq. select (SS4) E01 2: Select multi-frequency (SS4)
3: Multistep freq. select (SS8) 3: Select multi-frequency (SS8)
4: ACC/DEC time selection (RT1) 4: Select ACC/DEC time (RT1)
X2 terminal 5: 3-wire operation stop command (HLD) Terminal [X2] 6: Enable 3-wire operation (HLD)
function 6: Coast-to-stop command (BX) function 7: Coast to a stop (BX)
7: Alarm reset (RST) 8: Reset alarm (RST)
E02 E02
8: Trip command (external fault) (THR) 9: Enable external alarm trip (THR)
9: Freq. set. 2/Freq. set. (Hz2/Hz1) 11: Select frequency command 2/1
10: Motor 2/Motor 1 (M2/M1) (Hz2/Hz1)
X3 terminal Terminal [X3]
11: DC brake command (DCBRK) 12: Select motor 2/motor 1 (M2/M1)
function function
12: Torque limiter 2/Torque limiter 1 13: Enable DC braking (DCBRK)
E03 (TL2/TL1) E03 14: Select torque limiter level (TL2/TL1)
13: UP command (UP) 17: UP (Increase output frequency) (UP)
14: DOWN command (DOWN) 18: DOWN (Decrease output frequency)
X4 terminal 15: Write enable for keypad (WE-KP) Terminal [X4] (DOWN)
function 16: PID control cancel (Hz/PID) function 19: Enable data change with keypad
E04 17: Inverse mode changeover (IVS) E04 (WE-KP)
18: Link enable (LE) 20: Cancel PID control (Hz/PID)
21: Switch normal/inverse operation (IVS)
X5 terminal Terminal [X5] 24: Enable communications link via
function function RS-485 or field bus (LE)
E05 E05
(RS-485: standard, Bus: option)
25: Universal DI (U-DI)
Acceleration 0.01 to 3600 s Acceleration 0.01 to 3600 s
E10 E10
time 2 time 2
Deceleration Deceleration
E11 E11
time 2 time 2
20 to 200% Torque limiter 2 20 to 200%
Torque limiter 2
E16 999: No limit E16 (Limiting level 999: Disable
(Driving)
for driving)
(Braking) 0%: Automatic deceleration control Automatic 0: Disable
deceleration
H69
(Mode
E17 selection)
20 to 200% Torque limiter 2 20 to 200%
999: No limit E17 (Limiting level 999: Disable
for braking)
Y1 terminal 0: Inverter running (RUN) Terminal [Y1] 0: Inverter running (RUN)
function 1: Frequency equivalence signal (FAR) function 1: Frequency arrival signal (FAR)
(Function) 2: Frequency level detection (FDT) 2: Frequency detected (FDT)
E20 3: Undervoltage detection signal (LU) E20 3: Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped)
4: Torque polarity (B/D) (LU)
5: Torque limiting (TL) 4: Torque polarity detected (D/B)
6: Auto-resetting (IPF) 5: Inverter output limiting (IOL)
Y2 terminal 7: Overload early warning (OL) Terminal [Y2] 6: Auto-restarting after momentary power
function 8: Lifetime alarm (main circuit capacitor) function failure (IPF)
E21 (LIFE) E21 7: Motor overload early warning (OL)
9: 2nd frequency equivalence detection 30: Service life alarm (LIFE)
(FAR2) 21: Frequency arrival signal 2 (FAR2)
Frequency 0.01 to 10.0 s Frequency 0.01 to 10.0 s
E29 equivalence E29 arrival delay
delay time

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-36
 App. F Replacement Information

FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
FAR function 0.0 to 10.0 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
signal arrival
E30 E30
(Hysteresis) (Hysteresis
width)
FDT function 0 to 400 Hz Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
signal detection
E31 (Level) E31 (FDT)
(Detection
level)
(Hysteresis) 0.0 to 30.0 Hz (Hysteresis 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
E32 E32
width)
OL1 function 0: Electric thermal O/L relay Terminal 7: Motor overload early warning (OL)
E20/
signal [Y1]/[Y2]
E21
(Mode select) function
E33
1: Output current Terminal 37: Current detected (ID)
E20/
[Y1]/[Y2]
E21
function
(Level) 5 to 200% of inverter rated current Overload early Current value of 5 to 200% of the inverter
warning/ rated current
E34 E34 Current
detection
(Level)
E35 (Timer) 0.00 to 60.0 s E35 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 s
Coefficient for 0.000 to 9.999 Coefficient for 0.000 to 9.999
constant constant
E39 E39
feeding rate feeding rate
time time
Display 0.00 to 200.0 PID display 0.00 to 200.0
E40 E40
coefficient A coefficient A
Display 0.00 to 200.0 PID display 0.00 to 200.0
E41 E41
coefficient B coefficient B
LED display 0.0 to 5.0 s LED display 0.0 to 5.0 s
E42 E42
filter filter


App.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-37
 C: Control functions
FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Jump 0 to 400 Hz Jump 0 to 400 Hz
C01 frequency C01 frequency
1 1
C02 2 C02 2
C03 3 C03 3
C04 (Hysteresis) 0 to 30 Hz C04 (Hysteresis) 0 to 30 Hz
Multistep 0.00 to 400.0 Hz Multi-frequency 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
frequency
C05 C05
setting
1 1
C06 2 C06 2
C07 3 C07 3
C08 4 C08 4
C09 5 C09 5
C10 6 C10 6
C11 7 C11 7
C12 8 C12 8
C13 9 C13 9
C14 10 C14 10
C15 11 C15 11
C16 12 C16 12
C17 13 C17 13
C18 14 C18 14
C19 15 C19 15
Timer 0: Inactive Timer 0: Disable
C21 C21
operation 1: Active operation 1: Enable
Pattern 0.00 to 3600 s - - With C21=1, set the time with the and
C22 operation keys.
(Stage 1)
Frequency 0 to 8 (as same as those of F01) C30 Frequency Refer to FVR-E11S's F01.
C30
command 2 command 2
Offset -5.0 to +5.0% Analog input -5.0 to +5.0%
C31 (Terminal [12]) C31 adjustment for
[12] (Offset)
(Terminal [C1]) -5.0 to +5.0% Analog Input
C32 C36 adjustment for -5.0 to +5.0%
[C1] (Offset)
Analog setting 0.00 to 5.00s Analog Input 0.00 to 5.00 s
signal filter adjustment for
C33 C33 [12]
(Filter time
constant)

P: Motor 1 parameters
FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Functi Functi
Data setting range
on Name Data setting range on Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Motor 1 2 to 14 Motor 1 2 to 22
P01 P01
(Number of poles) (No. of poles)
(Capacity) 0.01 to 5.50 kW (3.7 kW or less) (Rated 0.01 to 11.0 kW
P02 P02
0.01 to 11.0 kW (5.5/7.5 kW) capacity)
P03 (Rated current) 0.00 to 99.9 A P03 (Rated current) 0.00 to 99.9 A
(Tuning) 0: Inactive (Auto-tuning) 1: Enable (Tune %R1 and %X while the
1: Active (%R1 and %X) motor is stopped.)
P04 2: Active (%R1, %X and lo) P04 2: Enable (Tune %R1 and %X while the
motor is stopped, and no-load current
while running.)
(On-line tuning) 0: Inactive (Online tuning) 0: Disable
P05 P05
1: Active 1: Enable
P06 (No-load current) 0.00 to 99.9 A P06 (No-load current) 0.00 to 50.00 A

P07 (%R1 setting) 0.00 to 50.00% P07 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00%

P08 (%X setting) 0.00 to 50.00% P08 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00%

(Slip compensation 0.00 to 15.00 Hz (Rated slip 0.00 to 15.00 Hz
P09 P12
control) frequency) (Set P09 and P11 data to 100%.)
(Slip compensation 0.01 to 10.00 s (Slip compensation 0.01 to 10.00 s
P10 P10
response time) response time)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-38
 App. F Replacement Information

H: High performance functions

FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Accumulated LED monitor shows the accumulated Check with Menu #5_00 (cumulative run
H01 㧙 㧙
operation time operation time. time).
H02 Trip history LED monitor shows the trip history. 㧙 㧙 Check with Menu #6_00 (output frequency).

Data initializing 0: Disabled Data 0: Disable initialization

H03 1: Initializing data H03 initialization 1: Initialize all function code data to the
factory defaults
Auto-reset 0: (Inactive), 1 to 10 times Auto-reset 0: Disable
H04 H04
(Times) (Times) 1 to 10
H05 (Reset interval) 2 to 20 s H05 (Reset interval) 2 to 20 s
Cooling fan 0: Inactive Cooling fan 0: Disable
H06 ON-OFF 1: Active H06 ON/OFF 1: Enable
control control
ACC/DEC 0: Liner Acceleration/ 0: Linear
pattern 1: S-curve (Weak) deceleration 1: S-curve (Weak)
H07 H07
2: S-curve (Strong) pattern 2: S-curve (Strong)
3: Non-linear 3: Curvilinear
Start mode 0: Inactive Starting mode 0: Disable
(Rotating 1: Active (Auto search) 1: Enable
motor pick up) (Only auto-restart after momentary (At restart after momentary power failure)
H09 H09
power failure mode) 2: Enable
2: Active (At restart after momentary power failure
and at normal start)
Energy saving 0: Inactive Load selection/ 0 or 1 (Refer to F09.)
operation Auto torque
1: Active boost/ 3: Equivalent to FVR-E11S's F09 being
H10 F37 Auto energy set to 1 or 2
saving 4: Equivalent to FVR-E11S's F09 being
operation 1 set to any of 3 to 31
(Refer to the FVR-E11S's F09.)
DEC mode 0: Normal Deceleration 0: Normal deceleration
H11 H11
1: Coast-to-stop mode 1: Coast-to-stop
Instantaneous 0: Inactive Instantaneous 0: Disable
H12 overcurrent 1: Active H12 overcurrent 1: Enable
limiting limiting
Auto-restart 0.1 to 5.0 s Restart mode 0.1 to 5.0 s
(Restart time) after (when H16 = 999)

App.
H13 H13 momentary
power failure
(Restart time)
(Freq. fall rate) 0.00 to 100.0 Hz/s (Frequency fall 0.00 to 100.0 Hz/s
H14 H14
rate)
PID control 0: Inactive PID control 0: Disable
(Mode select) 1: Active (Mode selection) 1: Enable
H20 2: Active (inverse operation mode) J01 (Process control, normal operation)
2: Enable
(Process control, inverse operation)
(Feedback 0: Terminal [12] (0 to 10 VDC) Terminal [12]
signal) E61 extended 5: PID feedback amount
function
1: Terminal [C1] (4 to 20 mA) Terminal [C1]
H21 extended
E62 5: PID feedback amount
function
(C1 function)
2: Terminal [12] (10 to 0 VDC) - - -
3: Terminal [C1] (20 to 4 mA) - - -
H22 P-Gain 0.01 to 10.00 (1 to 1000%) J03 P (Gain) 0.000 to 10.000

I-Gain 0.0: Inactive J04 I (Integral time) 0.0: Disable

H23
0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 to 3600.0 s
D-Gain 0.00: Inactive J05 D (Differential 0.00: Disable
H24
0.01 to 10.0 s time) 0.01 to 10.00 s
(Feedback 0.0 to 60.0 s J06 (Feedback 0.0 to 60.0 s
H25
filter) filter)
PTC thermistor 0: Inactive Thermistor 0: Disable
H26 H26
(Mode select) 1: Active (Mode selection) 1: Enable
H27 (Level) 0.00 to 5.00 V H27 (Level) 0.00 to 5.00 V

Droop -9.9 to 0.0 Hz Droop control -9.9 to 0.0 Hz

H28 H28
operation

A-39
 FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Serial link (Code) (Monitor) (Frequency (Operation Communications (Code) (Monitor) (Frequency (Run
(Function select) command) command) link function command) command)
0: X - - (Mode selection) 0: X - -
H30 H30
1: X X - 1: X X -
X: Valid 2: X - X X: Valid 2: X - X
- : Invalid 3: X X X - : Invalid 3: X X X
RS-485 1 to 31 RS-485 1 to 31
(Address) Communication
H31 y01
(Standard)
(Station address)
(Mode select 0: Trip and alarm GT (Communications 0: Immediately trip with alarm GT
on no 1: Operation for H33 timer, and alarm error processing) 1: Trip with alarm GT after running for the
response GT period specified by timer y03
H32 error) 2: Operation for H33 timer, and retry to y02 2: Retry during the period specified by timer
communicate. (If the retry fails, then y03. If the retry fails, trip with alarm GT.
the inverter trips GT.) If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continuous operation 3: Continue to run
H33 (Timer) 0.0 to 60.0 s y03 (Timer) 0.0 to 60.0 s
(Baud rate) 0: 19200 bit/s (Baud rate) 3: 19200 bps
1: 9600 2: 9600
H34 2: 4800 y04 1: 4800
3: 2400 0: 2400
4: 1200 -
(Data length) 0: 8 bits (Data length) 0: 8 bits
H35 y05
1: 7 bits 1: 7 bits
(Parity check) 0: No check (Parity check) 0: None
H36 1: Even parity y06 1: Even parity
2: Odd parity 2: Odd parity
(Stop bits) 0: 1 bit (Stop bits) 1: 1 bit
H37 y07
1: 2 bits 0: 2 bits
No response 0: No detection (No-response 0: No detection
H38 error detection 1 to 60 s y08 error detection 1 to 60 s
time) time)
(Response 0.00 to 1.00 s (Response 0.00 to 1.00 s
H39 y09
interval) interval)
Maximum Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Maximum Refer to Menu #5_03
H40 temperature of the keypad. 㧙 temperature of
heat sink heat sink
Maximum Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Maximum Refer to Menu #5_04
H41 effective the keypad. 㧙 effective output
current current
Main circuit Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Lifetime of DC Refer to Menu #5_05
H42 capacitor the keypad. 㧙 link bus
lifetime capacitor
Cooling fan Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Cumulative Refer to Menu #5_07
H43 accumulated the keypad. 㧙 run time of
operation time cooling fan
Inverter ROM Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Inverter ROM Refer to Menu #5_14
H44 㧙
version the keypad. version
Keypad panel Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Keypad panel Refer to Menu #5_16
H45 㧙
ROM version the keypad. ROM version
Option ROM Data is displayed on the LED monitor of Option ROM Refer to Menu #5_19
H46 㧙
version the keypad. version


CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-40
 App. F Replacement Information

A: Alternative motor parameters 2

FVR-E11S FRENIC-Multi
Func- Func-
Data setting range
tion Name Data setting range tion Name
(Equivalent to the setting for FVR-E11S)
code code
Maximum Maximum
A01 50 to 400 Hz A01 50 to 400 Hz
frequency 2 frequency 2
Base Base
A02 25 to 400 Hz A02 25 to 400 Hz
frequency 2 Frequency 2
Rated voltage 200 V: Rated voltage 80 to 240 V for
0V: The output voltage
2 80 to 240 V at base 0V: Output a voltage in 230 V
in proportion to the
A03 A03 frequency 2 proportion to input
power supply voltage is 400 V: 160 to 480 V for
voltage
set. 160 to 480 V 460 V
Maximum 230 V: 80 to 240 V Maximum 80 to 240V for 230 V
A04 voltage 2 A04 output voltage 2
460 V: 160 to 480 V 160 to 480 V for 460 V
Torque boost 2 0,1,2,3 to 31 Torque boost 2 Refer to the "Torque Boost Conversion
A05 A05
Table" on the last page of this appendix.
Electric 0: Inactive Electronic 0.00: Disable
thermal thermal
overload relay overload
A06 for motor 2 A07 protection
(Select) for motor 2
(Overload
detection level)
1: Active (for 4-pole standard motor) Electronic 1: For general-purpose motors with shaft
2: Active (for 4-pole inverter motor) thermal driven fan
overload 2: For inverter-driven motors, non-ventilated
A06 protection motors, or motors with forced-cooling fan
for motor 2
(Select motor
characteristics)
Electric 20 to 135% of the inverter rated current, in Electronic 20 to 135% of the rated current (allowable
thermal Ampere. thermal continuous drive current) of the motor
overload relay overload
A07 for motor 2 A07 protection
(Level) for motor 2
(Overload
detection level)
Electric Electronic
thermal thermal
overload relay overload

App.
A08 for motor 2 0.5 to 10 min A08 protection 0.5 to 10.0 min
(Thermal time for motor 2
constant) (Thermal time
constant)
Torque vector 0: Inactive Control mode 0: Disable
control 2 1: Active selection 2 (V/f operation with slip compensation
A09 A14 inactive)
1: Enable
(Dynamic torque vector operation)
Motor 2 2 to 14 Motor 2 2 to 22
A10 (Number of A15 (No. of poles)
poles)
(Capacity) 0.01 to 5.50 kW (3.7 kW or less) (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 11.0 kW
A11 A16
0.01 to 11.0 kW (5.5/7.5 kW)
(Rated 0.00 to 99.9 A (Rated current) 0.00 to 100.00 A
A12 A17
current)
A13 (Tuning) 0,1,2 A18 (Auto-tuning) 0, 1, 2

A14 (On-line tuning) 0,1 A19 (Online tuning) 0,1

(No-load 0.00 to 99.9 A (No-load 0.00 to 50.00 A
A15 A20
current) current)
A16 (%R1 setting) 0.00 to 50.00% A21 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00%

A17 (%X setting) 0.00 to 50.00% A22 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00%

(Slip 0.00 to 15.00 Hz (Rated slip 0.00 to 15.00 Hz

A18 compensation A26 frequency) (Set A23 and A25 to 100%)
control 2)
(Slip 0.01 to 10.00 s (Slip 0.01 to 10.00 s
A19 compensation A24 compensation
response time) response time)

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
A-41
Torque Boost Conversion Table

E9S/E11S FRENIC-Multi E9S/E11S FRENIC-Multi

Data for Data for Data for Data for
Data for H50 Data for H51
F08/E09 F09 F65/A05 A05
3 0.0% Data for F05 × 0.100 3 0.0%
4 0.6% Data for F05 × 0.108 4 0.6 to 0.9%
5 1.3% Data for F05 × 0.116 5 1.3 to 1.8%
6 1.9% Data for F05 × 0.125 6 1.9 to 2.8%
7 2.6% Data for F05 × 0.133 7 2.6 to 3.7%
8 3.2% Data for F05 × 0.141 8 3.2 to 4.6%
9 3.8% Data for F05 × 0.149 9 3.8 to 5.4%
10 4.5% Data for F05 × 0.157 10 4.5 to 6.3%
11 5.1% Data for F05 × 0.166 11 5.1 to 7.3%
12 5.7% Data for F05 × 0.174 12 5.7 to 8.2%
13 6.4% Data for F05 × 0.182 13 6.4 to 9.1%
14 7.0% Data for F05 × 0.190 14 7.0 to 10.0%
15 7.7% Data for F05 × 0.198 15 7.7 to 10.9%
16 8.3% Data for F05 × 0.207 16 8.3 to 11.9%
17 8.9% 1/10 of data for F04 Data for F05 × 0.215 17 8.9 to 12.8%
18 9.6% Data for F05 × 0.223 18 9.6 to 13.7%
19 10.2% Data for F05 × 0.231 19 10.2 to 14.6%
20 10.8% Data for F05 × 0.239 20 10.8 to 15.4%
21 11.5% Data for F05 × 0.248 21 11.5 to 16.4%
22 12.1% Data for F05 × 0.256 22 12.1 to 17.3%
23 12.8% Data for F05 × 0.264 23 12.8 to 18.2%
24 13.4% Data for F05 × 0.272 24 13.4 to 19.1%
25 14.0% Data for F05 × 0.280 25 14.0 to 20.0%
26 14.7% Data for F05 × 0.289 26 14.7 to 21.0%
27 15.3% Data for F05 × 0.297 27 15.3 to 21.9%
28 15.9% Data for F05 × 0.305 28 15.9 to 22.8%
29 16.6% Data for F05 × 0.313 29 16.6 to 23.7%
30 17.2% Data for F05 × 0.321 30 17.2 to 24.6%
31 17.9% Data for F05 × 0.329 31 17.9 to 25.4%

Torque boost pattern of FVR-E9S/E11S

Output voltage

Base voltage
(100%)

1/10 of base frequency Base frequency

Torque boost pattern of FRENIC-Multi

Output voltage

Base voltage
(100%)

With non-linear V/f pattern

H51
Without non-linear V/f pattern
F09/A05

H50 Base frequency

A-42
 Glossary
This glossary explains the technical terms that are frequently used in this manual.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
 Glossary

Acceleration time Auto energy saving operation

Period required when an inverter accelerates its Energy saving operation that automatically drives
output from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency. the motor with lower output voltage when the motor
Related function codes: F03, F07, E10, and H54 load has been light, for minimizing the product of
voltage and current (electric power).
Alarm mode Related function codes: F37 and A13
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. If the inverter detects any malfunction, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) control
error, or fault in its operation, it immediately shuts A control that keeps an output voltage constant
down or trips the output to the motor and enters this regardless of variations of the input source voltage or
mode in which corresponding alarm codes are load.
displayed on the LED monitor.
Base frequency
Alarm output (for any faults)
A mechanical contact output signal that is generated
when the inverter is halted by an alarm, by
short-circuiting between terminals [30A] and [30C].
Related function code: E27
See Alarm mode.

Analog input
An external voltage or current input signal to give The minimum frequency at which an inverter
the inverter the frequency command. The analog delivers a constant voltage in the output V/f pattern.
voltage is applied on the terminal [12], the current on Related function codes: F04 and A02
the [C1]. These terminals are also used to input the
signal from the external potentiometer, PTC Bias
thermistor and PID feedback signals depending on
the function code definition. A value to be added to an analog input frequency to
Related function codes: F01, C30, E59, E61 to E63 modify and produce the output frequency.
and J02 Related function codes: F18, C50 to C52

Analog output Braking torque

An analog DC output signal of the monitored data Torque that acts in a direction that will stop a rotating

Glossary
such as the output frequency, the current and voltage motor (or the force required to stop a running motor).
inside an inverter. The signal drives an analog meter
installed outside the inverter for indicating the
current inverter running status.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.3.1 "Terminal
functions."

Automatic deceleration
A control mode in which deceleration time is
automatically extended up to 3 times of the
commanded time to prevent the inverter from
tripping due to an overvoltage caused by
regenerative power even if a braking resistor is not
used.
Related function code: H69

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
G-1
 If a deceleration time is shorter than the natural Constant torque load
stopping time (coast-to-stop) determined by a
moment of inertia for a load machine, then the motor A constant torque load is characterized by:
works as a generator when it decelerates, causing the 1) A requirement for an essentially constant torque,
kinetic energy of the load to be converted to regardless of the load shaft speed
electrical energy that is returned to the inverter from 2) A power requirement that decreases in
the motor. If this power (regenerative power) is proportion to the load shaft speed
consumed or accumulated by the inverter, the motor Related function code: F37 and A13
generates a braking force called "braking torque." Applications: Conveyors, elevators, and carrier
machines
Carrier frequency
Frequency used to establish the modulation period of
a pulse width under the PWM control system. The
higher the carrier frequency, the closer the inverter
output current approaches a sinusoidal waveform
and the quieter the motor becomes.
Related function code: F26

Coast-to-stop
If the inverter stops its output when the motor is Control circuit terminals
running, the motor will coast to a stop due to inertial Terminals on the inverter, which are used for
force. input/output of signals to control or manage the
inverter/external equipment directly or indirectly
Communications link function
A feature to control an inverter from external Current limiter
equipment serially linked to the inverter such as a PC A control that keeps an inverter output frequency
or PLC. within the specified current limit.
Related function code: H30
Cursor
Constant feeding rate time
Marker blinking on the four-digit, 7-segment LED
Time required for an object to move in a constant monitor which shows that data in the blinking digit
distance previously defined. The faster speed, the can be changed/modified by keying operation.
shorter time and vise versa. This facility may be
applied to a chemical process that determines a Curvilinear V/f pattern
processing time of materials as the speed such as
heating, cooling, drying, or infiltration in some A generic name for the inverter output patterns with
constant-speed machinery. curvilinear relation between the frequency and
Related function codes: E39 and E50. voltage.
Refer to function code H07 in Chapter 9, Section
Constant output load 9.2.5 "H codes."
A constant output load is characterized by: DC braking (DC braking)
1) The required torque is in inverse proportion to the
load shaft speed DC current braking that an inverter injects into the
2) An essentially constant power requirement motor to brake and stop it against the moment of
Related function code: F37 and A13 inertia of the motor or its load. The inertial energy
Applications: Machine tool spindles generated is consumed as heat in the motor.
If a motor having the load with large moment of
inertia is going to stop abruptly, the moment of
inertia may force to rotate the motor after the inverter
output frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz. Use DC
braking to stop the motor completely.
Related function codes: F20 to F22 and A09 to A11

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
G-2
 Glossary

DC link bus voltage Frequency resolution

Voltage at the DC link bus that is the end stage of the The minimum step, or increment, in which output
converter part of inverters. The part rectifies the frequency is varied, rather than continuously.
input AC power to charge the DC link bus capacitor
as the DC power to be inverted to AC power. Function code
Code to customize the inverter. Setting function
Deceleration time codes realizes the potential capability of the inverter
Period during which an inverter slows its output to meet it for the individual power system
frequency down from the maximum to 0 Hz. applications.
Related function codes: F03, F08, E11, and H54
Gain (for frequency setting)
Digital input A frequency setting gain enables varying the slope of
Input signals given to the programmable input the output of the frequency set with an analog input
terminals or the programmable input terminals signal.
themselves. A command assigned to the digital input Related function codes: C32, C34, C37, C39, C42,
is called the terminal command to control the and C44
inverter externally.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.3.1 "Terminal IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
functions." Stands for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor that
enables the inverter section to switch high
Electronic thermal overload protection voltage/current DC power in very high speed and to
Electronic thermal overload protection to issue an output pulse train.
early warning of the motor overheating to safeguard
a motor. Interphase unbalance
An inverter calculates the motor overheat condition A condition of an AC input voltage (supply voltage)
based on the internal data (given by function code that states the voltage balance of each phase in an
P99/A39 about the properties of the motor) and the expression as:
driving conditions such as the drive current, voltage
and frequency. Interphase voltage unbalance (%)
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
= × 67
External potentiometer Three - phase average voltage (V)
A potentiometer (optional) that is used to set Inverse mode operation
frequencies as well as built-in one.
A mode of operation in which the output frequency

Glossary
Fan stop operation lowers as the analog input signal level rises.
A mode of control in which the cooling fan is shut Jogging operation
down if the internal temperature in the inverter is low
and when no operation command is issued. A special operation mode of inverters, in which a
Related function code: H06 motor jogs forward or reverse for a short time at a
slower speed than usual operating modes.
Frequency accuracy (stability) Related function codes: C20 and H54
The percentage of variations in output frequency to a Jump frequencies
predefined maximum frequency.
Frequencies that have a certain output with no
Frequency limiter change in the output frequency within the specified
frequency band in order to skip the resonance point
Frequency limiter used inside the inverter to control of a machine (resonance frequency).
the internal drive frequency in order to keep the Related function codes: C01 to C04
motor speed within the specified level between the
peak and bottom frequencies. Keypad operation
Related function codes: F15, F16, and H64
To use a keypad to run an inverter.

Line speed
Running speed of an object (e.g., conveyor) driven
by the motor. The unit is meter per minute, m/min.
G-3
 Load shaft speed Programming mode
Number of revolutions per minute (r/min) of a One of the three operation modes supported by the
rotating load driven by the motor, such as a fan. inverter. This mode uses the menu-driven system
and allows the user to set function codes or check the
Main circuit terminals inverter status/maintenance information.
Power input/output terminals of an inverter, which
includes terminals to connect the power supply, PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
motor, DC reactor, braking resistor, and other power thermistor
components. Type of thermistor with a positive temperature
Maximum frequency coefficient. Used to safeguard a motor.
Related function codes: H26 and H27
The output frequency commanded by the input of the
maximum value of a frequency setup signal (for Rated capacity
example, 10 V for a voltage input range of 0 to 10 V The rating of an inverter output capacity (at the
or 20 mA for a current input range of 4 to 20 mA). secondary side), or the apparent power that is
Related function codes: F03 and A01 represented by the rated output voltage times the
Modbus RTU rated output current, which is calculated by solving
the following equation and is stated in kVA:
Communication protocol used in global FA network
market, which is developed by Modicon, Inc. USA. Rated capacity (kVA)
3 u Rated output voltage (V)
Momentary voltage drop immunity
u Rated output current (A) u 10 3
The minimum voltage (V) and time (ms) that permit
continued rotation of the motor after a momentary The rated output voltage is assumed to be 220 V for
voltage drop (momentary power failure). 230 V equipment and 440 V for 460 V equipment.

Multi-frequency selection Rated output current

To preset frequencies (up to 15 stages), then select A total RMS equivalent to the current that flows
them at some later time using external signals. through the output terminal under the rated input and
Related function codes: E01 to E05, C05 to C19 output conditions (the output voltage, current,
frequency, and load factor meet their rated
Nominal applied motor conditions). Essentially, inverter rated at 200 V
covers the current of a 200 V, 50 Hz 6-pole motor
Rated output (in kW) of a general-purpose motor that
and inverter rated at 400 V covers the current of a
is used as a standard motor listed in tables in Chapter
380 V, 50 Hz 4-pole motor.
6, "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT"
and Chapter 8, "SPECIFICATIONS." Rated output voltage
Overload capability A fundamental wave RMS equivalent to the voltage
that is generated across the output terminal when the
The overload current that an inverter can tolerate, AC input voltage (supply voltage) and frequency
expressed as a percentage of the rated output current meet their rated conditions and the output frequency
and also as a permissible energization time. of the inverter equals the base frequency.
PID control Required power supply capacity
The scheme of control that brings controlled objects The capacity required of a power supply for an
to a desired value quickly and accurately, and which inverter. This is calculated by solving either of the
consists of three categories of action: proportional, following equations and is stated in kVA:
integral and differential. Required power supply capacity (kVA)
Proportional action minimizes errors from a set point.
Integral action resets errors from a desired value to 0. = 3 × 200 × Input RMS current (200 V, 50 Hz)
or
Differential action applies a control value in
= 3 × 220 × Input RMS current (220 V, 60 Hz)
proportion to a differential component of the
difference between the PID reference and feedback Required power supply capacity (kVA)
values.
= 3 × 400 × Input RMS current (400 V, 50 Hz)
Related function codes: E01 to E05, E40, E41, E43, or
E61 to E63, C51, C52, J01 to J62 = 3 × 440 × Input RMS current (40 V, 6 0 Hz)
CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
G-4
 Glossary

Running mode Thermal time constant

One of the three operation modes supported by the The time needed to activate the electronic thermal
inverter. If the inverter is turned ON, it automatically overload protection after the preset operation level
enters this mode which you may: run/stop the motor, (current) continuously flows. This is an adjustable
set up the set frequency, monitor the running status, function code data to meet the property of a motor
and jog the motor. that is not manufactured by Fuji Electric.
Related function codes: F12 and A08
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
(weak/strong) Torque boost
To reduce the shock to the machine during If a general-purpose motor is run with an inverter,
acceleration/deceleration, the inverter gradually voltage drops will have a pronounced effect in a
accelerates/decelerates the motor at the both ends of low-frequency region, reducing the motor output
the acceleration/deceleration zones like a figure of S torque. In a low-frequency range, therefore, to
letter. increase the motor output torque, it is necessary to
Related function code: H07 augment the output voltage. This process of voltage
compensation is called torque boost.
Slip compensation control Related function codes: F09 and A05
A mode of control in which the output frequency of
an inverter plus an amount of slip compensation is
used as an actual output frequency to compensate for
motor slippage.
Related function codes: P09 to P12 and A23 to A26

Stall
A behavior of a motor when it loses speed by
tripping of the inverter due to overcurrent detection
or other malfunctions of the inverter. Transistor output
A control signal that generates predefined data from
Starting frequency within an inverter via a transistor (open collector).
The minimum frequency at which an inverter starts
its output (not the frequency at which a motor starts Trip
rotating). In response to an overvoltage, overcurrent, or any
Related function codes: F23 and A12 other unusual condition, actuation of an inverter's

Glossary
protective circuit to stop the inverter output.
Starting torque
Torque that a motor produces when it starts rotating V/f characteristic
(or the drive torque with which the motor can run a A characteristic expression of the variations in
load). output voltage V (V), and relative to variations in
output frequency f (Hz). To achieve efficient motor
Simultaneous keying operation, an appropriate V/f (voltage/frequency)
To simultaneously press the 2 keys on the keypad. characteristic helps a motor produce its output torque
This presents the special function of inverters. matching the torque characteristics of a load.

Stop frequency
The output frequency at which an inverter stops its
output.
Related function code: F25

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
G-5
 V/f control
The rotating speed N (r/min) of a motor can be stated
in an expression as
N 120 u f u (1  s)
p
where,
f: Output frequency
p: Number of poles
s: Slippage
On the basis of this expression, varying the output
frequency varies the speed of the motor. However,
simply varying the output frequency f (Hz) would
result in an overheated motor or would not allow the
motor to demonstrate its optimum utility if the output
voltage V (V) remains constant. For this reason, the
output voltage V must be varied with the output
frequency f by using an inverter. This scheme of
control is called V/f control.

Variable torque load

A squared torque load is characterized by:
1) A change in the required torque in proportion to
the square of the number of revolutions per minute.
2) A power requirement that decreases in proportion
to the cube of the decrease in the number of
revolutions per minute.
Re quired power (kW )
Rotating speed (r / min) u Torque ( N x m)
9.55
Related function code: F37 and A13
Applications: Fans and pumps

Voltage and frequency variations

Variations in the input voltage or frequency within
permissible limits. Variations outside these limits
might cause an inverter or motor to fail.

CTi Automation - Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 208.368.0415 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]
G-6